JP2024019452A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part has plural first recessed parts formed by a leftward diffusion part 425a, a front direction diffusion part 425b, and a rightward diffusion part 425c at least by the width of an emission surface of an LED 424 for a backside lower part. Accordingly, light applied from the first LED 424 for a backside lower part is diffused by optical paths in three directions within a backside light guide plate 420 by plural recessed parts of the diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part. Since the diffusion part 425a for a leftward direction, the diffusion part 425b for a front direction, and the diffusion part 425c for a rightward direction are configured to have the same side length each, width of optical paths of light to be diffused is also configured to be identical.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with a display section that can change the design visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality of light emitting means that can change the emitted color or a single color. By changing the display mode of the means, it is configured to enhance the performance effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126296

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the light emitting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and a determination is made based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine that includes a determining means and provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means, the gaming machine providing a predetermined gaming value to a player based on the determination result by the determining means. a suggestion information lottery means for drawing a lottery for the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting a degree of expectation to be given to a player; first suggestion information, second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be given is high based on the first suggestion information; and third suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level that value will be given is high, and the gaming machine includes a first light emitting means that emits light; A second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means is provided.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a determination means for making a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means; A gaming machine that grants a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by a determining means, the gaming machine suggesting an expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be granted to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Suggestion information lottery means for drawing a selection of suggestions based on possible suggestion information, the suggestion information being at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be given. and second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded based on the first suggestion information, and that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded based on the second suggestion information. Third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the player has a high level of expectation, the gaming machine includes a first light emitting means that emits light; and a different second light emitting means. This has the effect that the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing the pattern arrangement arranged on each reel of a drum display device. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a board back unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit. It is a front side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back side of the light guide unit. 8 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp and the display area forming member with respect to a schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along the line XX in FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of a front light guide plate and a rear light guide plate. FIG. 7 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group that can be displayed by lighting on the rear light guide plate, the rear upper LED of the rear upper LED unit, and the rear lower LED of the lower LED unit; . 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. 12, showing the relationship between the rear downward diffusion lens formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate and the rear downward LED of the lower LED unit. FIG. It is a front view. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of part B in FIG. 13, and is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through the rear downward diffusion lens. It is a figure showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group which is lit and displayed on the rear side light guide plate, and (a) shows the rear side upper LED and the rear side lower LED corresponding to the right area of the rear side light guide plate. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the LED is lit, and (b) is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the LED is lit. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative pattern group when LED and rear side downward LED are additionally turned on. 15(a) is a diagram illustrating the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, and (a) is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, and (a) shows the rear light guide plate corresponding to the left area of the rear light guide plate. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the upper side LED and the lower rear side LED are additionally lit. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right side area of the light guide plate are turned off. It is a figure showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group which is lit up and displayed on the rear side light guide plate when the confirmation lamp is lit, and (a) is a diagram in which the confirmation lamp is not lit and the rear side light guide plate is lit. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right side area of the side light guide plate are lit. ), while the confirmation lamp is lit and the rear lower LED corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, the LED corresponding to the central area and right side area of the rear light guide plate is lit. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LED is turned off. 17(a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate as the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17(b). FIG. While continuing to light up, and while additionally lighting up the rear lower LED corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate, It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the upper side LED is turned off, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the confirmation lamp is turned off from the state of (a), and , the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper side LEDs and the rear lower side LED corresponding to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate are turned on. It is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the lights are turned off. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit, and the front left LED unit. It is a front view. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through each condensing lens. (a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group can be displayed by lighting, and (b) is a diagram showing the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group can be displayed by lighting. It is a figure which showed the uneven|corrugated shape which forms a 4th decorative pattern group, and the direction of the light by which this 4th decorative pattern group can be displayed by lighting. It is a figure showing the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative pattern group, the 3rd decorative pattern, and the 4th decorative pattern group which are lit and displayed on the front side light guide plate, and (a) is a figure for the front right side with respect to the front side light guide plate. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group when the LED and the front left LED are lit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group when the LED and the front left LED are lit. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative pattern group when LED is lit. It is a figure showing the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative pattern group, the 3rd decorative pattern, and the 4th decorative pattern group which are lit and displayed on the front side light guide plate, and (a) is the front side of the center part with respect to the front side light guide plate. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 3rd decorative pattern when the downward LED is lit, and (b) is the 2nd decoration when all the front side downward LEDs are lit with respect to the front side light guide plate. It is a figure which showed typically the lighting mode of a pattern group and a 3rd decorative pattern. It is a diagram showing the effects performed on the front light guide plate, the rear light guide plate, and the drum display device, and (a) shows the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern group, and the fourth decorative pattern group. FIG. 3B is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of the 4th decorative pattern group, while the 4th decorative pattern group is in the non-lighting state, while the 1st decorative pattern group, the 2nd decorative pattern group, and the 3rd decorative pattern group are non-lit. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the state. It is a figure showing the effect performed by a front side light guide plate, a rear side light guide plate, and a drum display device, and (a) is a figure in which the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern are in a lit state, while the first decorative pattern group is in a lit state. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of the fourth decorative pattern group, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing a non-lighting state of a decorative pattern group. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, each held ball storage area, and held ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reservation number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern tables, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern tables, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern tables. , is a diagram schematically showing an example of a C table of a stop pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for loss. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a light guide plate lighting pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a fixed lamp lighting pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of each possessed information storage area and execution information storage area. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the final lamp lighting setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the light guide pattern setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light distributed by the rear lower diffusion lens when the rear lower LED 1 is turned on. FIG. 3 is a schematic side sectional view of the front light guide plate showing the light guiding mode of the light inside the front light guide plate when the front lower LED is turned on; FIG. It is a figure schematically showing the light guide mode in the front side light guide plate of the light which entered the front side light guide plate at the angle of 45 degrees, and (b) is a figure which showed the light guide mode in the front side light guide plate at the downward angle of 45 degrees from the front side lower LED. It is a diagram schematically showing the light guide mode of the incident light inside the front light guide plate, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the light guide mode of the incident light inside the front side light guide plate, and (c) is a diagram showing how the light that is incident on the front side light guide plate is incident on the front side light guide plate in the direct front direction from the front lower LED. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a light guiding mode. 20 is a diagram showing the position of a switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate shown in FIG. 19. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view schematically showing a light guide mode in the front light guide plate of light incident on the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees from the front right LED. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship of a drum display device with respect to the typical side sectional view of the light guide unit in 2nd Embodiment. The positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group and the third upper LED, which can be displayed by lighting on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative pattern group and the third right LED unit. It is a typical front view showing the positional relationship with the right side LED, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and the third left side LED of the third left side LED unit. It is an explanatory view showing a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation production of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed in the drum display device in the fourth embodiment, and (a) shows the state in which the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 1" is stopped. (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of (a); ) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach forming pattern" is stopped, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which "reach display" is performed from state (c). It is a diagram. It is an exploded perspective view of the left reel unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operating principle of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between excitation data and an excitation order pointer in a fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed in a series of variation effects in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed at the time of the performance of "full rotation" in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of normal acceleration processing in a 5th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of special acceleration processing in a 5th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the production of "full rotation" in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the "full rotation" effect performed on the drum display device in the fifth embodiment, and (a) shows a state in which the provisional jackpot result due to the "1" symbol is stopped. (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and right reel have started rotating in normal acceleration processing from the state in (a), and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the state in (b). This is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and the right reel are rotating at high speed and at a constant speed, and the left reel has started rotating due to special acceleration processing. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left reel, middle reel, and right reel are rotating at high speed and constant speed. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reels are rotating at a high and constant speed, and (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the tentative jackpot result due to the "2" symbol has stopped from the state in (e). It is. It is a flowchart which shows the motor control process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reel rotation start processing performed by MPU in a display control device of a 5th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the production of "full rotation" in the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the production of "full rotation" in the seventh embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 26) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door open switch (not shown) that detects when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). .

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance performed on the drum display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. Further, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select performance contents and execution timing, such as the type of so-called preview display, which is one aspect of variable performance.

The variable performance is a performance displayed on the drum display device 81, and as described later, the ball fired into the front area of the game board 13 is placed in a specific winning opening (the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64a, which will be described later). It is executed when the ball enters the hole 64b (see Figure 3) (starting winning), and after symbols (each of the third symbols printed on the drum display device 81 described later) are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, it stops. This is an effect that presents to the player the result of the lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) for the starting prize based on the combination of displayed symbols.

A stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to the various performances displayed on the drum display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "town stage," "sky stage," and "island stage." is provided. Various performances, such as the above-mentioned fluctuating performance and the reach performance executed during the fluctuating performance, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

The stage change is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which no variation effect is being performed or during high-speed variation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed variation manner that is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the display is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" →... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when a "normal reach" performance element, which will be described later, is started in a variable performance performed on the drum display device 81, the "normal reach" performance element will be developed into a "super reach" performance element, which will also be described later. At this time, the drum display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the "Super Reach" effect element during the "Normal Reach" effect element.

On the selection screen, a plurality of performance element candidates that can be selected as the performance element of "Super Reach" are displayed, and one of the performance element candidates is selected. When the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected performance element candidate is changed. Then, the content of the production element of "Super Reach" is determined based on the production element candidate selected at the time of development to the production element of "Super Reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), and according to the content, " The effect elements of "Super Reach" are executed on the drum display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can press the frame button 22 in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in front of the pachinko machine 10). , rearward, rightward, and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the production element of "Super Reach" may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Around the periphery of the window 14c, there is a full-color light emitting diode ("Light Emitting Diode", hereinafter sometimes referred to as "LED") that can emit light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, blue-green, green, yellow, red). There are provided illumination parts 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the ball while the button is pressed, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. (not shown) is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. The ball firing interval in the ball firing unit 112a is determined to be approximately 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball naturally falls and is ejected from the bottom opening. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 26), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board constituting the main control device 110, there is a setting key 501 used by hall personnel etc. to change or confirm the set probability setting value. The setting change switch 502 is used to update the probability setting value by operating it while changing the settings, and when you want to initialize the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 110), or when changing the setting, you can update the probability setting value. A RAM erase switch 503 used to confirm (determine) the probability setting value and a probability display device 504 capable of displaying the probability setting value are provided.

The setting key 501, setting change switch 502, and RAM erase switch 503 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel etc. without opening the board box 100. It is now possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main substrate covered by the substrate box 100.

The setting key 501 can be switched between the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key managed by hall personnel etc. into the keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between two positions. The setting key 501 is in the OFF state when it is located on the OFF side, and is on when it is located on the ON side, and once it has been rotated to each state, it can be rotated again by the administrator etc. Each state is maintained unless operated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when changing the probability setting value (that is, "setting change mode" to be described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 by operating it when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Additionally, this RAM erase switch 503 is used to finish updating the probability setting value (i.e., end the "setting change mode") when changing the probability setting value (i.e., "setting change mode" described later). be done.

In the first embodiment, if this RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (that is, when the power switch is turned on), the main controller A RAM erase signal is output to 110 to clear the backup data. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and a RAM erase signal is input, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and also issues a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Furthermore, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in a state where the probability setting value can be updated (that is, "setting change mode" described later), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability setting value is to be ended, and The state where the value can be updated is ended, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value when confirming the probability setting value (i.e., "setting confirmation mode" to be described later) or changing the probability setting value (i.e., "setting change mode" to be described later). It is configured as follows. This probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, in a game ready state or when the power is turned off), and the probability setting value is not displayed. In the "setting change mode" and "setting confirmation mode"), the current probability setting value is displayed by lighting.

Here, a startup mode when powering up the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. It is composed of

The pachinko machine 10 has four startup modes: "RAM clear mode," "setting change mode," "setting confirmation mode," and "normal mode."

"RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

"Setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in this "setting change mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated every time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this "setting change mode", the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the probability setting value is updated as the probability setting value is updated. The display on display device 504 is also changed.

“Setting confirmation mode” is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

"Normal mode" is a startup mode other than these "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", and "setting confirmation mode", and is a startup mode when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or is stored in the RAM 203. This mode is for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut off by executing various startup processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203, except when the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. be.

In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, leaving it in the off state) and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". Further, when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting change mode". Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 503 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting confirmation mode".

In addition, if the data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", if the update of the probability setting value is finished in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or if the setting key 501 is turned off in the "setting confirmation mode", When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is ended and a transition is made to the "normal mode", and the pachinko machine 10 becomes ready to start playing.

In this way, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel etc. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either "RAM clear mode", which is a start-up mode that is not related to the probability setting value, or "normal mode".

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the hall personnel etc. can start up the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not they turn on the RAM erase switch 503. As the mode, it is possible to select either "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" which is related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When setting the startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value, the startup mode is set to "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when setting the startup mode related to the probability setting value, the startup mode is set to "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on or not. You can choose whether to

Here, if the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game will be changed, so if you continue the game by taking over the gaming state before the power cut, for example, the jackpot probability in the pending variable performance, There may be discrepancies with the jackpot probability of the variable performance that will be obtained from now on, or the jackpots counted as the limit number (described later) may be accumulated with different jackpot probabilities, etc. There is a risk that you will not be able to fully demonstrate your abilities. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 changes the probability setting value in the "setting change mode", the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). On the other hand, the "setting confirmation mode" is a startup mode that only confirms the probability setting value, so the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (cleared do not).

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. If you want to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, turn on the setting key 501 before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. . When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" that clears the data stored in the RAM 203, while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 503, turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10. Turn on. In other words, if those involved in the hall understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required on the Pachinko machine 10 for the startup mode that will be launched from now on.

Furthermore, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", a special key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability, or from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Furthermore, since the RAM erase switch 503 is provided in a position that is normally not easily touched by the player, it is also possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

Furthermore, there are only two switches etc. to be operated at the same time even when starting up in the "setting change mode", which allows sufficient operation with both hands, resulting in good operability. As described above, the hall personnel etc. can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

In addition, when starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether the inner frame 12 is opened or not is activated. ) may be on, that is, the inner frame 12 may be open.

This is because in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for hall personnel etc. to visually check the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 12 must be open. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the on state, it will not start up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode". Similarly to the case where the setting key 501 is off, if the RAM erase switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in "normal mode", and when the RAM erase switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in "RAM clear mode". Launch 10. As a result, even though the setting key 501 is in the on state and the inner frame 12 is closed, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine starts up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode". It is possible to prevent the game from starting in step 10. Furthermore, in order to open the inner frame 12, a special key managed by the hall is required. Therefore, the player is prevented from opening the inner frame 12 without permission, checking the probability setting value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high probability of hitting the jackpot, or changing the probability setting value to a high probability without permission. It can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 includes a resin base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding the ball, and a general prize opening 63. , a first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b, a regular electric role 64c, a variable prize winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., are assembled.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (flowing area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 26) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the board 60.

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the normal electric role 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).

In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 or A drum type that performs a fluctuating effect on multiple reels (left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR (see Figure 4) to be described later) on which the third symbol is printed while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. A normal symbol consisting of a drum display device 81 composed of a rotating device and an LED that displays a normal symbol in a variable manner using the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as "variable display"). A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the drum display device 81.

The drum display device 81 is assembled to a backside unit 300 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, and includes a left reel unit 81a1 having a left reel LR, a middle reel unit 81a2 having a middle reel CR, and a right reel unit 81a2 having a right reel RR. It has a drum unit 81a that is integrally configured with a reel unit 81a3, and is variably driven by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, so that the reels LR, CR, and RR are variably displayed. The effective line in the drum display device 81 is set as the range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) of the light guide unit 400 (described later) on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. be done.

A plurality of symbols are printed on each reel LR, CR, and RR, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each reel LR, CR, and RR, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the drum display device 81. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, the game status is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 under the control of the main controller 110, whereas the drum display is a decorative display that corresponds to the display on the special symbol display device 37. This is done in the device 81. In addition, instead of the drum-type rotating device, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like may be used to constitute the display device for the third symbol.

Note that instead of the drum-type rotating device, for example, a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device may be used to configure a display device that variably displays the third symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the symbol arrangement of each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol arrangement arranged on each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in FIG. 4, 16 symbol areas are formed on each reel LR, CR, and RR, and with some exceptions (i.e., the "543" symbol on the middle reel CR), the third symbol area and Blank areas are arranged alternately.

For example, on the left reel LR, from top to bottom, "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank. The symbols are arranged as follows: region, "7" symbol, blank region, "8" symbol, blank region, "chance" symbol, and blank region. Therefore, when the left reel LR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed in descending order such as "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol →...

Also, on the right reel RR, in order from the top: "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank. The symbols are arranged as follows: region, "2" symbol, blank region, "1" symbol, blank region, "chance" symbol, and blank region. Therefore, when the right reel RR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed in ascending order such as "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol →...

Furthermore, in order from the top, the middle reel CR has an "8" symbol, a blank area, a "7" symbol, a blank area, a "6" symbol, a blank area, a "543" symbol, a blank area, a "2" symbol, and a blank. The symbols are arranged as follows: area, "1" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, and blank area. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is rotated downward, like the right reel RR, the symbols will be displayed in ascending order such as "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol →... Displayed variably.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three symbols are visible on each reel LR, CR, and RR from the central opening of a display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper parallel line formed by the symbol at the top of the left reel LR, the symbol at the top of the middle reel CR, and the symbol at the top of the right reel RR is used as the effective line for the variable display of the third symbol. , a central parallel line formed by the left reel LR middle symbol, the middle reel CR middle symbol, and the right reel RR middle symbol, the left reel LR lower symbol, the middle reel CR lower symbol, and the right reel RR lower symbol. The lower parallel line formed, the symbol at the top of the left reel LR, the symbol at the middle of the middle reel CR, and the lower right line formed by the symbol at the bottom of the right reel RR, the symbol at the bottom of the left reel LR, the symbol at the middle of the middle reel CR, and the right A total of five active lines are set, including a line rising to the right formed by the symbols at the top of the reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three numerical symbols (third symbols) are displayed on each reel LR, CR, and RR from the center opening of a display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main symbol") and a blank area are configured to be visible. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3×3=9 number symbols and the blank area are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the valid lines for the variable display of the third symbol include the number symbols or blank area at the top of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank area at the top of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank area at the top of the middle reel CR. The upper parallel line formed by the upper number symbols or blank area, the number symbols or blank area in the middle of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank area in the middle of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank area in the middle of the right reel RR. The lower parallel line formed by the middle parallel line formed, the number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the left reel LR, the number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the middle reel CR, and the number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the right reel RR, the left reel A descending line to the right formed by the number symbols or blank area at the top of LR, the number symbols or blank area at the center of middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank area at the bottom of right reel RR, the number symbols or blank area at the bottom of left reel LR A total of five effective lines are set: , a number symbol or blank area in the middle of the middle reel CR, and an upward-sloping line formed by the number symbol or blank area at the top of the right reel RR.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on one of the active lines. ) is carried out, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuating display ends. When shifting to a high probability state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are aligned on any active line. On the other hand, when shifting to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuating display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to "low probability symbols") are aligned on any active line.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the third symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left reel LR → right reel RR → middle reel CR during each variable performance. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of jackpot symbols (same main symbol combination) is arranged on any active line, a jackpot effect (for example, rainbow lighting display, etc.) is executed as a jackpot. Also, since the symbol arrangement on the left reel LR and right reel RR is reversed (ascending and descending order), if the left reel LR and right reel RR stop, the same symbol will appear on the active line 1 or 2, respectively. The design is configured so that it can be stopped. That is, it is configured such that a single reach, in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed only on one active line, and a double reach, in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on two active lines, can occur.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. While the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable presentation (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the first starting port 64a. If the ball enters the field, the number of balls entered (number of balls held) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol of the first reserved symbol display portion Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the reserved display portion Db provided at the lower part of the drum display device 81 in front view. It is also shown in the first to fourth reserved symbol display sections Db1a to Db1d. The special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1d display one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( The white circle symbol)) is displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1d of special figure 1. be done.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display part Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display parts Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is twice, and if a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display parts Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if no pending symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th pending symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, there is a variable effect in which the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 0 and is being held. Show that you do not.

In addition, while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a fluctuating presentation (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball will start the second start. When a ball enters the opening 64b, the number of times the ball enters the ball (the number of balls held) is held up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the second special symbol of the second reserved symbol display portion Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the reserved display portion Db provided at the lower part of the drum display device 81 in front view. It is also shown in the first to fourth reserved symbol display sections Db2a to Db2d. The special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2d display one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( The white circle symbol)) is displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the second special symbol is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2d. be done.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display part Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display parts Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is twice, and if a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if the reserved symbol is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display parts Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a suspended variable effect. Show that you do not.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, but only one of the lottery games is executed. It is composed of In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the lottery games in progress is finished, if the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are respectively stored, is configured to execute the second lottery game with the second special symbol preferentially over the first lottery game with the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). Note that the lottery games may be executed in the order in which the prizes are won (so-called winning order variation), or the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (so-called special (Figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) may be configured.

At the center of the pending display section Db, an executed symbol display section Db0 is provided in which an executed symbol indicating that a variable performance is being executed on the drum display device 81 is displayed. This execution symbol display section Db0 is provided in the central part of the reservation display section Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reservation symbol display section Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reservation symbol display section Db2a, It is configured such that an executed symbol larger than each pending symbol displayed on each pending symbol display section Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d is displayed. In addition, this executed symbol display section Db0 displays the reserved symbol that was displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display section Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display section Db2a by moving (shifting) and displaying it as an executed symbol. Ru.

The executed symbol displayed on the executed symbol display section Db0 is erased when the variable performance ends, and with the erasure of the executed symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is moved to the lower side (the right side if it is the first special symbol, the right side if it is the first special symbol, etc.). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved symbols of the second special symbol and four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the executed symbol displayed on the executed symbol display section Db0 is deleted, the reserved symbol displayed on the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display section Db1a is moved as the executed symbol on the executed symbol display section Db0. (shift) and displayed. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display section Db1b are moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbols in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display section Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display section Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display section Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display section Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special symbol 1 third reserved symbol display section Db1c.

Also, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display section Db0 is erased with the end of the variable production of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display section Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an executed symbol in the executed symbol display section Db0. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display section Db2b are moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbols in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display section Db2a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display section Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display section Db2b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display section Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display section Db2c.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of balls held is The number of pitches is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display section Db, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device, etc.) different from the reserved display section Db, or divided into four sections. The displayed area may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the reserved display section Db. Further, the variable display unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of held lamps in the lit state. It may also be used to display a number.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "○" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit as display symbols (normal symbols) each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric symbol 64c above the second starting port 64b in front view is set to a predetermined value. It is configured to be activated (opened) for only a certain amount of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the normal symbol retention lamp 84. Four normal symbol holding lamps 84 are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81. Then, the number of reservations is displayed based on the number of normal symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

The variable display of the normal symbols can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. It is also possible to use only a portion of the information. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the drum display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls allowed to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

More specifically, the variable display of the normal symbols may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution portion. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution part.

On the front side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, a display area forming member 430, a front light guide plate 410, and a rear light guide plate 420 (see FIG. 8) are arranged as a unit in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A light guide unit 400 is provided.

The display area forming member 430 is made of transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate), and has a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 that is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of a front light guide plate 410 and a rear light guide plate 420, which will be described later and are assembled into the light guide unit 400. Further, this display area forming member 430 has a central opening 431 formed therein so that three symbols can be seen on each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. . A predetermined lens cut 432 is formed around the periphery of the central opening 431, and is configured so that the rear side of the lens cut 432 cannot be seen or is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the symbol display area and effective line on the drum display device 81 are clearly shown to the player by the lens cut 432 at the periphery of the central opening 431. Note that details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and, like the display area forming member 430, is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. It is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are assembled into the optical unit 400. Further, in this front light guide plate 410, a part of the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420 which are arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. It is composed of Further, on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), various uneven lens cuts are made, and a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, or a front left LED, which will be described later, are cut. By lighting up each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c of the unit 416 (see FIGS. 8 and 9), the second decorative pattern group 411, which is a pattern imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals (so-called cherry blossom snowstorm pattern), and a sunfish pattern are displayed. A third decorative pattern 412, which is a pattern that resembles a plurality of bubbles, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 (see FIG. 17), which is a pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles (so-called bubble group pattern), are each displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. is configured to be Note that details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and like the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic). The display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 assembled into the light guide unit 400 are formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 . Also, like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 allows the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420 to be visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. It is composed of Further, on the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10), lenses with various uneven shapes are cut, and a rear upper LED unit 422 and/or a lower LED unit 414 (described later) (see FIG. 8 and 9), the first decorative pattern group 421 (see FIG. 12), which is a pattern imitating multiple types of fish (so-called fish school pattern), is displayed on the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be displayed so that it can be viewed from each side. Note that details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group, and 411, the third decorative pattern, 412, and/or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are displayed by lighting. Specifically, when a jackpot result appears in the variable production, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 On the other hand, if a losing result appears in the variable performance, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the fourth decorative symbol group 411 are displayed. It is configured such that only the third decorative pattern 412 is likely to be lit and displayed in the order of the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, Any one of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, or the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern, 412, or the fourth It is configured so that at least two or more combinations of the decorative pattern group 413 are displayed by lighting. Specifically, when a jackpot result appears in the variable production, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 On the other hand, if a losing result appears in the variable performance, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the fourth decorative symbol group 411 are displayed. It is configured such that only the third decorative pattern 412 is likely to be lit and displayed in the order of the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421.

That is, according to the above-mentioned appearance ratio accompanying the fluctuation result of the fluctuation performance, the jackpot reliability (expectation level) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is as follows: 1st decorative pattern group 421>2nd decorative pattern group 411 & 2nd decorative pattern group 421 The height is set in advance in the following order: 3rd decorative pattern 412 > 3rd decorative pattern 412 only > 2nd decorative pattern group 411 only > 4th decorative pattern group 413.

More specifically, based on the above-mentioned appearance ratio accompanying the fluctuation result of the fluctuation performance, the jackpot reliability (expectation level) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is calculated as follows: 4th decorative pattern group 413<2nd decorative pattern The height is set in advance in the following order: Only the group 411< Only the third decorative pattern 412<The second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412<The first decorative pattern group 421.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth Although the configuration is such that the jackpot expectation level is set when the decorative pattern group 413 appears, instead of this, the jackpot expectation level of the decorative pattern may be set regardless of the appearance frequency. . For example, a decorative pattern may be provided that has a low probability of appearing when a jackpot hits and a low probability of appearing when a loss occurs, giving a low expectation of a jackpot, or a decorative pattern that has a high probability of appearing when a loss occurs and a high probability of appearing when a jackpot occurs, thus providing a high probability of a jackpot. A highly decorative pattern may also be provided.

In this way, each member 430, 410, 420 of the light guide unit 400 is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81 located on the back side when viewed from the front. The first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed by lighting (light guiding). Therefore, by performing the fluctuating effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and the effect on the light guide unit 400 in a combined manner, various effects can be executed and the effect of each device 81,400 can be enhanced. , it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. Furthermore, the light guiding unit 400 is configured to have a shape that follows the outer circumferential shape of the presentation device so that the presentation device (that is, the drum display device 81) placed on the back side in front view can be placed in the rear space. , it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the presentation device disposed on the rear side of the light guide unit 400 when viewed from the front.

In addition, at least the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LED 414c, the front right LED 415c, the front left LED 416c, the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c, and the rear lower LED 424 are connected to the light guide unit 400. By fixing the unit as a unit while positioning it with through holes and screws, it is possible to suppress misalignment between each LED 414c, etc. and each light guide plate 410, 420, so the light from each LED 414c, etc. can be It becomes possible to appropriately illuminate the light plates 410, 420, and each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be accurately expressed.

In addition, at the time of jackpot or loss, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, the third decorative symbol group 412 only, the second decorative symbol group 411 only, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (hereinafter , may be referred to as "each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421") will be described later in FIG. 34.

On the surface of the game board 13 (base board 60) on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, there is a first decorative pattern group on the board surface which is the same pattern as the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. A first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 and a first decorative pattern group on the board surface are provided on the surface of the game board 13 (base board 60) on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. A board second decorative pattern group 60b having the same pattern as 60a is provided. The first decorative symbol group 60a on the board and the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board are configured to be lit and displayed in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420. Specifically, when performing a performance related to the first decorative symbol group 421 in a variable performance of the third symbol, first, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board on the right side when viewed from the front of the variable display device unit 80 is lit first. Thereafter, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit and displayed in order from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front, and then the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board surface on the left side when viewed from the front of the variable display device unit 80 is lit. With this configuration, in the performance regarding the first decorative symbol group 421, the performance on the rear light guide plate 420 and the performance on the 13th game board surface are integrally executed, and the entire 13th surface of the game board is used. It is possible to provide a powerful performance and improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, in the variation performance of the third symbol, when the lighting lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing to light up the first decorative symbol group 421 has arrived, first, the game board 13 or the drum The light emitting effect on the display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire game board 13 is darkened. Then, an LED (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the first decorative pattern group 60a of the board so that the first decorative pattern group 60a of the game board 13, which is provided on the right side of the board, moves from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. ) lights up. Then, at the timing when the leftmost edge in the front view of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board is lit, one of the first decorative pattern groups 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 is placed on the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. By lighting up the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (see FIG. 8, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "LEDs 422c, 424") corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421. , the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 becomes visible from the front side (front side; hereinafter the same) of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, the front right base of the front right LED unit 415 is designed to prevent the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board from leaking to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410). 415a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the board first decorative symbol group 60a toward the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 It is possible to prevent a problem in which the symbol group 421 emits light at an earlier stage than the light emission timing.

Next, with the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board turned on, the rightmost end of the right side area of the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 on the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. The LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the LEDs 422c, 424 in the front view are sequentially turned on from the right side in the front view, and the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. 424 is turned on, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. The first decorative pattern group 421 on the rightmost side becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, a series of fish school symbols move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side area and center area of the rear light guide plate 420. A performance like this is performed.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightmost LED 422c is , 424 located on the left side (i.e., the center of the right side area) when viewed from the front, the color of the light emitted by the rightmost LED 422c, 424 is inherited, and the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side when viewed from the front are inherited. When the left side of the LEDs 422c and 424 in the front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side area) is turned on, the LEDs 422c and 424 on the left side in the front view are turned on so as to take over the color of the light emitted by the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view. For example, if the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the right side area are emitting red light, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 when viewed from the front are lit in red, and then The LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view are turned on in red at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in the front view (ie, the leftmost end of the right side area) are turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in which the same fish patterns in the first decorative pattern group 421 are displayed in a moving manner.

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the center area of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view from the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the center area. are turned on sequentially from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. By lighting up the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in It becomes visible from At this time, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board are lit. (1) are configured to turn off sequentially from the right side when viewed from the front. As a result, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area, center area, and left area of the rear light guide plate 420 form a series and a constant width (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420, and the display width of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board), an effect is performed in which the school of fish pattern appears to move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. .

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 (see FIG. 8), the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view from the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the left side area. are sequentially lit from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the LEDs 422c and 424 provided on the left side of the game board 13 are lit. By lighting up an LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost end of the board second decorative symbol group 60b, the board second decorative symbol group 60b is displayed in a lit state. At this time, at the timing when the LED corresponding to the leftmost end of the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board is lit, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the right side when viewed from the front. Configure the lights to turn off sequentially. As a result, the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left, center, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 form a series of integral patterns with a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate 420, or the width of the left side area and center area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the display width of the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board). An effect is performed in which the symbols appear to move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially turned off from the right side when viewed from the front. Then, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. , 424 are turned off sequentially from the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board are illuminated from the right side when viewed from the front. Configure to prepare lights off. With this configuration, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board 60b form a series of fish school patterns with a constant width. An effect as if the machine 10 were moving from the right side to the left side is executed.

At this time, the front left base of the front left LED unit 416 is arranged so that the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410). 416a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the board second decorative symbol group 60b toward the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 It is possible to prevent a problem in which the symbol group 421 emits light at a later stage than the light emission timing.

In this way, in the presentation regarding the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface, the first decorative pattern group 421, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board surface, the presentation on the rear light guide plate 420 and the presentation on the surface of the game board 13 are integrated. At the same time, by solving the problem that when lighting each LED one after another, a symbol that was lit at a different timing than the lighting timing due to the light from other LEDs was lit, it was possible to create a series using the entire 13 game board surfaces. It is possible to provide an integrated and powerful performance and increase the interest of the game.

A first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 26). Then, a display according to the lottery result is shown on the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. executed. Note that the first starting opening 64a also serves as one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the ball.

A second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a, into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric function 64c is in an open state. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 26). Then, a display according to the lottery result is shown on the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. executed. In addition, the second starting opening 64b also serves as one of the winning openings from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball.

As described above, above the second starting port 64b in front view, the second starting port 64b is opened and closed by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which a ball enters the second starting port 64b. A normal power supply 64c is provided that can be moved to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). Normally, the power supply 64c is in a closed state with the blades closed (the blades stand upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball. There is.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the "○" symbol, the normal electric combination 64c is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric function 64c is being operated, the blades of the normal electric function 64c are in an upwardly erect state. It is in a state where it moves in a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can enter the second starting port 64b more easily than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, when the symbol "○" stops and becomes a hit, and the second starting port 64b becomes open, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which many jackpot drawings can be performed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning port (also referred to as a large opening port or specific winning port) 65a is located approximately in the center of the variable winning device 65. is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot stop symbol is turned on. , the occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the drum display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the grand prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined number of times (10 or 5 times) until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds elapses, or 10 balls win a prize). ) until it is released.

When this big prize opening 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening or when a prescribed number of wins are detected, and after the closing, the big winning prize mouth 65a is opened again. This opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 10 times (10 rounds) at most. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player has the advantage of winning the game by placing the ball into the jackpot 65a. In order to provide value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the grand winning opening 65a, and a grand winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with The grand prize opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large winning hole solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the large winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

The variable winning device 65 is disposed at a position where the ball can enter the big winning hole 65a in both left-handed games and right-handed games, and when the ball enters the big winning hole 65a, it is placed on the back side of the game board 13. By counting the number of times the big winning hole switch (not shown) provided in the big winning hole switch (not shown) is turned on, the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a is counted, and the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a is counted. The closing condition of 65a is determined. Furthermore, due to the turning on of the big prize opening switch, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, by repeating the open state and closed state of the big winning hole 65a due to the jackpot, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning hole 65a, and the player is given the value of the game (gaming value). As a reward, a larger amount of prize balls than usual will be paid out. This state is one form of special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A specific winning opening and a large open opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the gaming area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the special symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined period of time. A special gaming state may be formed in which a large opening is opened and a large opening is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters a specific winning port while the specific winning port is open. .

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which the ball passes. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to this turning on, the main control device 110 determines whether the normal symbol hits. A lottery will be held.

As a result of the normal symbol lottery performed on the ball that passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined that the ball has won, the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 83, and then the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the normal electric power unit 64c provided above the second starting port 64b in front view is activated. As a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b for a predetermined period of time from the state in which the plate of the normal power supply 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, closes the second starting port 64b. A state in which a ball can be played or a state in which a ball can enter the ball more easily than in a closed state.

A special symbol display device 37 is provided at the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3), and is provided with a status LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b, which are composed of a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means. has been done. The special symbol display device 37 displays a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and a second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 2). Each variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2") (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") is made. , the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls for which variable display has not been performed (pending balls) among the balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting status of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the status. The status LED group 37a is configured such that the LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, a "round" in a jackpot refers to the period from when the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, is opened until it is closed in order to separate the number of jackpot prize balls, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, It is configured such that one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" elapse after the opening of the winning opening 65a starts, or when 10 balls win while the big winning opening 65a is opened.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, including an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on a winning entry to the first starting port 64a provided at the center of the board surface of the game board 13 has elapsed. After the display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 are lit one by one from the uppermost LED and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment) is displayed. In this case, a total of 64 types of stop symbols are displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (dynamic display time) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winnings in the second starting port 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 elapses. In the first embodiment, after lighting up the lower LEDs one by one from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 and repeatedly displaying the lighting pattern, a symbol indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment, Depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs, one of a total of 64 types of stop symbols is displayed.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, if the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit up, and if the judgment result is a jackpot, the LED corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed. Each LED group is displayed lit in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery) when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or second starting port 64b, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It also makes a judgment.

The jackpot types determined here include "Probable Variable A" corresponding to "10 round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") Probable Variable Jackpot", "Probable Variable B" corresponding to "5R Probable Variable Jackpot", “Time saving A” corresponding to “10R jackpot with time saving” is prepared (see FIG. 24(b)).

Here, the jackpot type of "Probable Variable A" corresponding to "10R Probable Variable Jacket" means that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter referred to as " Until the occurrence of the next jackpot (sometimes referred to as "next jackpot"), the probability state will be higher than the "normal gaming state," and the winning probability of the normal symbols will also be higher probability state than the "normal gaming state" until the next jackpot occurs. It is a jackpot that moves to a "probability fluctuating state".

In addition, the jackpot type of "Probable Variable B" that corresponds to "5R Probable Variable Jackpot" is that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter referred to as "next time"). Until the next jackpot (sometimes referred to as a "jackpot") occurs, the probability of winning will be higher than the "normal gaming state", and the winning probability of normal symbols will also be higher than the "normal gaming state" until the next jackpot occurs. This is a jackpot that moves into a "probability fluctuating state."

In addition, the "time saving A" jackpot type that corresponds to the "10R time saving jackpot" is a low probability that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is the same as "normal game state". On the other hand, the winning probability of the normal symbol changes to the high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time reduction state") until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. That's true.

Here, each gaming state will be explained in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal gaming state" refers to a gaming state that is not the "probability variation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the winning probability of the normal symbol. This refers to a state in which the probability is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the normal electrical connection 64c is opened for a short time (so-called non-open extended state). That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the probability of winning the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". Since the opening time of the normal electric hand 64c is also short, a gaming state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting port 64b) is created. This is not a "winning assistance state" (sometimes referred to as a "winning assistance state"), but a gaming state that is most disadvantageous (low advantage) for the player.

Next, in the "time reduction state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is low as in the "normal game state", but the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c is reduced. A state in which it is easy to win a ball into the second starting port 64b for a long time (hereinafter, a function that increases the probability of winning a normal symbol and makes the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c for a long time is referred to as a "winning assistance function") ''.Also, a state in which the probability of winning the normal symbol increases and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c becomes long, making it easier to land the ball into the second starting port 64b, is referred to as `` ). That is, the "time reduction state" is a state in which the jackpot due to the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", but the win due to the normal symbol is more likely to be derived, and the open state of the normal electric combination 64c is longer. Therefore, in the "time reduction state", it is easy to make the fired ball enter the second starting port 64b, so it becomes possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the special drawing 2, and the ball enters the second starting port 64b. It becomes possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/prize) based on the number of winnings, and play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls in possession.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "time saving state" is defined as a predetermined number of times after a jackpot of the jackpot type "time saving A" (see FIG. 24(b)). This is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed (100 times in the first embodiment). After the dynamic display of the special symbols has been executed the specified number of times (that is, after the "end of electric support"), the system is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal gaming state". (See Figure 10).

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of each subsequent special symbol increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, and the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, and the winning of the regular electric symbol 64c The auxiliary function is activated. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which it is easy to derive a jackpot result with a special symbol, a win result with a normal symbol is easy to be derived, and the open state of the regular electric combination 64c becomes longer. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the winning assist function is activated and the fired ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, so the dynamic display of the special drawing 2 can be executed continuously, and the winning assist function is activated. You can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls you have by getting prize balls (for example, 1 ball/prize) based on the winnings in the second starting hole 64b, and furthermore, you can play the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of the special drawing 2. It becomes possible to play a game in a state where (special game state) is likely to occur.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be explained. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 and lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to a loss, 21 types of display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probable variation A", and a jackpot. There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the type "probability variation B" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern has no specific regularity for each type of jackpot, and random display patterns are associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, the player can recognize that the stop display of a loss has been stopped, while the jackpot type "Probability Variable A" and "Probability Variable B ” or “Time Saving A” is difficult to distinguish.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not known, , it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of jackpot won. Therefore, for example, even if "Probability Variable A" is won in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot result corresponding to "Time Saving A" will be temporarily displayed on the drum display device 81. By displaying the information, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which gaming state the player is in. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game or not, and to perform promotion effects during and after the jackpot. This makes it possible to provide games with surprises and improve the interest of the games.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the normal symbols, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time during which the below-mentioned normal electric winning combination 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is opened or the winning probability of the normal symbols can be changed. The number of times the normal electric combination 64c is released upon winning may be changed. Specifically, in the "time reduction state", etc., the time during which the normal electric role 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the "normal gaming state", or the time when the normal power role 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the "normal gaming state". The number of times the electric combination 64c is released may be increased more than in the "normal game state". In addition, in the "time reduction state", at least two things are done at the same time: increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, lengthening the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c, and increasing the number of times the normal electric symbol 64c is opened. You can do it like this.

At the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In addition, the balls that have entered the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball ejection path after passing through a switch for detecting the ball entering each winning hole. The balls guided to the ball discharge path pass through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided balls, and then are discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

Note that the game board 13 has a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, a base plate 60 that constitutes the game board 13, a back unit 300 that also constitutes the game board 13 and is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60, and , the light guide unit 400 assembled to the board back unit 300, and the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the board back unit 300.

First, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base board 60, a board back unit 300, and a drum display device 81. , by assembling the back unit 300 and assembling the drum display device 81 to the back unit 300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6, the panel back unit 300 includes a panel back unit base 301, a light guide unit 400, a right side notification lamp LED board 302, a right side notification lamp member 303, a left side notification lamp LED board 304, and a left side notification lamp LED board 302. It is composed of a lamp member 305, a notification lamp assembly section 306, and a confirmation lamp unit 310. First, the light guide unit 400, the LED board 302 for the right side notification lamp, the LED board 304 for the left side notification lamp, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are fixed with screws to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the back unit base 301. After that, the right side notification lamp member 303 is installed so as to correspond to the right side notification lamp LED board 302, and the left side notification lamp member 305 is installed so as to correspond to the left side notification lamp LED board 304, and in this state, the notification is performed. By fixing the lamp assembly portion 306 to the back panel unit base 301 with screws, the back panel unit 300 is formed.

The right side notification lamp member 303 and the left side notification lamp member 305 are lamps for indicating to the player various game situations in the variable performance of the third symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, various information regarding the variable performance of the third symbol and information regarding the game state can be suggested to the player by the lighting pattern and lighting color of the right notification lamp member 303 and the left notification lamp member 305. It is composed of

The confirmation lamp unit 310 is a drive type lamp for indicating that the jackpot will occur by lighting and driving the confirmation lamp 311 when a jackpot occurs in the variable performance. The confirmation lamp unit 310 includes a confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for lighting the confirmation lamp 311, and a rotation drive motor (not shown) for rotationally driving the confirmation lamp 311. It consists of and. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in the variable performance of the third symbol, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and rotated at the timing determined by the lottery, so that the player can notify the player that a jackpot has occurred. It is structured in such a way as to clearly suggest that. In addition, if the confirmation lamp 311 wins a jackpot that causes a "probability fluctuation state", the confirmation lamp 311 is lit in a long lighting pattern for a long lighting time (for example, "10 seconds"), and the "probability fluctuation state" is lit in a long lighting pattern. When winning a jackpot that is not a jackpot in which "" occurs, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to be lit in a short lighting pattern for a short lighting time (for example, "2 seconds"). The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 will be described later.

Here, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10. 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, FIG. 8 is a front exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and FIG. 9 is a rear exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to a schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along the line XX in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 includes a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, a rear side It is composed of a light guide plate 420, a rear upper LED unit 422, and a display area forming member 430.

The front light guide plate 410 is configured such that upper and lower flat plate portions extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 are formed continuously with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. There is. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion having a size of approximately R32 and bent toward the front side of the game board 13 is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, and from there, the drum display device 81 (rear side Along the outer circumferential shape of the light guide plate 420), a regular R-shaped portion with a size of approximately R80 is formed that bulges in the front direction of the game board 13, and further, a regular R-shaped portion with a size of approximately R32 is formed continuously from there on the game board 13. A lower inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front side is formed, and a lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

As described above, on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (the surface facing the back of the pachinko machine 10), a plurality of cherry blossom petals are formed by guiding light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions. A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating a cherry blossom snowstorm, a third decorative pattern 412 imitating a single sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating a group of bubbles consisting of a plurality of bubbles. Lenses are cut in various concave and convex shapes so that the various symbols can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The second decorative pattern group 411 is formed at both left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, the third decorative pattern is formed at the center region of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed at the lower end of the regular R-shaped portion. The inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are formed evenly throughout.

An uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed from the front lower LED 414c at both left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 to the lower part of the front light guide plate 410. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and becomes visible due to the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410.

The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 emit only the light incident upward of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, Light incident from other directions (for example, the lateral direction) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the uneven lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. In other words, the second decorative pattern group 411 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the flat plate below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is emitted from the pachinko machine 10. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the machine 10, passes through the area where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed, and does not emit light (is not visible or difficult to see).

More specifically, the uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 are arranged so that out of the light guided to the flat plate part, the light incident from the upper direction in front view and the lower direction in front view It is configured to emit light (light guided upward and downward in front view) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while light incident from the side direction in front view (light guided in the left direction and downward direction in front view) is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The light guided in the right direction when viewed from the front is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the uneven lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. Here, among the light guided to the flat plate part, either the light incident from the upper direction in front view or the lower direction in front view (light guided in the upper direction in front view or the lower direction in front view) However, the lens cut may be shaped so that the light irradiated to the uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. This requires precision in the shape of the lens cut, and there is a risk that processing costs for the lens cut may increase. Therefore, among the light guided to the flat plate part, whether the light is incident from the upper direction in front view or the lower direction in front view (the light guided in the upper direction in front view or the lower direction in front view), However, by making the lens cut in an uneven shape so that the light irradiated to the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing cost of the lens cut.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, among the light guided to the flat plate part, the light incident from the upper direction in front view or the lower direction in front view (light guided in the upper direction in front view and the lower direction in front view) A lens cut may be configured such that the light irradiated onto the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by only one of them.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 410 is disposed on the front side (front direction side) of the pachinko machine 10 than the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light from the confirmation lamp 311 disposed above the front light guide plate 410. The rear light guide plate 420 is more susceptible to the effects of light and light emitted from indoor lighting provided on the ceiling of the game hall. Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 (same as the third decorative pattern 412 and fourth decorative pattern group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 does not react to light from above when viewed from the front (to prevent erroneous lighting). (1) Preferably, the lens is cut in an uneven shape so that it lights up (lights up) only by light from below when viewed from the front (or from the side when viewed from the front). Then, the LED for light guiding is not arranged above the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, but the lower front LED 414c is arranged below the front light guide plate 410, so that the second decorative pattern group 411 can be illuminated by the lower front LED 414c. By configuring this, it is possible to suppress erroneous lighting of the second decorative pattern group 411 due to lighting of the confirmation lamp 311, indoor lighting of the game hall, etc.

In the first embodiment, for the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410, the second decorative pattern group 411 is lit only by the front downward LED 414c disposed below the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. However, instead of this, a front upper LED is arranged above the front light guide plate 410 in front view, and the second decorative pattern group 411 is lit and displayed only by the front upper LED. Alternatively, the second decorative pattern group 411 may be illuminated and displayed by the upper front LED and the lower front LED 414c. Further, the third decorative pattern 412 may also be configured to be illuminated by the front upper LED and/or the front lower LED 414c.

An uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 is formed from the front lower LED 414c other than the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414, to the lower part of the front light guide plate 410. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the third decorative pattern 412 is illuminated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident upward from other than both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, from the central portion of the lower end surface). emits light and becomes visible.

Similar to the uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern group 412, the uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 is part of the light guided to the flat plate part. , only the light incident upward is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions (for example, the lateral direction) is emitted from the pachinko machine by a concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412. 10 is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side. In other words, the third decorative pattern 412 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the flat plate below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is emitted from the pachinko machine 10. 10 is configured so that it does not emit to the front side, passes directly through the area where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed, and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see).

The uneven lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is the front right LED 415c mounted on the front right LED board 415b of the front right LED unit 415 (see FIG. 19). , and/or from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416 to the left end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and/or The pachinko machine 10 is configured to emit the guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident laterally from the right end surface. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident in the lateral direction from the left end surface and/or the right end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, making it visible. Become.

The uneven lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits only the light incident in the horizontal direction out of the light guided to the flat plate part to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. However, light incident from other directions (for example, from below to above) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the uneven lens cut corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413. In other words, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits only the light incident from the left end surface or the right end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and emits light incident from other directions. is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, passes directly through the portion where the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed, and does not emit light (is not visible or difficult to see). Note that the details of the light emission modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 will be described later.

Similar to the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 has upper and lower flat plate portions extending parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 that are continuous with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81. It is formed and configured. More specifically, from the upper flat plate part of the rear light guide plate 420, an upper inverted R-shaped part with a size of approximately R30 is bent toward the front side of the game board 13, and from there, the drum display device 81 (front side Along the outer circumferential shape of the light guide plate 410), a regular R-shaped portion with a size of about R75 is formed that bulges in the front direction of the game board 13, and further, a regular R-shaped portion with a size of about R30 is formed continuously from there on the game board 13. A lower inverted-R shaped portion bent toward the front side is formed, and a lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from the lower inverted-R shaped portion.

In addition, a plurality of rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422 are connected to the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front. A rear upper diffusion lens 423 is provided to diffuse the emitted light in multiple directions inside the rear light guide plate 420. Further, the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front is configured to transmit light emitted from the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 to the rear side. A rear downward diffusion lens 425 is provided inside the light guide plate 420 to diffuse light in multiple directions. Note that details of how light is irradiated (passed) by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

As described above, the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the surface in the direction of the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with a light guide plate that guides the light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 from above and/or below. A first decorative pattern group 421 imitating a school of fish made up of a plurality of types of fish is cut into various concave and convex shapes so that the first decorative pattern group 421 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. This first decorative pattern group 421 is formed evenly throughout the regular R-shaped portion.

The uneven lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is located behind the rear lower LED 424 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 and/or the rear upper LED unit 422. When light is incident from a plurality of rear side upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the side upper LED board 422b toward the lower flat plate part and/or the upper flat plate part of the rear light guide plate 420 In addition, it is configured to emit the guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the light incident from the lower end (surface) of the lower flat plate part of the rear light guide plate 420 and/or the upper end (surface) of the upper flat plate part allows the first decoration to be displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The symbol group 421 emits light and becomes visible.

The uneven lens cut corresponding to the patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 is configured to emit light incident from various directions out of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. Note that details of the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the concavo-convex lens cuts corresponding to the patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 are arranged so that among the light guided to the flat plate part, the upward direction in front view, the downward direction in front view, the right direction in front view, and the front direction are It is configured to emit light incident from a direction parallel to the flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as the left direction when viewed, to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When light enters the non-flat portion of the rear light guide plate 420, that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light that is repeatedly reflected within the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected in the upper inverted R-shaped portion. When reflected by the R-shaped portion of the R-shaped portion, regular R-shaped portion, or lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided with the incident angle and reflection angle slightly different between the front and back surfaces. Therefore, even if light enters the upper inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, or the lower inverted R-shaped part from the lateral direction when viewed from the front, the light is not guided in the lateral direction when viewed from the front, but diagonally upward when viewed from the front. The light is guided diagonally downward in the front view, and is unevenly guided to the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the back side of the rear light guide plate 420, Depending on the situation, the intensity of lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 may vary, and the lighting may be sparse. Therefore, by inputting light from the end faces of the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part of the rear light guide plate 420, the light can be uniformly input to the first decorative pattern group 421, and the first decorative pattern group 421 can be kept uniformly lit.

In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end surface (part) of the flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420. It is configured so that no light enters from the R-shaped portion (that is, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is attempted to enter from the R-shaped portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the R-shaped portion, and there is a possibility that a desired pattern cannot be illuminated appropriately or may be difficult to illuminate. Furthermore, it is necessary to arrange the LEDs and the like along the shape of the end face of the rounded portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the R-shaped part is formed along the external shape of the performance member such as the drum display device 81 or the movable accessory, and when an LED board or the like is placed on the side of the R-shaped part, the design of the performance member There is a risk that the degree of freedom will be restricted. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having an R-shaped portion, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased by allowing light to enter from the end surface (portion) of one of the flat plate portions. I can do it.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper flat plate part (upper flat plate part), the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the regular R-shaped part constitute the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. , of the lower inverted R-shaped part and the lower flat plate part (lower flat plate part), the upper side in front view, the right side in front view, the left side in front view, and the lower side in front view of the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part. It is configured so that the light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 enters from the end surface (side surface).

The first reason for this is to appropriately light up each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 of each light guide plate 410, 420. The non-flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, that is, the upper inverted R-shaped part, the normal R-shaped part, or the lower inverted R-shaped part, has an R-shape on the front and back surfaces by the thickness of each light guide plate 410, 420. They are formed with slightly different radii. Therefore, when light enters from the end face (side surface) of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, or lower inverted R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light that is repeatedly reflected within each light guide plate 410, 420 is When the light is reflected by the R-shaped portion of the upper inverted-R-shaped portion, regular R-shaped portion, or lower inverted-R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and reflection angle are slightly different between the front and back surfaces. Therefore, light is unevenly (non-uniformly) guided to each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 provided on the back side of each light guide plate 410, 420, and depending on the part, each decorative pattern There is a risk that the lighting of the groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 may vary in intensity, resulting in sparse lighting.

Therefore, by inputting light from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light that is repeatedly reflected within each light guide plate 410, 420 is transmitted to at least the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part. When light is being guided inside the unit, the light is repeatedly reflected on the front or back surface of each planar light guide plate 410, 420, and the light is guided while the incident angle and reflection angle are always equal. As a result, light is first stably guided within the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, and each decorative pattern group 411, 412 provided on the back side of each light guide plate 410, 420, By guiding light evenly (homogeneously) to 413, 421, it becomes possible to appropriately light up each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

The second reason is to improve the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424. Since the front view side end surfaces of the R-shaped portions (i.e., the upper inverted-R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted-R-shaped portion) of each light guide plate 410, 420 are shaped along the R-shaped portion, If light is to be incident from the side end face of the R-shaped portion, each LED on the LED board must also be arranged along the side end face of the R-shaped portion. In particular, when arranging LEDs while taking into account the arrangement of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, and 421, adjustment of the position and spacing of each LED on the LED board becomes complicated, reducing the degree of freedom in design. There is a risk.

Therefore, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on each LED board 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b is arranged so that light enters from the end face (side surface) of the upper flat plate part and lower flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420. The LED board and the LED are arranged so that the LED board and the LED are not arranged on the end surface (side surface) of the R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420. With this configuration, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on each LED board 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b can be easily arranged along the shape of the end face of the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part. (that is, arranged on a straight line and at equal intervals), and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Furthermore, the third reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the presentation devices (drum display device 81, movable accessories, etc.) on the back and side sides of each light guide plate 410, 420. On the back and side sides of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, there is a production device (a drum display device 81 that performs the variation production itself) related to the variable production of the third symbol, which is the main game in the pachinko machine 10, Movable accessories, etc. that perform various effects in the variable effect are arranged. Here, if an LED board is arranged in the front view side part of each R-shaped part of each light guide plate 410, 420, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in designing each presentation device will be restricted by the installation of the LED board. .

Therefore, in order to input light from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate part and the lower flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, the upper side of the upper flat plate part in front view, the lower side of the lower flat plate part in front view, Each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 in each LED board 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b is arranged on the right side and left side when viewed from the front, and the LED board is placed at a side position of the R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 when viewed from the front. And the configuration is such that no LED is arranged. With this configuration, when installing a presentation device on the back and side sides of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LED board etc. will not interfere with the arrangement of the presentation device. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The lower LED unit 414 is provided at a lower position in front view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and includes a lower base 414a, a lower LED board 414b on which a front lower LED 414c and a rear lower LED 424 are mounted. , and a front lower condensing lens 414d.

The lower base 414a is configured to be able to hold the lower LED board 414b with screws or the like, and also holds the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front lower condensing lens 414d with respective positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. They are configured to be able to be positioned and fixed by connecting and fixing them to the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 using screws or the like while holding them at predetermined positions.

In addition, the lower base 414a emits the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c mounted on the lower LED board 414b only to the front light guide plate 410 through the front lower condenser lens 414d. Predetermined division ribs are formed so that the light emitted from the lower side LEDs 424 is emitted only to the rear lower diffuser lens 425 formed on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. There is. Thereby, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 424 can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, or the third decorative pattern group The decorative pattern 412 can be accurately illuminated at appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as unintended lighting of the decorative pattern can be suppressed. The details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the front downward condensing lens 414d and the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear downward diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

The front right LED unit 415 is provided on the right side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and includes a front right base 415a and a plurality of front right LEDs 415c (see FIG. 19). The LED board 415b for the front right side and the condensing lens 415d for the front right side.

The front right base 415a is configured to be able to hold the front right LED board 415b with screws, etc., and the shape of each right end surface of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper Positioning ribs are provided along the outer shapes of each end of the inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion. Then, while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front right condensing lens 415d at predetermined positions with the respective positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display By connecting and fixing them to the area forming member 430 with screws or the like, they can be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the front right base 415a directs the light emitted from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b to the front right through the front right condensing lens 415d. Predetermined division ribs are formed so that light is emitted only to the lower flat plate portion of the light guide plate 410. As a result, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated accurately at an appropriate timing, and unintended patterns can be Display abnormalities such as lighting can be suppressed. Note that details of the manner in which light is irradiated (passed through) by the front right condensing lens 415d will be described later.

The front left LED unit 416 is provided at the left side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a front left base 416a and a plurality of front left LEDs 416c (see FIG. 19). The front left side LED board 416b and the front left side condensing lens 416d are configured.

The front left base 416a is configured to be able to hold the front left LED board 416b with screws, etc., and the shape of each left end surface of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper Positioning ribs are provided along the outer shapes of each end of the inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion. Then, while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front left condensing lens 416d at predetermined positions with the respective positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display By connecting and fixing them to the area forming member 430 with screws or the like, they can be positioned and fixed.

The front left base 416a also directs light emitted from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b to the front left side through a front left condensing lens 416d. Predetermined division ribs are formed so that light is emitted only to the lower flat plate portion of the light guide plate 410. As a result, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated accurately at the appropriate timing, and unintended patterns can be Display abnormalities such as lighting can be suppressed. Note that details of the manner in which light is irradiated (passed through) by the front left condensing lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is provided at a position above the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a rear upper base 422a and a rear upper LED unit 422c (see FIG. 12). It is composed of an upper LED board 422b.

The rear upper base 422a is configured to be able to hold the rear upper LED board 422b with screws, etc., and also holds the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in predetermined positions with respective positioning bosses (ribs), etc. While being held, they are connected and fixed to the front right LED unit 415, front left LED unit 416, and display area forming member 430 with screws, respectively, so that they can be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the rear upper base 422a allows the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) to pass through a rear upper diffuser lens 423 formed on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. Predetermined partitioning ribs are formed so that the radiation is emitted only to those areas. As a result, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c can be accurately emitted to the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated accurately at the appropriate timing, and unintended Display abnormalities such as lighting of symbols can be suppressed. Note that the details of the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm) and are formed into a flat plate shape extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are arranged between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in order to provide a predetermined space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In this way, by providing a space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, light that is incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 is less likely to be incident on the other light guide plate 420, 410. Therefore, unintended lighting of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421, etc. can be prevented.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is disposed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81), and A central opening 431 is formed so that the regular R-shaped portion of the light plate 420 can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a lens cut 432 is formed at the outer edge of the central opening 431.

This lens cut 432 is provided to clarify the display area (effective line) of the display pattern on the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 located at the upper part of the display area forming member 430 in front view. This is provided to suppress (prevent) the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 from being emitted onto the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when the light is turned on.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the positional relationship among the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 will be described. FIG. 10 shows the positional relationship of the drum display device 81, the confirmation lamp 311, and the display area forming member 430 with respect to a schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along the line XX in FIG. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, the intervals between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 are shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, The drum display devices 81 are arranged in this order. Then, from the center opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, a total of nine symbol display areas (three each on each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81) become visible, and other symbol areas (the 3) is covered by the lens cut 432, making it invisible or difficult to see. Further, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated and displayed from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. be configured so that it can be visually recognized when Furthermore, since the lower side of the lens cut 432 on the lower side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 can be used for lighting display. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when it is played. Therefore, the display area forming member 430 clarifies the effective line of the variable performance on the drum display device 81, and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group When 413 is lit and displayed, each can be visually recognized while avoiding the lens cut 432 portion of the display area forming member 430.

Further, the lens cut 432 is configured so that when the confirmation lamp 311 is displayed as being lit, the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 is not or difficult to be guided to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. It is located at the upper portion (lower portion, both side portions) of the regular R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 so as to block the light of the determining lamp 311.

More specifically, the lens cut 432 has a rib shape in which a plurality of ribs are continuously erected on the back side (the back side of the pachinko machine 10), and the lens cut 432 has a rib shape in which a plurality of ribs are continuously erected. It is configured to disperse light and reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 portion.

In addition, in the lens cut 432, instead of having a plurality of rib shapes, the lens cut 432 may be configured by knurling or mirror finishing to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432.

Further, the lens cut 432 may also be made on the inner surface of the upright wall (the entire bulge) on the side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front. With this configuration, the display area indicating the effective line of the variable effect is clarified in a square shape, and the lens cut 432 disperses light that may be incident from the side of the light guide unit 400 when viewed from the front. , is configured to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 portion.

Furthermore, the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 located above the light guide unit 400 in front view is a performance that suggests (notifies) that a jackpot will occur in the variable display, and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the light guide unit 400, Since these effects are more important in the game than the effects of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (that is, the suggestion of jackpot expectation), the first decorative pattern group 421, The lighting brightness is configured to be stronger than that of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which has a high degree of importance, if these effects are combined.

The front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R-shaped portion) that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and lamps, etc. are lit at the upper and lower positions of the regular R-shaped portion. In this case, if the light from the lamp enters the regular R-shaped portion and each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is abnormally lit, the lighting mode of the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 will change. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the results of the changes in the performance and the results.

Therefore, by arranging the lens cut 432 at the vertical position of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 and between the fixed lamp 311, the light incident through the lens cut 432 can be can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to the lighting of the respective LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is transmitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incident, it is possible to suppress the respective decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 from lighting up abnormally. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative symbol group 421 with the highest jackpot reliability (expectation level), the light enters from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the light from entering the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 is somewhat diffused (weakened), thereby preventing erroneous It is possible to suppress abnormal lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, which has a large production discrepancy when the display is lit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 25, the traveling direction of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter referred to as "optical path") The rear light guide plate 420 is explained while explaining the optical path of the light from the front lower condensing lens 414d, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d to the front light guide plate 410. The light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 in , the light emission mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, the confirmation lamp 311, and the front light guide plate 410, the presentation mode of the rear light guide plate 420 and the drum display device 81 will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the positional relationship between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In FIG. 11, for convenience of explanation, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the front light guide plate 410, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are shown. The arrangement of the first decorative pattern group 421 is expressed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11, a front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side (left side in the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10, and a rear light guide plate 420 is located on the back side (right side in the drawing). As described above, the front light guide plate 410 has a third decorative pattern 412 imitating a sunfish formed at the center of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410; A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating cherry blossom petals is formed on both left and right sides of the regular R-shaped portion, and a bubble pattern is further formed in the entire area of the lower inverted R-shaped portion continuous from the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating is formed.

Furthermore, as described above, the first decorative pattern group 421 imitating a school of fish pattern is formed on the rear light guide plate 420 over the entire region of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420.

Therefore, when the light guide unit 400 is formed by connecting the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 The display areas of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to overlap (superimpose). In this manner, various effects can be performed in one display area in the light guide unit 400, thereby increasing the effect of the light guide unit 400 and attracting more attention to the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16, the optical path of the light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420, and the first decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420. The light emission mode (lighting mode or display mode; the same applies hereinafter) of the group 421 will be explained. FIG. 12 shows the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group 421 that can be displayed by lighting on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c of the rear upper LED unit 422, and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view showing the relationship. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through the rear downward diffusion lens. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is displayed by lighting on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are lit. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the side light guide plate 420 are additionally lit. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 16(a) shows a state in which the rear light guide plate 16(b) is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side area of 420 are additionally lit; FIG. 16A schematically shows the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a). FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, and FIG. 16, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and each diffusion lens 423, 425 are omitted or expressed schematically for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 12, on the rear light guide plate 420, a first decorative pattern group 421 is formed as a fish school pattern, which is a pattern imitating schools of a plurality of types of fish, over the entire regular R-shaped portion. Further, a rear upper diffusion lens 423 formed on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 by the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420, and When light is irradiated onto the rear downward diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, the light is emitted from each diffusion lens 423, 425 in multiple directions (in the first embodiment, the left side, It is constructed so that light is diffused in three directions (center and right side).

Further, the positions of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged such that the rear upper LED 422c of 1 and the rear lower LED 424 of 1 form a pair in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ing.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the manner in which light is diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (rear upper diffusion lens 423) will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of portion B in FIG. 13, and is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through the rear downward diffusion lens 425. Note that the configuration of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, so a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are arranged so that the upper end face of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front and the lower end face when viewed from the front are disposed. They are completely the same shape, only different. Therefore, when molding the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are formed using the same forming process (manufacturing process, same mold, etc.). 425, and an increase in the manufacturing cost of the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 have the same shape, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the light diffused from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are the same. The optical paths of the diffused lights become the same, and it is possible to easily set (understand) the destination points of the optical paths of the respective diffused lights and the overlapping parts of the optical paths of the lights at the design stage. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the optical path of the light emitted from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light emitted from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are connected to the rear light guide plate 420. There may be one or more overlaps in the regular R-shaped portion. More specifically, for example, in the optical path of the light irradiated from one front-direction diffuser 425b of the rear-side downward diffusion lens 425, all of the optical path portions are located in the front direction opposite to the rear-side upward diffusion lens 423. It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the diffuser (no number). In addition, in the optical path of the light irradiated from the left diffusion part 425a of the rear downward diffusion lens 425, the left diffusion part (no number) of the concave part facing the rear upper diffusion lens 423 It also overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the front direction diffusion part (no number) of the recessed part to the left of the facing recessed part. Furthermore, in the optical path of the light irradiated from the first right-direction diffusion part 425c of the rear-side downward diffusion lens 425, the right-direction diffusion part (no number) of the recessed part on the opposite side of the rear-side upward diffusion lens 423 It also overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the front direction diffusion part (no number) of the recessed part to the right of the facing recessed part. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420, and the decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420 can be illuminated accurately, and the decorative pattern to be highlighted can be placed in the overlapping area to emphasize the decorative pattern. Can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13, rear lower diffusion lenses 425 are formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to correspond to the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414, respectively. As shown in FIG. 14, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 is formed so that a plurality of concave portions are connected, and one concave portion includes a left diffusion portion 425a and a front diffusion portion having the same side length. 425b and a rightward diffusion section 425c.

The front direction diffusion part 425b is formed in a planar shape so as to be perpendicular to the irradiation direction of the light from the rear lower LED 424. Further, the leftward diffusion portion 425a is formed in a planar shape inclined at approximately 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the left with respect to the frontward diffusion portion 425b. The rightward diffusion portion 425c is formed in a planar shape inclined approximately 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the right with respect to the front direction diffusion portion 425b. The recessed portion constituted by the left direction diffusion portion 425a, the front direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right direction diffusion portion 425c is continuously formed on the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of at least one rear side downward LED 424. Formed on the lower end face.

The rear light guide plate 420 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, from the rear lower LED 424 to the front direction diffusion section. The optical path of the light incident on 425b is directly emitted into the rear light guide plate 420 (toward the upper side of the drawing in FIG. 14), and the light incident on the left direction diffuser 425a from the rear lower LED 424 is as follows. The light emitted from the front diffuser 425b is refracted in a direction inclined to the left by approximately 20 degrees (θ2=20°), and is emitted into the rear light guide plate 420, and is emitted from the rear lower LED 424 to the right. The light incident on the diffuser 425c is refracted in a direction inclined to the right by about 20 degrees (θ3=20°) with respect to the light emitted from the front diffuser 425b, and is emitted into the rear light guide plate 420. be done.

In the rear downward diffusion lens 425, one concave portion formed by the left diffusion section 425a, the front diffusion section 425b, and the right diffusion section 425c is at least as wide as the width of the light emitting surface of the rear downward LED 424. , multiple locations are provided. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 of 1 is transmitted in three directions (i.e., the front direction, The light is diffused in three directions: a direction tilted 20 degrees to the left with respect to the front direction, and a direction tilted 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction. In addition, since the left direction diffusion section 425a, the front direction diffusion section 425b, and the right direction diffusion section 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same width. configured. As a result, by lighting one LED, a plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to each diffused optical path can be made to emit light in the same color, and even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of colors can be produced. By executing the presentation, the presentation effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic enlarged view of FIG. 14, schematically showing the light distribution mode of the left direction diffusion section 425a, the front direction diffusion section 425b, and the right direction diffusion section 425c.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 has a predetermined side length (for example, the side that irradiates light in the front direction is 50 micrometers, and the side that irradiates light in the horizontal direction is 62.5 micrometers (hereinafter, micrometers may be referred to as "μm"). Each of the diffusing parts 425a to 425c is configured such that the optical path width of the light emitted from the diffusing parts 425a to 425c is the same. Specifically, in each recess, the length of the side that irradiates light in the front direction is the same length (for example, 50 μm), and the length of the side that irradiates light in the left direction and right direction is respectively configured. They are configured to have the same length (for example, 62.5 μm), and are configured so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from each of the diffusion portions 425a to 425c are all the same. A plurality of the recesses are continuously connected. That is, the lateral width of the first recess is 50 μm in length of the front diffusion portion 425b, and the lateral width X (cos 50°=x/62. 5. x = 40.175. Therefore, for example, if the light emitting surface (irradiation width) of one LED 424 is 3 mm wide, about 23 rear downward diffusion lenses 425 for one LED 424 will be formed.

Here, when the rear lower LED 424 of 1 emits light and the light is irradiated to each recess, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front direction diffusion part 425b in the recess of 1 is 50 μm. The width of the light that is irradiated and distributed to the left by the leftward diffuser 425a in the recess 1 is also 50 μm, and is further distributed to the right by the rightward diffuser 425c in the recess 1. The width of the light is also 50 μm. Then, the light distributed in the front direction, left direction, and right direction by each concave portion is collected by the number of the concave portions, thereby forming an optical path of at least a predetermined width (for example, 50 μm×26=1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front direction diffusion part 425b which constitutes one recess, and the front direction diffusion part 425b which constitutes the recess on the right of this recess, are the right direction diffusion part 425c which constitutes the one recess, Since it is separated by the distance in the lateral direction from the left direction diffusion section 425a that constitutes the adjacent recess on the right, the front direction diffusion section 425b that constitutes the first recess is separated from the front direction diffusion section 425b that constitutes the right adjacent recess. The optical paths in the front direction distributed from the diffusion section 425b are also separated by the distance in the horizontal direction, but the light distributed from the right direction diffusion section 425c and the left direction diffusion section 425a, and the front direction diffusion Due to the diffusion effect of the light distributed from the portion 425b itself, the light is distributed comprehensively within the front light guide plate 410.

As a result, when the rear lower LED 424 of 1 emits light, the light diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425 constituted by a plurality of recesses allows each optical path of the diffused light and the optical path to be changed. A plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed (arranged) at positions corresponding to the periphery can be made to emit light in the same color, and the first decorative pattern group 421 has a wider range than the light emitting surface of the first rear lower LED 424. can be lit. As a result, even with a small number of LEDs, it is possible to perform a wide variety of performances, enhance the performance effects of the rear light guide plate 420, and increase the degree of attention to the game. Furthermore, by configuring the side lengths of each of the diffusing parts 425a to 425c so that the optical path width of the light irradiated from each of the diffusing parts 425a to 425c is the same, the width of the light irradiated from each of the diffusing parts 425a to 425c is The optical path width becomes the same, making it easier to set (understand) the optical path of the light guided into the rear light guide plate 420, and easily understand the pattern arrangement that allows the first decorative pattern group 421 to emit light accurately in the setting stage. It becomes possible to do so.

Returning to FIG. 12, the explanation will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine rear upper LEDs 422c and nine rear lower LEDs 424 are provided, and one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are provided. They are arranged so that they overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the light irradiated downward in the front view (lower side in the drawing) from the rear upper LED 422c of 1 through the front direction diffusion part (not shown) of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower side of 1 The light emitted from the LED 424 to the upper side in the front view (upper side in the drawing) via the front direction diffusion part 425b (see FIG. 14) of the rear downward diffusion lens 425 is configured to overlap (superimpose). . In addition, the light irradiated (diffused) in the left direction or the right direction from the rear upper LED 422c of 1 through the left diffuser or right diffuser (both not shown) of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 is , light irradiated in each direction from the other rear upper LED 422c through each diffusion part (not shown) of the rear upper diffuser lens 423, and from the rear lower LED 424 to the rear lower diffuser lens. The light irradiated in each direction through each of the diffusion parts 425a, 425b, and 425c of 425 overlaps (superimposes) at the intersection of each optical path.

Specifically, for example, each LED of the rear upper LED 422c is set to "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue" in order from the right side. ”, “green”, and each LED of the rear lower LED 424 is lit in order from the right: “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “ When the lights are lit in a total of three colors: "green", "red", "blue", and "green", each diffusion lens 423, 425 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 "Red" light is diffused in an optical path with a predetermined width, and is emitted from each diffusion lens 423, 425 corresponding to the second LED from the right (i.e., the eighth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. "Blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each diffusion lens 423, 425 corresponds to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From there, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each diffusion lens 423 corresponds to the fourth LED from the right (that is, the sixth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. 425, "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each of the LEDs corresponding to the fifth from the right (that is, the fifth from the left, center) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 “Blue” light is diffused from the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in an optical path of a predetermined width, and corresponds to the sixth LED from the right (that is, the fourth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. "Green" light is diffused from each diffusion lens 423, 425 in an optical path of a predetermined width, and corresponds to the seventh LED from the right (i.e., the third from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. "Red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425, and is transmitted to the eighth LED from the right (i.e., the second from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. "Blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from each corresponding diffusion lens 423, 425, and corresponds to the ninth LED from the right (that is, the leftmost) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. "Green" light is diffused from each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 along an optical path with a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “red” light overlap (“dark red”). , a part that is displayed only by the optical path of "red" light ("light red"), a part that is displayed by the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light overlapping ("purple") , the part where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "green" light overlap ("yellow"), the optical path of "red" light, the optical path of "blue" light, and "green" The area where the optical path of the ``blue'' light and the optical path of the ``blue'' light overlap (``white''), the area where the optical path of the ``blue'' light and the optical path of the ``blue'' light overlap (``dark blue''), A portion that is displayed only by the optical path of “blue” light (“light blue”), a portion that is displayed with the optical path of “blue” light and “green” light overlapping (“blue-green”) , a portion where the optical path of the “green” light and the optical path of the “green” light overlap (“dark green”), a portion where the optical path of the “green” light is displayed only (“light green”) ), each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even in a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap, so that The emitted light color is made different between the non-overlapping part and the overlapping part, and it is configured to be able to display more colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted light colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be further simplified, and the control burden for controlling the light emission of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of single-color light-emitting diodes without using full-color LEDs, it is possible to reduce costs by using single-color light-emitting diodes, which are cheaper than full-color LEDs, and The light emission control of the LEDs is further simplified, and the control burden on the LED light emission control can be reduced.

Further, with respect to pattern 1 of the first decorative pattern group 421, it is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of one color in a predetermined part, and overlaps with the optical path of light of another color in a part other than the predetermined part. Place it in That is, by forming one pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 so that the size falls within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, each part of the one pattern has a different luminescent color, and the one pattern can be made into a variety of colors. It can be expressed with different colors.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the lighting (effect) mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is displayed by lighting on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper side LED 422c and the lower rear side LED 424 are lit, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 16(a) changes from the state of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side area of the light plate 420 are additionally lit. ) schematically shows the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a). FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the right side of the rear light guide plate 420 The light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the area travels inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., lower right direction, lower front direction, and lower direction) according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. (to the left) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side, the rear lower side LEDs 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 The light emitted from the LED 424 is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., upper right direction, upper front direction, and upper left direction) according to the shape of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. The light is diffused with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side widths of the lenses 423 and 425.

For example, in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c on the right side is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "green". At the same time, the rear lower LED 424 on the right side lights up in ``red'', the middle rear lower LED 424 lights up in ``blue'', and the left rear lower LED 424 lights up in ``green''. In this case, the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap (intersect; the same applies hereinafter) is "dark red", and the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple". '', the area where the ``red'' optical path and the ``green'' optical path overlap is ``yellow'', the area where the ``red'' optical path, the ``blue'' optical path, and the ``green'' optical path overlap is ``white'', The part where the "blue" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "dark blue", the part where the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "blue-green", and the "green" optical path is The part that overlaps with the "green" optical path is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed in a total of 10 colors, including "green", by being lit.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," and "blue." Each light is displayed in one of 10 colors: ``green,'' ``dark green,'' ``red,'' ``blue,'' and ``green.''

The first decorative pattern group 421 includes a small pattern formed in a size within the range of the optical path width of light 1, a medium pattern formed in a size that falls within the range of the optical path width of light 2, and 3 There is a large pattern formed to a size that fits within the range of the optical path width of the light described above. Regarding the first decorative pattern group 421, the small patterns formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the first display color are lit and displayed in a single display color, and When each part of the medium pattern or large pattern is located within the range, each part of the medium pattern or large pattern is displayed by lighting up in the light emitting color of the overlapping optical path. Therefore, in the first decorative pattern group 421 composed of a plurality of patterns, by expressing each pattern in a different color or expressing one pattern in a plurality of colors, it is possible to provide a variety of performances with a variety of variations. I can do it.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is connected to the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach the LED 424, it remains in a non-lit state and remains difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15(b), from the state of FIG. 15(a), the rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, and then , when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side, the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side. The light emitted from the LED 422c has a predetermined optical path width inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) according to the shape of the rear upward diffusion lens 423. It is spread by. Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are lit sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the center area and right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected in the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425. Ru.

For example, in each of the right side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c on the right side is "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "red". lights up in green, and the LED 424 for the rear lower side on the right side lights up in ``red'', the lower LED 424 on the rear side in the center lights up in ``blue'', and the LED 424 for the rear lower side on the left side lights up in ``green''. When lighting with a luminous color, the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``red'' optical path is ``dark red'', the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path is ``purple'', The part where the "red" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, "blue" optical path, and "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". The area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path is ``dark blue,'' the area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``green'' optical path is ``blue-green,'' and the ``green'' optical path overlaps with ``green.'' The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed by lighting up in a total of 10 colors such as "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," and "blue." Each light is displayed in one of 10 colors: ``green,'' ``dark green,'' ``red,'' ``blue,'' and ``green.''

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is connected to the rear upper LED 422c and Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach the LED 424, it remains in a non-lit state and remains difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(a), from the state of FIG. 15(b), the rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the right side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. Furthermore, when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side, the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420 ( In other words, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the entire area) travels inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (lower right direction, lower right direction) according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. The light is diffused in a predetermined optical path width (front direction and downward left direction). Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided corresponding to the right side area and center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 424 corresponding to the left side area of the rear side light guide plate 420 is lit. When the provided rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left area, center area, and right area of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated sequentially from the right side. The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is moved in three directions (i.e., upper right direction, upper front direction, and upper left direction) according to the shape of the diffuser lens 425 for use in a predetermined direction according to the lens side width of each of the diffuser lenses 423 and 425. is diffused with an optical path width of

For example, in each of the entire areas of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the left side area, the center area, and the right side area), the rear upper LED 422c on the right side is "red", and the rear upper LED 422c at the center is "blue". ", the rear upper LED 422c on the left lights up in green, the right rear lower LED 424 lights in red, the middle rear lower LED 424 lights in blue, and the left rear lower LED 424 lights up in green. When lighting with a total of three emitting colors, ``green'', the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``red'' optical path is ``dark red'', and the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path. The area where the ``red'' optical path and the ``green'' optical path overlap is ``yellow'', and the ``red'' optical path, the ``blue'' optical path, and the ``green'' optical path overlap. The area where the 'blue' optical path and the 'blue' optical path overlap is 'dark blue', and the area where the 'blue' optical path and the 'green' optical path overlap is 'blue-green'. , the part where the "green" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed in a total of 10 colors, with only the portion of the optical path of "green" lit up.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," and "blue." Each light is displayed in one of 10 colors: ``green,'' ``dark green,'' ``red,'' ``blue,'' and ``green.''

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), from the state of FIG. 16(a), the rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the left side area and center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. When the rear upper LEDs 422c provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially turned off from the right side, the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side. The light emitted from the LED 422c travels inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) according to the shape of the rear upward diffusion lens 423 with a predetermined optical path width. It is spread by. Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420 is turned on. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially turned off from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected in the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. Ru.

For example, in each of the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "red". lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". When lighting with a luminous color, the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``red'' optical path is ``dark red'', the area where the ``red'' optical path and the ``blue'' optical path overlap with each other is ``purple'', The part where the "red" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, "blue" optical path, and "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". The area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path is ``dark blue,'' the area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``green'' optical path is ``blue-green,'' and the ``green'' optical path overlaps with ``green.'' The part that overlaps with the optical path of " is "dark green", the part of only the "red" optical path is "red", the part of only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part of only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed by lighting up in a total of 10 colors such as "Green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," and "blue." Each light is displayed in one of 10 colors: ``green,'' ``dark green,'' ``red,'' ``blue,'' and ``green.''

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is connected to the rear upper LED 422c and Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach the LED 424, the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-lit state and is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, even when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are controlled to emit light with as few as three colors, the rear side The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the light guide plate 420 can be expressed with a lighting color that is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned luminescent color. Therefore, it is possible to perform colorful expressions even with light emission control using a small number of light emission patterns, so while reducing the control burden on the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, it is possible to perform a variety of effects and enjoy the game. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

In addition, among the rear upper LEDs 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424 arranged in the right side area, center area, and left side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c is the one located on the rightmost side. By sequentially lighting up the LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located on the left side, An effect is performed as if a school of fish, which is one decorative pattern group 421, is swimming from the right side to the left side.

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are set to the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the board first decorative symbol group 60a and the board second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By sequentially turning on the lights from 1 to 3, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the 13th game board surface are executed integrally, providing a powerful effect using the entire 13th surface of the game board, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the optical path of the light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is displayed as being lit. Now, the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 will be explained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit. The lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 is schematically shown when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in a non-lit state. 17(b) shows a state in which the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 17(a), and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 is added. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the center region and right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off while the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. . FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and FIG. From the state of FIG. 17(b), while the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally lit, the rear light guide plate 420 FIG. 18B is a diagram schematically showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left, center, and right regions of the light plate 420 are off; FIG. 18(a), the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, and the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left side area and center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on, while the rear It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the side light guide plate 420 are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in a fluctuating performance, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at some timing of the fluctuating performance to clearly indicate to the player that a jackpot will occur. . Further, in order to indicate to the player the reliability of the jackpot in the variable performance, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be displayed by lighting up.

Here, the notification by lighting the confirmation lamp 311 is a performance that suggests that a jackpot will occur, and is a so-called jackpot confirmation performance. On the other hand, the notification by lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot will occur, and does not definitively suggest that a jackpot will occur. Therefore, in terms of the importance of game performance in the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is positioned as a more important performance than the notification by the first decorative symbol group 421.

However, when performing the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 while the performance in the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed, the performance using the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important for the game, is inhibited by the performance in the first decorative pattern group 421 (double production). (low visibility, low recognition, etc.). Furthermore, when the confirmation lamp 311 is to be used for notification, it is possible to not perform the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421, or not to perform the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 while the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed. However, there is a risk that restrictions may arise in the presentation, increasing the control burden, and reducing the variety of presentations.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the performance by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, The configuration is made so that the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 stands out. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width in the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side in front view of the rear light guide plate 420) is not lit or is slightly lit. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

From here, a specific presentation mode using the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421 will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit (extinguished), the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is transmitted to the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. The light is diffused in three directions (ie, downward rightward direction, downward frontward direction, and downward leftward direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side, the rear lower side LEDs 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 The light emitted from the LED 424 is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., upper right direction, upper front direction, and upper left direction) according to the shape of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. The light is diffused with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side widths of the lenses 423 and 425.

For example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is off, in the right area of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left The rear upper LED 422c lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 lights up in red, the middle rear lower LED 424 lights in blue, and the left rear lower LED 424 lights up in "green". When lighting with a total of three colors, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect; the same applies hereinafter) is "dark red", and the "red" light path and "blue" light path overlap. The part where the optical path overlaps is "purple", the part where the "red" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "yellow", the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path, and the "green" optical path The area where the ``blue'' and ``green'' optical paths overlap is ``white,'' the area where the ``blue'' and ``blue'' optical paths overlap is ``dark blue,'' and the area where the ``blue'' and ``green'' optical paths overlap is ``white.'' The area where the ``green'' optical path overlaps with the ``green'' optical path is ``dark green'', the area with only the ``red'' optical path is ``red'', and the area with only the ``blue'' optical path is ``blue''. ”, and only the “green” light path portion is “green”, for a total of 10 colors, each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit up and displayed.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is connected to the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach the LED 424, it remains in a non-lit state and remains difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state shown in FIG. is lit, and further, when the rear lower LEDs 424 provided corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the central area and the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit. The light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to direction), the light is diffused with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state shown in FIG. The rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the central region of the side light guide plate 420 is also not lit (lights out).

That is, among the rear lower LEDs 424 disposed far from the confirmation lamp 311, only the rear lower LEDs 424 provided in the center area and right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and the confirmation lamp The rear upper LED 422c disposed close to 311 is configured to turn off.

In this case, while the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425 is lit up, the rear The first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the upper LED 422c emits light is not lit (lights out).

Here, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 near the confirmation lamp 311 in front view is not provided at a position where it is lit by the light emission of the lower rear LED 424 (not provided). (The number of LEDs is small), and many of them are formed in positions where they are lit by light emission from the rear upper LED 422c.

On the other hand, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 in the front view is provided at least in a position where it is lit by the light emission of the lower rear LED 424. ). Note that the first decorative pattern group 421 disposed in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 in front view may be provided at a position where it is lit by the light emission of the upper rear LED 422c, and It may be provided at a position that is not lit by the light emission of the upper side LED 422c.

Therefore, when the rear upper LED 422c is turned on, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. When the rear lower LED 424 is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front can be lit (or is likely to be displayed). ). On the other hand, among the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front is displayed when the rear lower LED 424 is turned on. Even if there is, it will not be lit (hard to turn on), and if the rear upper LED 422c is off, it will not be lit (hard to turn on; it will be thinned out and lit).

With this configuration, the first decorative pattern group 421 in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 in the vicinity of the confirmation lamp 311 in the front view can be switched on or off depending on whether the rear upper LED 422c is lit or not. can. When the confirmation lamp 311 is displayed to be lit, even if the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed, the rear upper LED 422c is turned off, thereby causing the confirmation lamp 311 to emit light and the first decorative pattern group to be displayed. It is possible to perform an effect that does not interfere with the lighting of 421.

For example, in each of the right side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear lower LED 424 on the right side is "red", the central rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "red". When the light is illuminated with a total of three colors, ``green,'' the part where the ``red'' and ``blue'' optical paths overlap is ``purple,'' and the ``red'' and ``green'' optical paths overlap. The area where the ``red'', ``blue'', and ``green'' optical paths overlap is ``white'', and the ``blue'' and ``green'' optical paths overlap. The part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is "green", for a total of 7. Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed by lighting up in a different color.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed from the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the center area and right side area of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light does not reach the pachinko machine 10, it remains unlit and difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18(a), when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state shown in FIG. 17(b), the When the rear lower LED 424 is turned on and the rear lower LED 424 provided corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit from the right side, the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. The light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side area, the center area, and the right side area (that is, the entire area) spreads through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions according to the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. The light is diffused in the directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, if the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state shown in FIG. The upper side LED 422c does not light up (is off).

That is, only the rear lower LED 424 disposed far from the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and the rear upper LED 422c disposed close to the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off.

In this case, as in FIG. 17(b), the first decorative pattern group 421 is placed at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425. On the other hand, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light is illuminated. It is not displayed (light is off).

For example, in each of the left region, center region, and right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear lower LED 424 on the right is “red”, the central rear lower LED 424 is “blue”, and the rear lower LED 424 on the left is “red”. When the downward LED 424 lights up in a total of three colors, ``green,'' the part where the ``red'' optical path and the ``blue'' optical path overlap is ``purple,'' and the ``red'' optical path and ``green.'' The part where the optical path overlaps is "yellow", the part where the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path, and the "green" optical path overlap is "white", and the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap. The overlapped area is "blue-green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", the part with only the "green" optical path is "green", Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of seven colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state shown in FIG. When the rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially turned off from the right side while the upper LED 422c is lit, the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. The light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420 is turned on. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially turned off from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420 is reflected in the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425. Ru.

For example, in each of the left side area and the center area of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "red". lights up in green, and the LED 424 for the rear lower side on the right side lights up in ``red'', the lower LED 424 on the rear side in the center lights up in ``blue'', and the LED 424 for the rear lower side on the left side lights up in ``green''. When lighting with a luminous color, the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``red'' optical path is ``dark red'', the area where the ``red'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path is ``purple'', The part where the "red" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" optical path, "blue" optical path, and "green" optical path overlap is "white" and "blue". The area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``blue'' optical path is ``dark blue,'' the area where the ``blue'' optical path overlaps with the ``green'' optical path is ``blue-green,'' and the ``green'' optical path overlaps with ``green.'' The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is displayed by lighting up in a total of 10 colors such as "green".

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-lit state and is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, when the production by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the production by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed to make the production by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, stand out. Configure it as follows. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width in the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, by making the side where the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front) unlit or lightly lit, the first decoration The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21, the front lower condensing lens 414d, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d (hereinafter referred to as "each condensing lens") with respect to the front light guide plate 410 (sometimes referred to as "lenses 414d, 415d, 416d"), and the light emission of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be displayed by lighting on the front light guide plate 410. The aspect will be explained. FIG. 19 shows a second decorative pattern group 411, a third decorative pattern 412, a fourth decorative pattern group 413, which can be displayed by lighting on the front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, and a front left LED. 4 is a schematic front view showing the relationship with a unit 416. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of light through each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d. FIG. 21(a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group 411 can be displayed by lighting. ) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed by lighting.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 as a cherry blossom snowstorm pattern imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals is formed in both left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion excluding the central portion, A third decorative pattern 412 as a sunfish pattern imitating a fish sunfish is formed in the center part of the regular R-shaped part, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles is formed in the lower flat plate part. and is formed in the entire area of the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

Furthermore, when the front downward LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 irradiates the lower end surface of the front downward condensing lens 414d disposed below the front light guide plate 410, The light is configured so that it travels straight (upward) without being diffused from the upper end surface of the front lower condensing lens 414d. Furthermore, the front right side LED 415c provided on the right side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 condenses light for the front right side arranged on the right side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410. When light is irradiated onto the right end surface of the lens 415d, the light is configured to travel straight (toward the left) without being diffused from the left end surface of the front right condensing lens 415d. In addition, the front left side LED 416c provided on the left side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 condenses light for the front left side arranged on the left side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410. When light is irradiated onto the left end surface of the lens 416d, the light is configured to travel straight (to the right) without being diffused from the right end surface of the front left condensing lens 416d.

Further, the positions of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are arranged such that the 1 front right LED 415c and the 1 front left LED 416c are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). ing.

In the front light guide plate 410, decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, the lower flat plate portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion; It is configured such that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the switching point (area) with the regular R-shaped portion. This means that when a decorative pattern is placed at the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped part and the regular R-shaped part, the decorative pattern is placed in the part placed in the regular R-shaped part and in the lower inverted R-shaped part. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to reach the portion properly, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, the player may see the player in an unintended manner. Therefore, by configuring so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the switching point (region) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the expression of the pattern to be displayed by light guiding is improved. It is possible to perform the production appropriately and without any discrepancies.

The arrangement of decorative patterns at the switching point of the front light guide plate 410 (hereinafter referred to as "switching point P") will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 52, 53, and 54. FIG. 52 is a schematic side sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing the mode of guiding light inside the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is turned on, and FIG. 52(a) is a diagram schematically showing the light guide mode within the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. , FIG. 52(b) schematically shows the light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. FIG. 52(c) shows the light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the lower front LED 414c in the direct direction (vertically upward of the pachinko machine 10). FIG. Further, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. 19. Furthermore, FIG. 54 schematically shows the light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front right LED 415c. FIG. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 explained in FIG. A case will be described in which the device is configured to emit light depending on the light incident thereon. Further, in FIG. 54, a case will be described in which the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be lit by light incident in the left direction from the front right LED 415c, and a case will be described in which light incident in the right direction from the front left LED 416c is lit. Although the description will be omitted, the light incident in the right direction from the front left LED 416c also has the same effect and effect as the light incident in the left direction from the front right LED 415c.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is formed continuously from a lower flat plate part (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front lower flat plate part 410a") in a lower front view. A lower inverted R-shaped part (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b") and a regular R-shaped part (hereinafter, " (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front side regular R-shaped part 410c") and an upper inverted R-shaped part (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front upper inverted R-shaped part") formed continuously from the front regular R-shaped part 410c. ), and an upper flat plate part (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front upper flat plate part") formed continuously from the front upper inverted R-shaped part.

Further, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back side (lower side in FIG. 52) of the front lower flat plate part 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b, and a second decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back side of the front regular R-shaped part 410c. A pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed. When the front lower LED 414c is lit, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 becomes visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in FIG. 52), and the front right LED 415c When the front left LED 416c is turned on, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c), from the front lower LED 414c to the front light guide plate 410, the upper angle is 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. ), at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the back of the pachinko machine 10, see FIG. 52(b)), and directly in front (vertically above the pachinko machine 10, see FIG. 52(c)). Each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 is repeatedly reflected while being guided inside the front lower flat plate part 410a, but the fourth decorative pattern group provided on the back side of the front lower flat plate part 410a. 413, as described above, is configured so that depending on the light from the front lower LED 414c, the light is not reflected or is difficult to reflect in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in FIG. 52). Depending on the irradiated (guided) light, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be difficult or impossible to see from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

Each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees, a downward angle of 45 degrees, and a direct front direction is repeatedly reflected within the front lower flat plate portion 410a, or is directly reflected in the front downward reverse direction. It reaches the shaped portion 410b. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected at an angle (for example, 40 degrees) smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a. ) is reflected into the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light that collides with the front side surface of the pachinko machine 10 of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b has a reflection angle (for example, 50 degrees) larger than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a. and is reflected into the front light guide plate 410.

The light guided through the front lower inverted R shaped part 410b then reaches the front regular R shaped part 410c which has an R shape in the opposite direction to the front lower inverted R shaped part. In this case, the light that collides with the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c is reflected at an angle (for example, 50 degree) is reflected into the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light that collides with the front side surface of the pachinko machine 10 of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c is reflected at an angle (for example, 40 degrees) that is smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 50 degrees) when it collides with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. ) is reflected into the front light guide plate 410.

That is, the light guided to the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b and the front regular R-shaped part 410c via the front lower flat plate part 410a is directed to the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b and the front regular R-shaped part 410c. (Hereinafter, the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as the "switching point P."), the front surface of the front light guide plate 410 collides. The amount of light that collides with the front light guide plate 410 becomes dense, while the amount of light that collides with the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 becomes sparse (coarse).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52A to 52C and FIG. 413 is arranged, while none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b and the front regular R-shaped part 410c.

This is because, as described above, the amount of light that collides with the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c becomes sparse (coarse). Even if the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the point P, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 do not emit light appropriately, and the decorative pattern group 411 is not visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. , 412, 413 may not be visible at an appropriate timing. Moreover, each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 is configured to be lit (visible) only by light from a predetermined direction, whereas the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are If this is done, each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 may be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the irradiation of light in a direction where it would not normally be lit, and if it is lit at an unintended timing, There is a risk that discrepancies may occur in the content of the performance. Therefore, by not arranging any of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c, each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 can be properly arranged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side at a suitable timing, and to make it difficult for discrepancies in performance contents to occur, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c passes through the front right condensing lens 415d and is directed upward from the right end surface of the front lower flat plate portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410. When the light is incident at an angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, see FIG. 54), while the light is being guided inside the front lower flat plate part 410a, the front side and back side of the front light guide plate 410 The light is repeatedly reflected and guided straight to the left when viewed from the front, and reaches the left side of the front light guide plate 410. As described above, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect light from the front right LED 415c in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be accurately visible from the front direction of the Pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, suppose that an LED and a condenser lens are provided on the right side of the front lower inverted-R shaped part 410b of the front light guide plate 410, and an upward angle of 45 degrees ( When light is incident at an angle of 45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 54), the light guided within the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. Depending on the curved shape, the light is not reflected straight to the left when viewed from the front, but is reflected toward the upper side of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Then, when the reflected light collides with the back side surface of the front lower inverted-R shape section 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left in the front view according to the R shape, but is directed further upward of the front light guide plate 410. reflected to. Then, while repeating the above reflection a plurality of times, the light is guided to the left side of the front light guide plate when viewed from the front. In such a case, if a decorative pattern is placed near the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, there may be a portion where light is not guided. , it is not possible to accurately guide light to the decorative pattern, making it difficult to realize a desired light emission mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the LED and the condenser lens are not arranged from the lateral direction of the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b when viewed from the front, and the light is emitted from the lateral direction of the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b. By not irradiating the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413, and by not arranging decorative patterns near the switching point P, each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 can be appropriately illuminated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 may also not be arranged at the switching point (part) between the front regular R-shaped part and the front upper reverse R-shaped part. good. By configuring in this way, effects equivalent to the above effects can be achieved.

In addition, each decorative pattern group 411 is also placed at the switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate part 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b, or the switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R shaped part and the front upper flat plate part. , 412, 413 may not be arranged. Also at the switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate part 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b, or the switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped part and the front upper flat plate part, the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 Since the amount of colliding light may be sparse (coarse) on the side surfaces, each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 is also placed at the switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped part and the front upper flat plate part. By configuring it so that it is not arranged, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the manner in which light is condensed by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d has one first end surface (lower end surface in FIG. 20) formed in a straight line shape (or almost a straight line shape), while the The other second end surface (in FIG. 20, the upper end surface) formed on the opposite side of the first end surface is formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes that are continuous semicircular shapes.

The front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA) like the rear light guide plate 420, and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each light converging Light incident from the first end surfaces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end surfaces in a straight (or almost straight, upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end surface of each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is not diffusely emitted from the second end surface side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, but is condensed. Since the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that you want to display are lit, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 are not lit, and the decorations that you want to display are lit. Only the symbols 411, 412, and 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, when trying to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot reliability, the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and with a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative pattern group 413 Alternatively, if the third decorative pattern 412 lights up, there will be a discrepancy in the content of the performance, and there is a possibility that the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d and 416d to prevent the light directed toward the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, from being diffused, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed at an appropriate timing. This makes it possible to make it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the content of the performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, condensing lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are provided for each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and each condensed light is irradiated. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, for decorative symbol groups with a high probability of winning the jackpot, such as the third decorative symbol group 412, a diffuser lens such as that used for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 is used instead of a condensing lens. It may be configured to do so. The third decorative pattern 412 has a higher expectation of a jackpot than at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player is paying attention to during the game. It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the third decorative pattern 412 by comprehensively irradiating the third decorative pattern 412 with light using a diffusion lens. In addition, when lighting the fourth decorative pattern group 413, if the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, is lit, an inconsistency will occur, but the third decorative pattern 412, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than the third decorative pattern 412, lights up, the player still prefers to execute the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation level. , and not so much attention is paid to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a jackpot, so that discrepancies in performance are less likely to occur. Therefore, condensing lenses 415d and 416d are used for the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, and a diffusion lens is used for the third decorative pattern 412, which has a high jackpot expectation. The presentation effect of the light guide plate 410 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that are lit and displayed in the direction of light guided into the front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be lit and displayed in response to light in the lateral direction (left and right direction) when viewed from the front of the front light guide plate 410, and The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to be illuminated in response to vertical (vertical) light. Note that the third decorative pattern 412, which can be displayed by lighting in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, is displayed by lighting in the same direction as the second decorative pattern group 411, so for convenience of explanation, the third decorative pattern 412 is The explanation will be omitted and only the second decorative pattern group 411 will be explained.

First, as shown in FIG. 21(a), one bubble pattern forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 has vertical grooves (irregularities) in the vertical direction when viewed from the front on the front light guide plate 410. By continuously forming a plurality of bubbles along the same line, one bubble pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) when viewed from the front (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the vertical groove. By reflecting (emitting) the light toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the bubble pattern is displayed by emitting light so that it can be seen from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, from the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, even if the light (for example, the light emitted from the lower front LED 414c) that is guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front side collides with the vertical groove, It is configured such that it is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the first cherry blossom pattern forming the second decorative pattern group 411 has horizontal grooves (irregularities) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front on the front light guide plate 410 in the pattern of the cherry blossom pattern. By forming a plurality of cherry blossoms in succession along the same line, one cherry blossom pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, light (for example, light emitted from the lower front LED 414c) that is guided inside the front light guide plate 410 in the vertical direction (up and down direction) when viewed from the front collides with the horizontal groove, and By reflecting (emitting) the light toward the front side of the light guide plate 410, the cherry blossom pattern is displayed by emitting light so as to be visible from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, from the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, even if the light (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) that is guided in the front side light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction (left and right direction) when viewed from the front side collides with the lateral groove, It is configured such that it is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In this way, in the first front light guide plate 410, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that can be lit and displayed are configured to be different depending on the direction (incidence direction) of the light guided into the front light guide plate 410. As a result, the plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 can be individually lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410 of 1, which improves the expressive power of the light guide plate 1 and increases the attention to the game. can.

In addition, by using the entire front light guide plate 410 of No. 1 to perform effects using the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 on the front side and periphery of the drum display device 81, it is possible to enlarge the area from where the drum display device 81 is arranged. The performance can be performed within the specified range. Therefore, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 can perform an impressive performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, two decorative patterns (for example, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth A decorative pattern group 413) is formed so as to be expressible, one decorative pattern (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) is illuminated in response to light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the side, and the front light guide plate The other decorative pattern (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) may be configured to light up in response to light incident vertically on the decorative pattern 410. However, in order to configure one part to light up different decorative patterns in response to light from multiple directions, the unevenness in that part must have a complicated shape. It is necessary to keep in mind that the design is more difficult than when one decorative pattern is expressed in each part.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the lighting (effect) mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 22(b) is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are lit with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411 when the front lower LEDs 414c on the right end side and the left end side with respect to the light guide plate 410 are lit. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 23(b) is a diagram schematically showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern 412 when the front lower LED 414c in the central part excluding the right and left ends of the front light guide plate 410 is lit; FIG. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative pattern group 411 and the 3rd decorative pattern 412 when all the front side downward LED414c lights up with respect to the light guide plate 410.

First, as shown in FIG. 22(a), when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 lights up in "light blue", the light is emitted from the front right LED 415c. The light is condensed by the front right condenser lens 415d, and is directed straight to the left through the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in a range equivalent to the vertical width of the front right condenser lens 415d. is irradiated to. Furthermore, when the front left LED 416c located on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in "light blue", the light emitted from the front left LED 416c is The light is condensed by the light lens 416d, and is irradiated straight to the right on the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in a range equivalent to the vertical width of the front left condenser lens 416d.

In this case, the light that is irradiated straight to the left and right on the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condenser lens 415d and the front left condenser lens 416d is directed toward the lower side of the front light guide plate 410. The horizontal light collides with the vertical groove of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the flat plate part and the lower inverted R-shaped part, and the horizontal light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of the screen, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visibly illuminated in "light blue". At this time, the light condensed by the condensing lenses 415d and 416d does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. , the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are not visible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is transmitted through the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d to the lower flat plate portion straight in the left and right direction. While being guided, the light is slightly diffused upward in the front view in the lower flat plate portion and reaches the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, while the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, It is difficult or impossible to reach the upper flat plate part. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d allows the player's line of sight on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the drum display Only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 disposed on the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the horizontal position of the position where the device 81 is disposed is visibly illuminated and displayed in the regular R shape. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the section are not visible or difficult to see from the player's perspective on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Note that by sequentially lighting up the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c from the bottom to the top, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 emits light in such a manner that it floats from the bottom to the top of the front light guide plate 410. May be controlled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(b), among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right and left ends are lit in "pink", The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by one semicircular part at the right end and left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d, and has a width equal to the width of the one semicircular part. With the optical path width within the range, the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward by the front downward focusing lens 414d. The light collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of the light plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 is visibly illuminated in "pink". At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c located at the right end and left end is focused by the front lower focusing lens 414d, the focused light does not reach the third decorative pattern 412. First, the third decorative pattern 412 is not visible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the right side and left side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is directed to the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the The light is guided straight upward through the R-shaped portion, the upper inverted-R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion, and the light is guided straight upward through the R-shaped portion, the upper inverted-R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. Although it is slightly diffused in the left and right direction when viewed from the front in the flat plate part, because the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the position of the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped part are provided a predetermined distance apart. , it does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R-shaped portion. Thereby, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward condensing lens 414d causes only the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged on the right side and left side of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. is visibly lit and displayed, and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the center of the regular R-shaped portion is invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, the lower flat plate portion, which is the optical path of the light irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion. The light guide plate 410 has a shape that does not or makes it difficult for the light emitted in the direction to be emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(a), among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LEDs 414c located at positions other than the right and left ends are lit in "green". The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by a semicircular portion other than the right end and left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d, and the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed into a semicircular portion corresponding to the front lower LED 414c emitting light. The lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with an optical path width in the same range as the width of the circular part. be done.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward by the front downward focusing lens 414d. The light collides with the horizontal groove of the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the front light guide plate On the front side of 410, a third decorative pattern 412 is visibly illuminated in "green". At this time, when the light emitted from the lower front LED 414c located at a location other than the right end and the left end is focused by the front lower focusing lens 414d, the light is focused on the second decorative pattern group 411. The light does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411 on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, making it invisible or difficult to see.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is transmitted to the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the regular R-shaped portion. , the light is guided straight upward through the upper inverted R-shaped part and the upper flat plate part, and in the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part and the upper flat plate part. Although it is slightly diffused in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, since the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the position of the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped part are provided a predetermined distance apart, the regular R shape is slightly diffused. It does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative pattern group 411 in the shape part. As a result, only the third decorative pattern 412 arranged at the center of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward condensing lens 414d. The second decorative pattern group 411, which is illuminated and arranged on the right side and left side of the regular R-shaped portion, becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, the lower flat plate portion, which is the optical path of the light irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is formed from the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and left end. It is configured in a shape that does not or makes it difficult for the light emitted in the vertical direction to be emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(b), when the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right and left ends of the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink", The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by one semicircular part at the right end and left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d, and has a width equal to the width of the one semicircular part. With the optical path width within the range, the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward. In addition, among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, when the front lower LED 414c located at a position other than the right end and left end is lit in "green", the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c The light is collected by semicircular parts other than the right end and left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d, and the light is collected in a range equivalent to the width of the semicircular part corresponding to the front lower LED 414c emitting light. The lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with the optical path width.

In this case, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward by the front downward focusing lens 414d. The light collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative pattern group 411 is ``pink'' and the third decorative pattern 412 is visibly illuminated in ``green''.

More specifically, the "green" light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is transmitted to the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, Light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part, and the light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat part. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped part are separated by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the placement position of the second decorative pattern 411 in the regular R-shaped portion is not reached. Further, the "pink" light incident from the lower side of the right side and left side of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is transmitted to the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, Light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part, and the light is guided straight upward through the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat part. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped part are separated by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the placement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R-shaped portion is not reached. As a result, when lighting different decorative patterns 411 and 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d, different Even if light is guided to each of the decorative patterns 411 and 412 in a lighting color, each light can be lit in an individual display color without mixing.

On the other hand, the lower flat plate part, which is the optical path of the light irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the regular R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 A fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is illuminated in the vertical direction from the front lower LED 414c. The front light guide plate 410 has a shape that does not or makes it difficult for the light to be emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

In this way, when a plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed on one front light guide plate 410, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is condensed and irradiated, and the decorative patterns 411, 412 and 413 are configured to vary whether or not they are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the incident direction of light. By configuring this way, the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 that are to be illuminated and displayed according to the game result are illuminated at an appropriate timing, and the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 that should not be illuminated are certainly not illuminated. By configuring this, it is possible to perform performances utilizing the entire front light guide plate 410 (the entire surface) while preventing production discrepancies, enrich the variations of performances, and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation is formed in a portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). , the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only in horizontal light. In addition, the second decorative pattern group 413 has a higher jackpot expectation in the portions where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed, and the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to be visible only by vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the light in the vertical direction, the vertical light will cause the jackpot to be higher than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is turned on when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412, which has a high expectation level, is displayed by lighting up, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is displayed by lighting up, Even when the 4 decorative pattern groups 413 are lit and displayed, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be created at an unintended timing. Even if the pachinko machine 10 becomes visible from the front side, discrepancies in performance can be minimized and a game that does not give players a sense of discomfort can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the presentation mode by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and FIG. 24(a) shows the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 24(b) is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and FIG. 24(b) shows that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is in the lit state, while the first It is a diagram schematically showing a non-lighting state of a pattern group 421, a second decorative pattern group 411, and a third decorative pattern 412. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and FIG. 25(a) shows that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are 25(b) is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 while the first decorative pattern group 421 is in the lighting state. On the other hand, it is a diagram schematically showing a non-lighting state of a second decorative pattern group 411, a third decorative pattern group 412, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413. In addition, in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and each condensing lens 414d, 415d, 416d are omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group on the rear light guide plate 420. Each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to LED 421 is in a non-lighted (unlit) state. Therefore, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are not visible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the state of FIG. 24(a), the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the back side of the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 is visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, "7" is displayed in the upper row. ”, a “blank symbol” in the middle row, and “8” in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical optical path and the horizontal optical path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). A fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only in horizontal light. In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation level is higher in the portions where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) in the fourth decorative pattern group 413. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are formed higher than the height of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, and are configured to be visible only by vertical light. Furthermore, the rear light guide plate 420 is placed on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A drum display device 81 is arranged to form the first decorative symbol group 421 and to execute a variable performance of the third symbol, which is the main performance of the game. In this way, in the portions of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper reverse R-shaped portion), the main effects of the game are displayed. By arranging a drum display device 81 that executes a three-symbol fluctuating performance and configuring it to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the performance with the highest expectation of jackpot in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance, which is important as a game, can be realized. It is possible to enhance the performance effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and to increase the degree of attention to the game, while configuring the system so as not to hinder the display results and performances with high expectations for jackpots. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(b), while both the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "light blue", The LEDs 414c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are in a non-lighted (lights out) state. ing. Therefore, while the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. is not visible or difficult to see from the front side.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 24(b), similar to FIG. 24(a), the positions where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display contents (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 disposed on the back side of the drum display device 81 are visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, "7" is displayed in the upper row. ”, a “blank symbol” in the middle row, and “8” in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when performing the variable production of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 disposed on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 By performing the effect using the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed in the 4th decorative pattern group 413, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 produce an integrated and powerful three-dimensional effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each device 81, 410. It is possible to enhance each effect and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25A, the front lower LEDs 414c at the right and left ends corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink", and the front light guide plate 410 While the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right end and left end corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412 are lit in green, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 Each LED 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 is in a non-lighted (lights out) state. Therefore, while the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern group 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative pattern group 421 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. is not visible or difficult to see from the front side.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 25(a), as in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b), the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81, which is disposed on the back side of the position where the drum is formed, is visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, "7" is displayed in the upper row. ”, a “blank symbol” in the middle row, and “8” in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when performing the variable production of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 disposed on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second symbol formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 By performing the effects using the decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 produce an integrated and powerful three-dimensional effect, thereby enhancing the effects of each device 81, 410. It is possible to enhance each effect and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are set to "red", "blue", and "green". On the other hand, the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are in a non-lighted (unlit) state. It has become. Therefore, while the first decorative pattern group 421 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. is not visible or difficult to see from the front side.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 25(b), as in FIGS. 24(a), 24(b), and 25(a), the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the rear light guide plate 420 are The display contents (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 disposed on the back side of the position where the first decorative pattern group 421 is formed are visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, "7" is displayed in the upper row. ”, a “blank symbol” in the middle row, and “8” in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when performing the variable production of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 disposed on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the third symbol formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420 By performing the effect using the first decorative pattern group 421, the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420 produce an integrated and powerful three-dimensional effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each device 81, 420. , it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this way, by performing the fluctuating effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 in combination with the effect on the light guide unit 400 having the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a variety of effects can be produced. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effects of the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, and increase the attention to the game.

More specifically, on the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) of the drum display device 81 that executes the variable production of the third symbol and its surrounding area (the top, bottom, left and right areas of the display area of the drum display device 81 when viewed from the front), By executing a performance related to the fluctuation performance (for example, jackpot expectation level), the performance area of the third symbol fluctuation performance is expanded two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally, and the third symbol fluctuation is powerful. Able to perform a performance.

In addition, when a variable performance is configured to be able to execute multiple patterns of effects indicating jackpot expectations, effects with low jackpot expectations (i.e., second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while effects with high jackpot expectations (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). By providing this function, when performing a performance with a low expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to suppress the lighting display of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot due to noise or the player's viewing angle, etc., thereby creating a performance that does not cause discrepancies. can be executed.

More specifically, if there is an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) and an effect with a low expectation of a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decoration) If the symbol group 413) is provided on the same light guide plate, when trying to light up an effect with low jackpot expectation, if the player's visual position with respect to the light guide plate differs depending on the height or posture of the player, the visual recognition may occur. Depending on the angle, a light for lighting a performance with a low expectation of a jackpot may make it appear as if a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is lit. When such an event occurs, the player expects a jackpot as if a performance with a high jackpot expectation was executed, even though the jackpot expectation of the variable production of the third symbol is low. Since a jackpot does not occur in the fluctuating performance, there is a risk that a performance for which the expectation of a jackpot would normally be high may be mistakenly interpreted as having a low expectation of a jackpot.

Therefore, when configuring multiple patterns of effects indicating jackpot expectations in variable effects to be executable, effects with low jackpot expectations (i.e., second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while effects with high jackpot expectations (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). By providing this function, when performing a performance with low expectations for a jackpot, it is possible to prevent misperceptions due to differences in the visual recognition position due to noise or the player's height or posture, and provide the player with a performance that meets the design value. can.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light guide plates 410, 420 are used to configure a variable effect to be able to execute a plurality of patterns of effects indicating jackpot expectations, in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., front light guide plate 410), the condenser lens 414d, By utilizing 415d and 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be configured to be individually executable, and other types of effects can be executed. By employing diffusion lenses 423 and 425 on the light plate (ie, the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (ie, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in a variety of ways. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute effects that are greater than the number of light guide plates 410 and 420, and also to increase the variety of effects and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and mainly shows the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When this happens, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side centered around the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a. Various solenoids 209 are connected, including a grand prize opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the main power supply solenoid (not shown) and a normal power solenoid for driving the normal power function 64c. Sends various commands and control signals to.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery for each special symbol, dynamic display settings on the special symbol display device 37, variable performance settings on the drum display device 81, variable display display result lottery on the normal symbol display device 83, The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the jackpot probability of each special symbol, is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters and the like stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first embodiment will be explained. These counters etc. are used to perform jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display on special symbol display device 37, setting of variable display on drum display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display on normal symbol display device 83, etc. It is used by MPU 201 of main controller 110. Furthermore, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 32.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery are used to set the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the variable performance of the drum display device 81. A jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the production mode of the variable production, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, A variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection is used.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 4 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 39). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The details will be described later, but the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d consisting of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) related to the first special symbol, and a first holding ball storage area 203d that includes four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second holding ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second holding first to fourth areas) is provided. In the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each value of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the first starting port 64a. be done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b. Each is stored.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 28(a). FIG. 28(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment is for a low probability state used in the case of a special symbol low probability state where the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time reduction state" for each setting value. and a high-probability state used when the game state is a ``probability fluctuating state'' which is a high-probability state of special symbols with a higher probability of winning than a low-probability state of special symbols.

The numbers of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently for each set value. Further, it is configured to compensate for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers necessary to shift from a low probability state to a high probability state from the number of loss random numbers corresponding to a loss. In this way, by varying the number of jackpot random numbers depending on the gaming state, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot The number of random numbers) is 50, and the values "0 to 49" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5/100 (i.e., 0.5 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the values "0 to 499" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the setting value "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (i.e., 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot from a low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "1", the number of random number values that lose in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a (loss random number values) is the remaining 9950 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "50 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9500 other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "500 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "1" is 9950/10000 = 99.5/100 (i.e., 99.5 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9500/10000 = 95/100 (i.e., 95%). There is.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that will be a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the value "0 to 51" is It is prescribed (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52/100 (i.e., 0.52 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and the values "0 to 519" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the setting value "2" is 520/10000 = 5.2/100 (i.e. 5.2%), and the special symbol The high probability state is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "2", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that lose in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "52 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9480 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "520 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "2" is 9948/10000 = 99.48/100 (i.e. 99.48 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (i.e., 94.8%). is set to .

Therefore, the setting value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which is a setting where jackpot games are more likely to occur than when the setting value is "1".

Next, when the setting value is "3", the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that will be a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the value "0 to 53" is It is prescribed (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54/100 (i.e., 0.54 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and the values "0 to 539" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the setting value "3" is 540/10000 = 5.4/100 (i.e. 5.4%), and the special symbol The high probability state is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "3", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that lose in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9946 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "54 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9460 other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "540 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "3" is 9946/10000 = 99.46/100 (i.e. 99.46 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (i.e., 94.6%). is set to .

Therefore, the setting value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), this is a setting where jackpot games are more likely to occur than in the case of the setting value "2".

Next, when the setting value is "4", the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that will be a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the value "0 to 55" is It is prescribed (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56/100 (i.e., 0.56 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and the values "0 to 559" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the setting value "4" is 560/10000 = 5.6/100 (i.e. 5.6%), and the special symbol The high probability state is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "4", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that lose in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "56 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9440 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "560 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "4" is 9944/10000 = 99.44/100 (i.e. 99.44 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9440/10000 = 94.4/100 (i.e., 94.4%). is set to .

Therefore, the set value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which is a setting where jackpot games are more likely to occur than in the case of the setting value "3".

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that will be a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the value "0 to 57" is It is prescribed (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58/100 (i.e., 0.58 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and the values "0 to 579" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with a set value of "5" is 580/10000 = 5.8/100 (i.e., 5.8%), and the special symbol The high probability state is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "5", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that lose in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "58 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9420 other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "580 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "5" is 9942/10000 = 99.42/100 (i.e. 99.42 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9420/10000 = 94.2/100 (i.e., 94.2%). is set to .

Therefore, the setting value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which is a setting where jackpot games are more likely to occur than in the case of the setting value "4".

Next, when the setting value is "6", the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that will be a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the value "0 to 59" is It is prescribed (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal gaming state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6/100 (i.e. 0.6 %).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and the values "0 to 599" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the setting value "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (i.e. 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is 10 times easier to hit the jackpot from a low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "6", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that lose in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9940 values other than the jackpot random number values, and the value "60 ~9999'' is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that result in a loss in the high probability state (loss random number values) is the remaining 9400 other than the jackpot random number values, and the values "600 to 9999" are specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( settings). In other words, the loss probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol with the setting value "6" is 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (i.e. 99.4 %), and the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (i.e., "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9400/10000 = 94/100 (i.e., 94%). There is.

Therefore, the set value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), which is a setting where jackpot games are more likely to occur than in the case of the setting value "5".

In this way, by changing the probability of winning a jackpot for each probability setting value and changing the ease of winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to change the ball payout rate for each probability setting value, and it is possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot for each probability setting value. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games played on the pachinko machine 10 and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") until the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of ``99'', the counter returns to ``0'' after reaching ``99''. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)), for example.

Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, one of the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a wins the jackpot. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, a jackpot is selected from among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that becomes a jackpot (jackpot random value), That is, if it is a random number that results in a loss (loss random number), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that becomes a jackpot (jackpot random value), a variable production is performed. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b is commonly referred to in the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 28(b). FIG. 28(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types are associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, until the next jackpot, the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are both in a high probability state. "10R Probable Variable Jackpot" which corresponds to "Fluctuating State" and "Probability Variable Jackpot" where after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are both high probability state until the next jackpot. Although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and the "5R guaranteed variable jackpot" corresponding to the "state", the special symbol's jackpot probability is low, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. There is a "10R normal jackpot" corresponding to the "time reduction state" in which the probability of winning the normal symbol is high.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 28(b), the values "0 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with "10R probability variable jackpot", and the values of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with "5R probability variable jackpot". The value "40-59" of C2 is associated, and the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "10R normal jackpot".

That is, in the winning/failure lottery of each special symbol, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any first holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d, or the first holding area of any of the second holding ball storage area 203e. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2 of the same first holding area The jackpot type associated with the value of is determined from the jackpot type table 202b, and for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "10R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the jackpot type counter C2 If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "45", "5R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78", "10R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, when you win a jackpot with the dynamic display of each special symbol, the jackpot type of "10R fixed variable jackpot" is 40%, the jackpot type of "5R fixed variable jackpot" is 20%, and the jackpot type of "10R regular jackpot" is 40%. There will be a 40% chance of winning.

Note that the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, in accordance with the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99).

In the first embodiment, the rough presentation form of the variable presentation at the time of a jackpot and loss displayed on the drum display device 81 is selected based on the number of pending variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Ru. Specifically, there are "non-reach (long)" or "non-reach (short)" production modes in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" in which only variable elements of "normal reach" are executed as "reach display". The "Normal Reach" production mode, the "Super Reach" production mode that develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach" and executes the variable elements of "Super Reach", and the "Special Reach" production mode that also develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". Five performance modes are selected, including the "Special Reach" performance mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each performance mode will be explained in detail. Among the production modes, "non-reach (long)" production mode and "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode and "non-reach (short)" production mode are collectively referred to as (sometimes referred to as "non-reach" production mode) means that each reel is displayed on the drum display device 81 in which the three reels LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. After the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element that rotates (shuffles) reels LR, CR, and RR at high speed is performed, which of the two reels (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) that stops first is active? This is a performance mode in which the same third symbol does not stop on the line and does not generate a "reach display".

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" means, for example, in the variation performance of the third symbol performed on the drum display device 81, the third symbol displayed on each reel LR, CR, RR is vertically downward on the display screen. A variable element that is rotated and scrolled at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop results of the previously stopped fluctuating performance are irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is performed except for a specific production mode ("non-reach (short)" production mode). It is configured to be

The variable element of "low-speed variation" refers to the variable element of the third symbol that is performed on the drum display device 81, after the variable element of the above-mentioned "high-speed variation," the third symbol is scrolled slowly at a speed that is visible to the player. It refers to the variable elements that are changing. In this variable element of "low speed variation", the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped and displayed in order while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the 2nd symbol row that stops and displays first (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR), it is assumed that "reach display" has occurred and it will develop into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol stops on the two reels LR and RR that are stopped and displayed first, the remaining reels CR are stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating performance is ended. Note that details of each variable element including the "high-speed variation" variation element or the "low-speed variation" variation element will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each reel LR, CR, and RR stops in turn. , a different third symbol stops on the two reels LR and RR that stop first, the remaining 1 reel CR stops, and 1 variable performance ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, the "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the "high speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, each reel LR, CR , RR stop at the same time, and a different third symbol stops on the 2 reels LR, CR, and RR (for example, the 2 reels LR and RR that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and the other The reel CR also stops, and the fluctuating performance of 1 ends.

Among the production modes, the "Normal Reach" production mode refers to the variable production of the third symbol on the drum display device 81. Immediately after the same third symbol stops on the second reel LR and RR that are stopped and displayed first, the "Normal Reach" production mode is This is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and does not develop into the variable element of other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

More specifically, in the "Normal Reach" variation element, the middle reel CR is scrolled at a low speed, and at the start of the variation, it changes at a low speed until a predetermined stop symbol is reached, and when the stop symbol is reached, the middle reel CR is scrolled at a low speed. This is a stop-display effect.

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "super reach" are executed, developed from variable elements of "normal reach".

More specifically, the variable element of "Super Reach" is scrolled at a slower speed (for example, ultra-slow scrolling, frame-by-frame scrolling, etc.) than the low-speed scrolling of the variable element of "Normal Reach", and the variable element of "Normal Reach" is scrolled at a slower speed (for example, ultra-slow scrolling, frame-by-frame scrolling, etc.), and This is an effect in which the display changes by slow scrolling until the stop symbol is reached, and stops displaying when the stop symbol is reached.

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "special reach" are executed, which are developed from variable elements of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64a is selected. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first storage area. Also, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the second holding first to fourth areas provided in the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting port 64b is activated. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second storage area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is adjusted depending on the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (the number of pending balls). The stop pattern tables 202d that refer to values are configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided with a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances of both special symbols on standby (number of reserved balls), etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance, first, based on the pending number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the validity of the fluctuation performance, the current gaming state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a performance mode that is a rough mode of the variable performance is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of a variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the performance mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the variable production according to the propriety of the variation production, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the variation performance of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is to change the selection ratio of the production mode depending on whether there is one or not, and (3) how many balls are on hold for the variable production that is on hold.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each production mode. In other words, depending on whether you win the jackpot lottery or lose the jackpot lottery, there are different stop patterns, ie, "non-reach" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, and "special reach" presentation mode. By configuring the system so that the selection ratio of the modes is different, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, you can easily select the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, you can select the "non-reach" presentation mode. To make it easy to select a mode and a "normal reach" performance mode.

By configuring this way, the "Super Reach" performance mode and the "Special Reach" performance mode can be made easy to hit the jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" production mode and the "Non-Reach" production mode are difficult to hit the jackpot. It is possible to create a performance or a performance that does not lead to a jackpot, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that is easy to hit a jackpot appears in a fluctuating performance, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while the performance that is easy to hit a jackpot is being performed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a jackpot, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select a performance that is easy to win a jackpot, and difficult to select a performance that is difficult to hit a jackpot. The present invention is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is the rough content of the variable performance based on the following. On the other hand, if the acquired lottery result is a loss, the performance mode (stop pattern) of the variable performance is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it difficult to select a performance that is easy to hit the jackpot and easy to select a performance that is difficult to hit the jackpot. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in a variable performance, if a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is likely to occur with that variable performance, and a performance that is difficult to hit is executed. By making it difficult for a jackpot to occur in the fluctuating performance when the fluctuating performance is being carried out, and by providing a difference in the expected jackpot value for each performance mode (stop pattern), the interest of the game can be increased during the execution of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, as a second reason, the ball enters the first starting port 64a in a state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls (so-called non-drawing of special symbols due to overflow winnings) based on balls entering the second starting port 64b in a state in which the number of balls is reached.

To explain more specifically, the number of standby times for the fluctuating effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is each set at a maximum of 4 times, and since the fluctuating effects are executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability" In the game state in which balls are likely to enter the second starting port 64b in the "fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, the ball will frequently enter the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the second starting port Even though the ball enters 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if you select a variable performance with a long variation time when the maximum number of balls reserved for the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol will be suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not used up, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that no gaming value is obtained even if the ball enters the first starting port 64a, and the variable effect is exhausted and the player is able to obtain the number of reserved balls again. The ball stops firing until the end of the game and the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is easily reached, or a state where the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) Regarding the number of reserved pitches, it is configured to select the production mode of the variable production based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variation time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the fluctuating performance is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time long and delaying the end of the fluctuating performance. To be more specific, when the number of pending balls in a variable performance is small (non-existent), a new ball is inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the variable time of the currently running variable performance. If the ball is not released, the next variable performance cannot be started, and a demonstration screen or the like must be displayed on the drum display device 81. If the player does not perform a variable effect on the drum display device 81 even though he is playing a game by shooting balls, he will not be able to obtain the entertainment he is looking for in the jackpot lottery. I get excited about games. In addition, since the variable performance is not performed on the drum display device 81, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is such that it is difficult for balls to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the game value is increased. There is a risk that the player may decide that the machine is difficult to obtain and stop playing the game on that machine 10.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the performance mode of the variable performance based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected when the number of balls on hold for the variable performance is small. There is. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the drum display device 81 to experience a situation in which the variable effect is not being performed, and to maintain the execution state of the variable effect in the drum display device 81 for a long time.

Here, details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variable effect based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, it is possible to determine whether the variable effect is appropriate or not. One of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected by referring to the pending number table 202c based on the gaming state at that point and the total pending number of variable effects of special symbols 1 and 2 at that point. It is composed of Then, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in FIG. 29, when the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3" when extracting losses in the "normal gaming state", or when the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3", or in the "probability fluctuation state" ” or “time reduction state” and when the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 30(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when extracting losses in the "normal gaming state" and the number of reserved balls is "4 to 8", or when extracting losses in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of reserved balls If the number is "2 to 8", table B 202d2 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when winning a jackpot, in any game state (i.e., "normal game state," "probability fluctuation state," or "time reduction state") and in any number of reserved balls (i.e., 1 to 8 balls). Even if there is, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 30(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, if any jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the gaming state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no such game (that is, when there is a loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of pending balls and the game state at that time.

Note that even when a jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when winning a jackpot and there are many balls on hold, a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, a "Super Reach" production mode where the variation element of "High Speed Variation" is 5 seconds, or " It may also be configured such that a "special reach" performance mode, etc.) can be selected.

In this case, in each production mode in which the "reach display" is executed, a production mode is selected in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed variation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, for example, when starting a variation effect with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 4 times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" ends (at the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" is recognized), a "reach display" may occur in the variation effect. Therefore, even if a variable element of 5 seconds of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, a production mode in which a "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode is configured to be executed. By doing so, at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds, it is not known whether the variation effect will be a jackpot or a loss.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 30(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 30(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each "non-reach (long)" performance mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Normal Reach" production mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "95" to " 97'', and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the ``Special Reach'' performance mode is set to ``98'' and ``99''. In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" production mode, and the "non-reach (short)" production mode is set not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" production mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Normal Reach" production mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "95". ” to “97”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “Special Reach” performance mode is set to “98, 99”. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" production mode, and the "non-reach (long)" production mode is set not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" performance mode accounts for 75%, the "normal reach" production mode accounts for 20%, the "super reach" production mode accounts for 3%, and the "special reach" production mode accounts for 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, 75% of the performance modes are "Non-reach (short)", 20% are the "Normal reach" mode, 3% are the "Super reach" mode, and 2% are the "Special reach" mode. It is set to be the selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" production mode. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the selected variation effect compared to the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the variation time of the selected variation effect is likely to be shorter in the B table 202d2 than in the A table 202d1.

Note that the selection ratios of the "normal reach" performance mode, "super reach" performance mode, and "special reach" performance mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is selected based on the number of balls held in the pending variable presentation. For example, if the number of balls held in a variable performance is large, a "non-reach (short)" performance mode with a short variable performance time is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls on hold for the variable performance is large, the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved by shortening the execution time of the variable performance to be executed and increasing the number of times the variable performance is executed.

In addition, for example, when the number of reserved balls in a variable production is small, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be used. Select the "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a long variable performance time. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a longer variable performance time than when the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected, so the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b By making it easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the field and increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect on the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variable effect is being executed is maintained. can do.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is configured to be selected differently based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect when selecting the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first starting port 64a Alternatively, substantially the same performance mode is selected for determining the variable performance based on the time when the ball enters the second starting port 64b and determining the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the ball entering. It is composed of

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is the same, and the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the other production mode is the same. The values of the stop pattern counter C3 are also set to be the same.

In other words, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected based on the number of pending pitches in the variable production. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the production mode selected at the time of starting winning and the production mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same production mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-read notice is given based on the performance mode selected at the time of winning the start, in the variable production that is the target of the pre-read notice, there will be no discrepancy with the contents of the pre-read notice. can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" production mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Special Reach" production mode is set to "40" to " 99" is set. In addition, in the C table 202d3, the stop pattern table 202d is selected at the time of a jackpot, and since the "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" performance mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to be 5% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 35% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 60% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

Therefore, in the variable presentation when winning a jackpot, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode, and in the variable presentation when losing a jackpot, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Normal Reach" presentation mode > The selection rate is set to increase in the order of "Super Reach" performance mode > "Special Reach" performance mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation level when each "reach display" appears is that the probability that a jackpot display result will appear is higher in the order of "special reach" production mode > "super reach" production mode > "normal reach" production mode. It is configured so that Thereby, the degree of expectation for a jackpot can be shown to the player depending on the type of performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the feeling of exhilaration at the jackpot depending on the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the situation in which the game is being played is determined based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that point, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that point. By shortening the execution time of the fluctuating performance and increasing the number of executions of the fluctuating performance based on the above, it is possible to select a performance mode that increases the execution efficiency of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4") and the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened will be displayed. A table 202d may also be provided. In addition, when the number of balls on hold in the fluctuating performance is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the performance element of "low-speed fluctuation" is omitted in each performance mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each performance mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable performance. However, in cases where the selection rate of each performance mode differs depending on the number of pending pitches in a variable production, when performing a pre-read notice, the number of pending balls at the time of the decision to execute the pre-read notice and the target of the pre-read notice will be determined. The number of balls held during execution of a variable effect may be different. In such a case, a process is required to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-read notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented by "1" sequentially within the range of "0 to 9", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. Of these, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second holding first to fourth areas provided in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b are stored. Among them, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to perform detailed processing in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Determining the fluctuation pattern is specifically determining the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance. The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation of the third symbol displayed on the drum display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. It also determines whether or not to execute a preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation performance and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, there is no need for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control detailed advance notice lottery etc. necessary for executing the variable effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare commands for all the variation patterns of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine detailed fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby controlling the fluctuation performance. You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the production content of the variable production at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate production according to the gaming state. can.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202e will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. This pachinko machine 10 includes, as a variable pattern table 202e, a variable pattern table 202e1 for loss, which is commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a loss, and a variable pattern table 202e1 for losing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is commonly used in all game states. A jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is prepared which is commonly used in all gaming states when the second special symbol is a jackpot.

FIG. 31 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the loss variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram. As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e2 are grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the "E0: Non-reach (long)" performance mode that is referred to when the "Non-reach (long)" production mode is determined as the performance mode in the event of a loss, and the "Non-reach (short)" production mode. One for "E1: Non-reach (short)" which is referred to when the mode is determined, one for "E2: Normal reach" which is referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and one for the "super reach" production mode. It is divided into "E3: Super Reach", which is referred to when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined, and "E4: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined. In addition, as the performance mode at the time of a jackpot, there is one for "E5: Normal reach" that is referred to when the "Normal reach" production mode is decided, and "E6: Super that is referred to when the "Super reach" production mode is decided. and "E7: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "Special Reach" performance mode is determined. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), or If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area with the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (jackpot random value), that is, in any case, it is a loss. If the value is , the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time by referring to the number of pending balls table 202c, and is stored in the same pending area. The production mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In the group (group) of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is the one in the variation performance held in the holding area. Determined as a fluctuation pattern.

Here, each variable element making up the variation pattern will be explained. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is constructed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements include a variable element of "high speed variation", a variable element of "low speed variation", a variable element of "normal reach", a variable element of "super reach", and a variable element of "special reach". A variable element and a "re-variation" variable element are provided.

As described above, the "high-speed variation" variation element is a variation element that scrolls and varies (rotationally drives) at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. The variable element of this "high-speed variation" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variation performance when the "non-reach (short)" production mode etc. is selected (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed variation (short)"). If a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected, the fluctuating performance is performed for 10 seconds at the beginning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). In addition, when the variable element of this "high-speed variation" ends, the variable element of "low-speed variation" to be described later is started (executed), or the variation effect ends as it is.

The "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds", and the third symbol is scrolled and fluctuated so that it is visible, and a "reach display" is generated. It is a variable element that shows whether or not to do so. This variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected, and is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected (for example, "non-reach (long)" )" effect mode) is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of "high-speed variation."

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the variation element of "low speed variation" is performed, so that the final stop reel (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see FIG. 4)) of the drum display device 81 On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 changes to "low-speed variation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called "bitter stop") without passing through any variable elements. In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the structure is such that the variation effect ends as is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" performance mode includes the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low-speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variable performance is composed of the included variation patterns. In addition, in the "non-reach (short)" performance mode, the fluctuation performance is configured with a fluctuation pattern of only the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds".

The variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is the variable element that executes the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" again when a predetermined stop point is temporarily displayed in the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. say. That is, in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", when the right reel RR is stopped, a third symbol with a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is stopped and displayed on any active line. (For example, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and "8" is displayed on the right reel RR.) Then, when the middle reel CR stops, the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel LR. This corresponds to the case where the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and middle reel CR, and "8" is stopped and displayed on the right reel RR (i.e., the stop number is "778"). .Hereinafter, this combination will be referred to as a "chance pattern." The pending symbols) will not be digested and the fluctuating performance will continue.

The variation element of this "pseudo variation" is performed for "5 seconds" similarly to the variation element of "low speed variation". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation element of "pseudo variation" is executed, a symbol that always generates a "reach display" (for example, a third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and right reel RR) is the same and the middle reel CR continues to fluctuate (hereinafter referred to as "reach forming symbols") is displayed and is structured so that it develops into the variable element of "normal reach" described later. There is. In addition, in the variable element of this "pseudo variation", it may be configured such that the "reach forming symbol" is not displayed and the "loss display" is displayed and the variation effect is ended.

Therefore, as a variation element of this "pseudo variation", when a chance pattern is stopped and displayed in a variation element that is equivalent to a variation element of "slow variation", the variation element of "high speed variation" is again generated from that chance pattern. After the start, the effect is executed as if another variable effect had started.

In the first embodiment, it is configured such that a maximum of one "pseudo series" performance can be executed in the variable performance. In addition, in one variation performance, the variation element of "pseudo variation" may be configured to be executed multiple times.

The variable element of "Normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach forming symbol") on the active line of either of the two reels LR or RR that stops first in the variable element of "low speed variation". ) is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variation results of the remaining reel CRs when the symbol is stopped and displayed. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "low speed variation" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, there is a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a pattern that directly displays a "super reach". There is a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "Special Reach", and a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation" after a temporary "loss display" appears. has been done.

The variable element of “Super Reach” is developed and executed when the “loss display” does not stop and the fluctuation of the remaining reel CR continues in the variable element of “Normal Reach”, and a predetermined effect is displayed on the drum display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing (for example, "battle performance"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "revariation" is executed after the "loss display" appears.

The variable element of "Special Reach" is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the variable element of "Normal Reach" and the fluctuation of the remaining reel CR continues, and the drum display device 81 displays the above-mentioned predetermined value. This is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing a special performance (for example, a "competitive performance") that is different from the performance. This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Special Reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the "re-variation" occurs after the "loss display" appears.

Note that the configuration is such that after the execution of the variable element of "Normal Reach", the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops, but instead of this configuration, reach formation is performed after "Slow Variation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so that it suddenly develops into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without passing through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "Special Reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that is developed and executed after a "loss display" once appears in any "reach display", and a "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when winning a jackpot game. That is, in the case of "loss indication", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "losing display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so if the "losing display" does not win the jackpot If you go to that, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variable element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 32), and is configured not to be selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 31, in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol lose, "E0: Non-reach (long)" has a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds". " One variation pattern (variation time) of "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation"". Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time". ) are available.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E0: Non-reach (long)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "slow variation". ``element'' is set as ``0 to 9'', and only ``the variable element of ``high-speed variation (long)'' + the variable element of ``low-speed variation'''' is set to be selectable.

That is, in any game state, if the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation type counter All possible values of CS1 (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation””. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" performance mode in the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern must be "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "slow variation". 'Element' is selected.

Next, in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E1: Non-reach (short)" has one fluctuation pattern of "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds". is available.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: Non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 ~9'', and it is set so that only ``only the variable elements of ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'''' can be selected.

That is, in any game state, if the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when performing the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation type counter ``Only the variable element of ``high-speed variation (short)'''' is associated with all possible values of CS1 (``0 to 9''). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" performance mode in the variation performance of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the variable element of "high-speed variation (short)"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: Normal reach" includes "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + "normal reach" with a total variation time of "20 seconds". "variable element" and "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + with the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns, ``Variation Element of Normal Reach'', are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E2: Normal reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + variation element of "normal reach". "0 to 6" for "variable element of ``high-speed fluctuation (long)'' + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" ``Variable factor + variable factor of ``Normal reach'''' is ``7-9''.

That is, in any game state, when the "Normal Reach" performance mode is selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "High-speed variation (long)" is selected. ” fluctuation factor + “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation factor + “normal reach” fluctuation factor” fluctuation pattern is 70%, “high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation factor + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation factor + “high speed fluctuation” The variation pattern of "(short)" variation element + "slow variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" performance mode that is selected when a loss occurs, the fluctuation pattern of "Variation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Variation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Variation element of "Normal reach"" is likely to be selected (overall 70%). In addition, the fluctuation of "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'pseudo fluctuation' + variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' + variable element of 'slow fluctuation' + variable element of 'normal reach'" By configuring the game so that a pattern can also be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Next, in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Super Reach" has the total variation time of "30 seconds" "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " "Super Reach" variable factors" and "High-speed variation (long)" variation factors + "Pseudo variation" + "High-speed variation (short)" + "Slow variation" variation with a total variation time of "40 seconds" Two variation patterns of ``element + variation element of "super reach"'' are available for selection, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E3: Super reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " ``Super Reach'' variable element'' is set as 0 to 7, ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' variable element + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' variable element + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' variable element + ``Low-speed fluctuation''. ” variable factor + variable factor of “Super Reach”” was “8,9”.

That is, in any game state, if the "super reach" performance mode is selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "high-speed variation (long )" variation factor + "Slow variation" variation factor + "Super reach" variation factor" variation pattern is 80%, "High-speed variation (long)" variation factor + "Pseudo variation" variation factor + " The variation pattern of "high speed variation (short)" variation element + "slow variation" variation element + "super reach" variation element is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" performance mode that is selected when losing, the fluctuation pattern of "Variation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Variation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Variation element of "Super Reach"" is likely to be selected. (80% of the total). In addition, "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'pseudo fluctuation' + variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' + variable element of 'slow fluctuation' + variable element of 'super reach'" By configuring the game so that a variation pattern can also be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Next, in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Special reach" includes "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " "Special Reach" variable element" and "High-speed variation (long)" variation factor + "Pseudo variation" + "High-speed variation (short)" + "Slow variation" variation with the overall variation time of "50 seconds" Two variation patterns of ``element + variation element of "special reach"'' are available for selection, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E4: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " "0 to 8" for "Variable Elements of Special Reach", "Variable Elements of "High-Speed Fluctuation (Long)" + Variable Elements of "Pseudo Fluctuation" + Variable Elements of "High-Speed Fluctuation (Short)" + Variable Elements of "Slow Fluctuation" ” variable factor + variable factor of “Special Reach”” was “9”.

That is, in any game state, if the "Special reach" performance mode is selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "high-speed variation (long )" variation factor + "Slow variation" variation factor + "Special reach" variation factor" variation pattern is 90%, "High-speed variation (long)" variation factor + "Pseudo variation" variation factor + " The variation pattern of "high-speed variation (short)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "special reach" variation element is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" performance mode that is selected when a loss occurs, the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + variable element of "special reach"" is likely to be selected. (90% of the total). In addition, "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'pseudo fluctuation' + variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' + variable element of 'slow fluctuation' + variable element of 'special reach'" By configuring the game so that a variation pattern can also be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

In addition, for predetermined fluctuation patterns at the time of loss (for example, "non-reach (long)" performance mode and "non-reach (short)" performance mode), since the performance mode is determined as the fluctuation pattern as it is, the fluctuation type counter CS1 It may also be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern without using. Further, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, it is also possible to use a plurality of variation type counters together for selection (selecting whether or not to display a preview, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a jackpot will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, and when the second special symbol When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the corresponding second holding ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a jackpot, the holding number table 202c is referred to and the gaming state at that time is determined. A stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and a performance mode is selected based on the value of a stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the above stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is the one in the variation performance held in the holding area. Determined as a fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Normal reach" includes "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". "Variable element" and "Variable element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Variable element of "Slow fluctuation" + Variable element of "Normal reach" + Variable element of "Re-variation"" with a total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" and the total fluctuation time is "30 seconds", "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + “Normal Reach” variable factor” and “High-speed variation (long)” variable factor + “Pseudo variation” variable factor + “High-speed variation (short)” variable factor with a total variation time of “35 seconds” + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-variation" fluctuation element" are available for selection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E5: Normal reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + variation element of "normal reach". ``Variable element of ``'', ``0'', ``Variable element of ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + Variable element of ``Low-speed fluctuation'' + Variable element of ``Normal reach'' + Variable element of ``Re-variation'''' "1, 2", "Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + Variable element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + Variable element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation of "Normal reach" 3 to 5 for ``element'', ``variable element of ``high-speed fluctuation (long)'' + variable element of ``pseudo fluctuation'' + variable element of ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'' + variable element of ``slow fluctuation'' + ``Normal Reach'' variable factor + ``Re-variable'' variable factor'' is ``6-9''.

That is, in any game state, when the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol, the "High-speed variation (long)" The variation pattern of "variable element + variable element of "slow variation" + variable element of "normal reach"" is 10%, "variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow variation" + variation of "normal reach"" The variation pattern of "Element + Variation element of "Re-variation"" is 20%, "Variation element of "High-speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Pseudo variation" + Variation element of "High-speed variation (short)" + Variation element of "Slow The variation pattern of "Fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor" is 30%, ""High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-variation" fluctuation pattern" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" performance mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variable element of "High-speed variation (long)" + the variable element of "Pseudo variation" + the variable element of "High-speed variation (short)" + the variable element of "Slow variation" The variation pattern of "variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 're-variation'" is more likely to be selected (40% of the total). In addition, "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach"", "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Re-variation" fluctuation factor", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Slow fluctuation" By configuring the variable pattern to include the variable element of ``+ variable element of normal reach'' to be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a jackpot can be expected from any of the variable patterns.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super reach" includes "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds". "variable factor" and "variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable factor of "slow variation" + variable factor of "super reach" + variable factor of "re-variation" whose total variation time is "35 seconds". "Variable element" and "Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + Variable element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" ``Variation factor + Variation factor of "Super Reach"" and "Variation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + Variation factor of "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" with the total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" ” + “Slow fluctuation” fluctuation factor + “Super reach” fluctuation factor + “Re-variation” fluctuation element” are available for selection, and the fluctuation type is set for each fluctuation pattern. The value of counter CS1 is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " "0, 1" for "Variable element of "Super Reach", "Variable element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Variable element of "Slow fluctuation" + Variable element of "Super Reach" + Fluctuation of "Re-variation" "2 to 4" for "Element", "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + "5, 6" for "Variation factor of "Super reach"", "Variation factor of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation factor of "Pseudo variation" + Variation factor of "High speed variation (short)" + Variation factor of "Slow speed variation" It is ``7 to 9'' for the variable factor of ``change'' + variable factor of ``super reach'' + variable factor of ``re-change.''

That is, in any game state, when the "super reach" performance mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when executing the variation production of the first special symbol, "high-speed variation (long)" The variation pattern of "variable factor + variable factor of "slow variation" + variable factor of "super reach"" is 20%, "variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable factor of "slow variation" + variable factor of "super reach" ” fluctuating factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuating factor” fluctuation pattern is 30%, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuating factor + “pseudo-fluctuation” fluctuating factor + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuating factor + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor" fluctuation pattern is 20%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High speed fluctuation (short)" The variation pattern of ``variable element + variable element of ``low speed variation'' + variable element of ``super reach'' + variable element of ``re-variation'''' is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" production mode that is selected at the time of a jackpot, the following changes occur: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element ”, or “variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “pseudo fluctuation” + variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + variable element of “slow fluctuation” + variable element of “super reach” + “Variable element of “Re-variation”” variation patterns are more likely to be selected (both account for 30% of the total). In addition, "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'slow fluctuation' + variable element of 'super reach'", or "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'pseudo fluctuation'" By configuring each variation pattern of "variation element + "high-speed variation (short)" variation element + "slow variation" variation element + "super reach" variation element" to be selected respectively, any variation It is possible to provide a gaming experience where you can expect a jackpot even from the pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special reach" includes "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + "special reach" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds". "variable factor" and "variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable factor of "low-speed variation" + variable factor of "special reach" + variable factor of "re-variation" whose total variation time is "45 seconds". "Variable element" and "Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + Variable element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" 'variable element + 'Special Reach' variable element' and 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' with a total fluctuation time of 55 seconds. ” fluctuation element + “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element + “special reach” fluctuation element + “re-variation” fluctuation element” 4 fluctuation patterns are available for selection, and the fluctuation type is set for each fluctuation pattern. The value of counter CS1 is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E7: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + " 0 to 2 for "Special Reach" variable factor, "High-speed variation (long)" variable + "Low-speed variation" variable + "Special Reach" variable factor + "Re-variation" variation "3, 4" for "Element", "variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + 5 to 7 for the variable factor of "Special Reach", variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable factor of "pseudo variation" + variable factor of "high-speed variation (short)" + variable factor of "low speed" ``Variable element of ``change'' + variable element of ``special reach'' + variable element of ``re-variation'''' is ``8, 9''.

That is, in any game state, if the "Special Reach" performance mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when performing the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol, "High-speed fluctuation (long)" The variation pattern of "variable factor + "slow variation" variable + "special reach" variable factor" is 30%, "high-speed variation (long)" variable factor + "slow variation" variable factor + "special reach" ” fluctuating factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuating factor” fluctuation pattern is 20%, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuating factor + “pseudo-fluctuation” fluctuating factor + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuating factor + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor" fluctuation pattern is 30%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "High speed fluctuation (short)" The variation pattern of ``variable element + variable element of ``low speed variation'' + variable element of ``special reach'' + variable element of ``re-variation'''' is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" performance mode that is selected when a jackpot is won, "the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + the variable element of "slow variation" + the variable element of "special reach"" or "the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" (Long)” fluctuation element + “Pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “High speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element + “Slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + “Special reach” fluctuation element” fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected. (both account for 30% of the total). In addition, "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'slow fluctuation' + variable element of 'special reach' + variable element of 're-variation'", or "variable element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)'" Each variation pattern of ``variable element + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"" By arranging that each variation pattern can be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

In this way, by configuring the system so that a relatively long variation pattern is likely to be selected when a jackpot has been won, the entertainment of the game can be improved by enriching the content of the variation production in which a jackpot occurs. be able to. In addition, if you have not won a jackpot, that is, if you lose, the structure is configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected, so that the content of the variation effect in the case of a loss is shortened, and the variation effect is changed. Can be digested efficiently.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. The random number counter C4 per common figure is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure completes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per common map (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). It is updated once and repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the same timing, the ball is stored in one of the first to fourth areas provided in the ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern held ball execution area (not shown) in the order in which they were stored in the normal pattern held ball storage area, and the random number counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern held ball execution area is Performs a hit judgment on the value.

The value of the random number that becomes a hit for a normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) for a normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each gaming state (for example, 1/100 in a low probability state, 1/100 in a high probability state, 50/100 etc.), and the value of the normal pattern winning counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 becomes the winning set by the normal pattern random number table. If it matches the random number value, it is determined to be a win. Then, according to the gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation table (not shown) is referred to, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is set (for example, 30 seconds when the winning assist function is not activated, 3 seconds when the winning assist function is activated). etc.), and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "○" is displayed in a lit state as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the electric prize release table (not shown) is referred to according to the gaming state, and the opening time of the normal electric prize 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assist function is not activated, and 0.1 seconds when the winning assist function is activated). (for example, 5 seconds), and during the opening time, the normal electric jack 64c is opened, and during that time, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the common figure counter C4 stored in the common figure holding area does not match the value of the random number that is a win set by the common figure random number table (not shown), it is determined that it is a loss. be done. Then, a variable display time is set by referring to a normal symbol fluctuation table (not shown) according to the gaming state, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a stop symbol (normal symbol) is displayed as "x". ” symbol will be lit up.

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 203 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and input/output data. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 37). The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first held ball counter 203a, a second held ball counter 203b, a first held ball storage area 203d, a second held ball storage area 203e, and a held ball execution area 203f.

The first held ball counter 203a is configured to count the number of balls entering the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting ball) detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the ball entering the opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (sometimes referred to as "starting winning"), the first special symbol is dynamically displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the first special symbol is dynamically displayed on the drum display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol to be performed up to four times.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a starting winning into the first starting opening 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 41 (See S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 42).

Like the first held ball counter 203a, the second held ball counter 203b is a second starting port 64b that is detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the starting winning, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed on the drum display device 81) This is a counter that counts (the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times.

Like the first reserved pitch number counter 203a, the second reserved pitch number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a starting winning into the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 41 (See S307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is determined by the number of reserved balls command The audio lamp control device 113 is notified by (see S310 in FIG. 41). This held ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. This command includes data regarding the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls held in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the number of balls commanded. can. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a starting prize is detected, a command for the number of reserved balls is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, thereby dynamically displaying (variable) each special symbol managed in the audio lamp controller 113. Even if the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) deviates from the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of balls on hold for the next received ball The deviation can be corrected using the pitch count command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a held ball number command to the audio lamp control device 113, in the held ball number command, the first held ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 or the Along with the above-mentioned starting prize that triggered the addition of not only the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b but also the first reserved pitch number counter 203a or the second reserved pitch number counter 203b, the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27) It also includes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the above.

That is, when there is a starting prize, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 are A number of commands are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the number of reserved balls command, are used to execute a fluctuation performance based on the respective values. It reads ahead before executing the variable performance and determines how the variable performance will turn out (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable performance. Then, based on the judgment result of the pre-reading, the execution of various performances is decided, and the performance content of the "reservation change notice" that changes the reservation symbol (execution symbol) displayed on the reservation display section Db of the drum display device 81. It is now possible to determine the timing of execution, etc.

In addition, the number of pending balls command indicating the number of pending balls for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., which is different from the held ball number command, a held ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the corresponding It may be configured to generate commands similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command based on ball entry (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) and send them to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, by reusing the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d contains the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting prize into the first starting opening 64a. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved balls so that the data (each value of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first special symbol 1 starting winning can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. It has areas (first reservation areas 1 to 4) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e contains the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting prize into the second starting opening 64b. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved balls so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first winning of the second special symbol can be stored (reserved) up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts execution or is being executed, or the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. In order to execute processes such as dynamic display and setting of variable effects, data (counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 values), if data corresponding to a starting prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data corresponding to one starting winning of the data is stored. , shifts to this holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting prize regarding the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning regarding the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storing area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one starting prize of the data is shifted to this held ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the second special symbol is executed with priority, and the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the first special symbol is executed with priority. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is not suspended. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27 again, details of the first held ball storage area 203d, the second held ball storage area 203e, and the held ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the variable effects and the like.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the setting of the dynamic display and variable effect of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the production mode of the variable production, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting winning).

The first holding ball storage area 203d is composed of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4). The four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) each include a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, the second holding ball storage area 203e is composed of four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas), similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. It is being

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are combined into one. Although these holding ball storage areas 203d and 203e are provided together, a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d contains data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters any of the first starting ports 64a (starting winning). Up to 4 times can be stored, but in that case, the areas with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) will be stored in order from the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st holding area 1st to 4th area). The data is stored in In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the starting winnings to the temporally oldest first starting opening 64a, and the data corresponding to the starting winnings to the temporally oldest first starting opening 64a are stored. Data corresponding to the starting winnings will be stored.

In addition, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting winning). However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (secondary holding area 1st to 4th area). Ru. In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the starting prize to the second starting port 64b is stored, and the second reservation first area stores the data corresponding to the starting prize to the oldest second starting port 64b in terms of time. Data corresponding to the starting winnings will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second holding first area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 determines that when it is time to start executing the variable effect, no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e, and the data is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first holding area, the data stored in the first holding area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command. Under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 performs a variable performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it determines whether data is stored in the second reservation first area of the second reservation ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, if it is determined that data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is used as the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is shifted, It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second pending first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the second held first area becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the second holding areas (first to fourth) where data is stored (held) in the second holding ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be explained. For example, the value of the second held ball counter 203b when the start judgment of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the second holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the second holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the second holding area and the third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b is "2" when the start judgment of the variable production is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second pending second area to the second pending ball counter 203b. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the second holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the MPU 201 It is determined whether data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the judgment, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2. It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the first held ball storage area 203f becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the first holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the first holding ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, the value of the first held ball counter 203a when the start judgment of the variable production is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the first holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the first holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the first reservation third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a is "2" when the start judgment of the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first pending second area to the first pending pitch number counter 203a. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will be continued. The input/output port 205 includes, on the input side, a switch for detecting the balls that have won in each of the winning ports 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a, and the balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path through the out port 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc., a setting key 501 for setting the startup mode when the power is turned on, and a setting for updating the probability setting value when pressed in the "setting change mode" A change switch 502 and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various solenoids 209 such as a big winning opening solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a regular symbol display device 83, and a regular symbol holding lamp 84 on the output side. ing. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 , 502 , and 503 and the state of the setting key 501 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, the lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamp 34, confirmation lamp 311, each notification lamp 303a, 305a, front lower part). LED 414c for the front right, LED 415c for the front right, LED 416c for the front left, LED 422c for the upper rear, and LED 424 for the rear lower This controls settings such as the display mode of the effects that will be displayed.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. Details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the configuration is such that commands cannot be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the performance displayed on the drum display device 81, or changes the stage of the performance displayed on the drum display device 81. The drum display device 81 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the rear image such as “Reach” production mode, etc. Instruct it to run.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a fluctuating presentation of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and a continuous preview presentation. It is something to control.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power outage monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power outage or the like. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44). Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, the detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data include a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variable pattern table 222d, and a light guide plate lighting. At least a pattern table 222e, a confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and a reel control table 222g are stored.

Of these tables 222a to 222g, tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and fluctuation pattern table 202e, which are all provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The audio lamp control device 113 receives a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon startup winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. The prefetching process is configured to be executable based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d.

Then, by this pre-reading process, what kind of effect will result from the pending fluctuating effect that is the target of the pre-reading process (whether it will be a jackpot or not, whether it will be a "reach display", etc.) The content (and execution timing) of the "holding change notice" that determines the execution of various effects and changes the display mode of the holding symbols displayed on the holding display section Db by determining the effect before executing the variable effect. (timing)).

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a “setting suggestion performance” that suggests a jackpot probability setting value to the player based on the fluctuation pattern and probability setting value etc. corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110. The content (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion performance" is selected by lottery.

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e displays the first decorative pattern group 421 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 based on the validity of the variation effect, the variation pattern, etc., and the value of a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, which will be described later. , the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Note that details of this light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

Further, the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f is referred to in order to determine the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 during execution of the variable effect, based on the validity of the variable effect, etc., and the value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, which will be described later. This is the table that will be used. Note that details of this confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Furthermore, the reel control table 222g is referred to in order to determine the drive patterns of the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance of the third symbol and the stop symbol. This is the table that will be used.

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c, a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, a confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, a first reserved ball number storage area 223f, and a second reserved ball counter 223c. At least two pending information storage areas 223g and an execution information storage area 223h are provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the on state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 47). Then, it is turned off when the variable performance is set on the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 48).

When the variation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs a variation production setting process to execute the waiting variation production if there is a variation production on standby. (See S1402 to S1415 in FIG. 48).

The sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, is used to control the fluctuation performance (dynamic This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of times of standby) of the first special symbol variation performance held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first held ball counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command (held ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-first held ball number counter 223b stores and updates the number of held balls. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the audio lamp control device 113 causes the main control device 110 to add the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special symbol by the ball entering the first starting port 64a, and to set the first reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110. When receiving the held pitch number command transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value is added, the added value of the first held pitch number counter 203a of the main controller 110 ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110 is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 sends a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110. and a stop type command, and when setting the mode of variation production of the first special symbol on the drum display device 81 in accordance with the reception thereof, the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (updated). (See S1406 in FIG. 48). In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-first held pitch number counter 223b in accordance with the command sent from the main controller 110 in conjunction with the update of the first held pitch number counter 203a, so the main control The value of the sub-first reserved pitch number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved pitch counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is configured to perform a variable production (dynamic display) of the second special symbol performed on the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the second held ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command sent from the main control device 110, and the sub-second held ball number counter 223c manages the number of held balls. It has become.

Specifically, the audio lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special symbol by the ball entering the second starting port 64b, and causes the main controller 110 to set the second reserved ball number counter 203b. When receiving the held pitch number command transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value is added, the added value ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol reserved in the main control device 110 is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 sends a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110. and a stop type command, and when setting the mode of variation production of the second special symbol on the drum display device 81 in accordance with the reception thereof, the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (updated). (See S1409 in FIG. 48). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved pitch number counter 223c in accordance with the command sent from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the device 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved symbols and executed symbols on the drum display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a held pitch number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of held balls indicated by the command in the sub-first held pitch number counter 223b or the sub-second held pitch number counter 223c (see FIG. (see S1211 of FIG. 47), at the timing of updating the value of the sub-first held ball number counter 223b or the sub-second held ball number counter 223c in response to reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (see S1406 of FIG. 48 or In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first pending pitch counter 223b and the sub-second pending pitch counter 223c after storage or updating (see S1409), the display control device 114 sends a display pending pitch number command to the display control device 114. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first reserved pitch counter 223b and the sub-second reserved pitches counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that the pending symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and the executed symbols indicating the variable performance being executed are displayed on the pending display section Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-first reserved pitch number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first reserved pitch number counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the value of the sub-second reserved pitch number counter 223c is changed. The value is changed in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending symbols displayed on the pending display section Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the first pending ball counter 203a and the second pending ball counter 203b of the main controller 110. You can change it while changing it. Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which variable performance is suspended.

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d lights up and displays the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. This is a counter used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not the item is accepted.

The value of this light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then, in the counter update process of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1112 in FIG. 46), a predetermined range is set. (for example, "0 to 99"), and is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99") It becomes. The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is updated once (for example, incremented by 1) each time the main process loops once.

As described above, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives commands related to the variation production of the third symbol (variation pattern command and display type command), the audio lamp control device 113 displays the contents of the variation production (for example, success or failure, production mode, variation element, etc.). ), the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern group 411 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 are selected with reference to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to display the decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 by lighting (see FIG. 50).

Here, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, it refers to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time, The lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, or fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the variation performance of each special symbol is divided into a "loss" case and a "jackpot" case. Then, the divided groups are further divided by performance mode, and among them, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the rear side A value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d corresponding to the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the light guide plate 420 is assigned to each light guide pattern lottery counter 223d.

Specifically, when there is a "loss" in the variable production, there are three types for the "non-reach" production mode, "normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, and " It is divided into two groups: ``Special Reach'' and ``Special Reach.'' In addition, at the time of a jackpot, the games are divided into groups for "normal reach" performance mode, "super reach" performance mode, and "special reach" performance mode. In the divided groups, "bubbles" indicating the fourth decorative pattern group 413, "cherry blossoms" indicating the second decorative pattern group 411, "sunfish" indicating the third decorative pattern 412, second decorative pattern group 411, and Possible values of the light guiding pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with each of the lit symbols "cherry blossoms & sunfish" indicating the third decorative symbol 412 and "school of fish" indicating the first decorative symbol group 421, respectively.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, any of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are included in the "non-reach" performance mode when "losing". (Hereinafter, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may be collectively referred to as "each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421." The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated only with "None", in which neither "Yes" nor "Yes" lights up. The value of the pattern lottery counter 223d has not been assigned.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "non-reach" performance mode at the time of "lose" is "0 to 99" for "none". ing. Note that values are not assigned to "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms and sunfish," and "school of fish," so they are written as "-."

In other words, when the "non-reach" performance mode is selected when "losing", the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode in which none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 are lit is 100%. It is set to be selected by a percentage, and the lighting modes of "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "school of fish" are set to be selected by a percentage of 0%. .

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "losing", the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode is selected without exception (100%). , and other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 are set not to be lit.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with "none", "bubble", "cherry blossom", and "sunfish" in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of "lose", The values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are not assigned to "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish" and "School of Fish."

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guiding pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "Normal Reach" production mode at the time of "Lose" is "0 to 39" for "None", and "Bubble" for "None". ``40-69'' for ``cherry blossom'', ``70-89'' for ``sunfish,'' and ``90-99'' for ``sunfish.'' Note that "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not assigned values, so they are written as "-".

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected when "losing", the lighting mode of "None" (non-lighting) is 40%, the lighting mode of "Bubble" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "Cherry Blossom" is 40%. 20%, the lighting mode for "sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the lighting mode for "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "losing", the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode is likely to be selected (40%). , "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," or "sunfish" may also be selected.

In addition, for the "non-reach" presentation mode when "losing" and the "normal reach" presentation mode when "losing" (described later), the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. The value of the light pattern lottery counter 223d is not correlated. This is because in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "cherry blossoms & sunfish" or "school of fish" is lit, the "super reach" presentation mode or "special reach" presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as " This is to confirm that the "super reach or higher performance mode" (sometimes referred to as "super reach or higher" performance mode) will be executed. Therefore, in the "non-reach" presentation mode in which "super reach or higher" does not appear, and the "normal reach" presentation mode, the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" are set not to be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "bubble", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish", and "school of fish" for the "super reach" performance mode when "losing". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guiding pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "super reach" performance mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 39" for "bubbles" and "cherry blossom". ``40-69'', ``sunfish'' ``70-89'', ``cherry blossoms & sunfish'' ``90-97'', and ``fish schools'' ``98,99''. There is. Note that since no value has been assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

In other words, if the "Super Reach" performance mode is selected when "losing", the "Bubble" lighting mode is 40%, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode is 30%, the "Sunfish" lighting mode is 20%, The lighting mode of "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 8%, the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is selected at a rate of 2%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, and 421 that are selected during the "Super Reach" production mode at the time of a "lose", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "Bubble" is likely to be selected (40%). However, "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms and sunfish", or "school of fish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d has "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "school of fish" as the "special reach" performance mode when "losing". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "losing" is "0 to 49" for "bubbles", and "cherry blossom" for "bubble". ”, “50-79”, “sunfish”, “80-94”, “cherry blossoms & sunfish”, “95-98”, and “fish schools”, “99”. Note that since no value has been assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" production mode is selected when "losing", the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 50%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossoms" is 30%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 15%, The lighting mode of "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 4%, the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is selected at a rate of 1%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 that are selected during the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "losing", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubbles" is likely to be selected (50%). However, "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms and sunfish", or "school of fish" can also be selected.

Note that the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "Super Reach" presentation mode and the "Special Reach" presentation mode so that the "None" lighting mode is not selected. This is to ensure that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, some effect will be executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. be. As a result, when the "Super Reach or More" effect mode is executed, some effect is always executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the effect of "reach display" and the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate By combining this with the performance of 420, it is possible to suggest to the player the expected level of jackpot in the variable performance in a composite manner.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "None", "Bubble", "Cherry Blossom", and "Sunfish" in the "Normal Reach" performance mode at the time of "Jackpot", as in the case of "Lose". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "normal reach" performance mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 to 9" for "none" and "bubble". ``10-29'' for ``cherry blossom'', ``30-59'' for ``sunfish,'' and ``60-99'' for ``sunfish.'' Note that "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not assigned values, so they are written as "-".

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected for a "Jackpot", the lighting mode of "None" (non-lighting) is 10%, the lighting mode of "Bubble" is 20%, and the lighting mode of "Cherry Blossom" is 10%. 30%, the lighting mode for "sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode for "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, among the lighting modes of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, and 421 that are selected during the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a "jackpot", the lighting mode of "sunfish" is likely to be selected (40%), but "none" , "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," or "sunfish" may also be selected.

Note that the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" performance mode at the time of "jackpot" so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. This is because in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "cherry blossoms & sunfish" or "school of fish" is lit, the "super reach" presentation mode or "special reach" presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as " This is to confirm that the "super reach or higher performance mode" (sometimes referred to as "super reach or higher" performance mode) will be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot occurs, the lighting modes of "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" and "School of Fish" are set not to be selected in the "Normal Reach" production mode during a "Jackpot" where "Super Reach or higher" does not appear. ing.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "Super Reach" performance mode at the time of "Jackpot" includes "Bubble", "Cherry Blossom", "Sunfish", "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish", and "School of Fish", as in the case of "Loss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guiding pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "Super Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is "0, 1" for "Bubble", "Cherry Blossom" "2-9" for "Sunfish", "10-19" for "Sunfish", "20-49" for "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish", and "50-99" for "School of Fish". There is. Note that since no value has been assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" production mode is selected at the time of a "Jackpot", the "Bubble" lighting mode is 2%, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode is 8%, the "Sunfish" lighting mode is 10%, The lighting mode of "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%, the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is selected at a rate of 50%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, and 421 that are selected during the "super reach" production mode at the time of a "jackpot", the "school of fish" lighting mode is likely to be selected (50%); ”, “cherry blossoms”, “sunfish”, or “cherry blossoms & sunfish” can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "Special Reach" performance mode for "Jackpot" includes "Bubble", "Cherry Blossom", "Sunfish", "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish", and "School of Fish" as well as for "Loss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "none".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is "0 to 4" for "Bubble", "Cherry Blossom", etc. ”, “5-19”, “sunfish”, “20-39”, “cherry blossoms & sunfish”, “40-59”, and “fish schools”, “60-99”. There is. Note that since no value has been assigned to "none", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "Special Reach" production mode is selected at the time of a "jackpot", the lighting mode of "bubbles" is 5%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossoms" is 15%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 20%, The lighting mode of "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 20%, the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. is set to be

Therefore, among the lighting modes of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, and 421 that are selected during the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of a "jackpot", the "school of fish" lighting mode is likely to be selected (40%), but the "bubbles" lighting mode is likely to be selected (40%). ”, “cherry blossoms”, “sunfish”, or “cherry blossoms & sunfish” can also be selected.

In this way, by combining the "reach display" effect and the effect on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to suggest to the player the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuating effect in a complex manner, and also By executing the variable performance in the performance device, it is possible to increase the variation of the performance and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is a counter used to randomly determine whether or not the confirmed lamp 311 is lit and the lighting timing in the variable performance of the third symbol.

The value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then in the counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 46) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, a predetermined range is set. (for example, "0 to 99"), and is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99") It becomes. The value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, incremented by 1) each time the main process loops once.

As described above, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives commands related to the variation production of the third symbol (variation pattern command and display type command), the audio lamp control device 113 displays the contents of the variation production (for example, success or failure, production mode, variation element, etc.). ), the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the determined lamp lighting pattern table 222f are referred to, and the lighting status and lighting timing of the determined lamp 311 in the variable performance are determined by lottery (see FIG. 49).

Here, details of the determined lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the determined lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, and when a "big hit" occurs in the fluctuation performance, the audio lamp control device 113 changes the value of the determined lamp timing lottery counter 223e to the value at that time. Based on the determined lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the lighting timing of the determined lamp 311 is determined. In the first embodiment, when the fluctuating performance is a loss, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light up at any timing, while when winning a jackpot in the fluctuating performance, at any timing in the fluctuating performance. The configuration is such that the confirmation lamp 311 always lights up. Note that even in the case of winning a jackpot, the configuration may be such that there is a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the variation performance of each special symbol is divided into "loss" and "jackpot" cases. Then, the divided groups are further divided by performance mode, and among them, the timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" during the execution of the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", "pseudo fluctuation" The timing of "reach formation to before development" during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach" from the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" The value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e corresponding to the timing of “after development to before re-variation” being executed, the timing of “re-variation to confirmation” during the execution of the variable element of “re-variation” or when the symbol is confirmed. are allocated to each.

Specifically, at the time of a jackpot, they are divided into groups for the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode. Then, in the divided groups, for each lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "from reach formation to before development," "after development to before re-variation," and "from re-variation to finalization." Possible values of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other. In addition, since the confirmation lamp 311 is configured so that it cannot be lit at the time of "losing" of the variable production, the lighting timing "None" is set for all production modes that can be selected at the time of "losing". All possible values of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other.

In the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated only with "re-variation to confirmation" in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "big hit", and the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "from the start of variation to the end of high-speed variation". ”, “From reach formation to before development”, and “After development to before re-variation”, the value of the confirmed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is not assigned.

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "jackpot" is "0 to 99" for "revariation - confirmed", It becomes. Note that values are not assigned to "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-variation", so they are written as "-".

In other words, when the "Normal reach" performance mode is selected at the time of "Jackpot", the lighting timing of "Re-variation ~ Confirmation", which is just before the end of the fluctuation performance, is set to be selected at a rate of 100%. , The lighting timings of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-variation" during the fluctuation performance are set to be selected at a rate of 0%. has been done.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "Normal Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot", the lighting timing of "Revariation ~ Confirmation" is selected without exception (100%), and other lighting timings are selected (100%). The setting is such that the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit.

In the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "Super Reach" performance mode at the time of "Jackpot" includes "From the start of variation to the end of high-speed variation", "From formation of reach to before development", "After development to before re-variation", and The values of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are respectively associated with "revariation - confirmed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "Super Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is "0" for "From the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation". -9', '10-29' for 'Reach formation - before development', '30-59' for 'After development - before re-variation', '60-59' for 'Re-variation - confirmed'. 99”.

In other words, if the "Super Reach" production mode is selected during a "Jackpot", the lighting timing from "start of fluctuation to end of high speed fluctuation" is 10%, and the lighting timing from "reach formation to before development" is 20%. , the lighting timing of "after development to before re-variation" is selected at a rate of 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-variation to finalization" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of "jackpot", the lighting timing of "re-variation ~ confirmation", which is the last part of the variation production, is likely to be selected (40%). However, it is configured such that "from the start of variation to the end of high-speed variation", "from reach formation to before development", or "after development to before re-variation" can also be selected.

In the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "Special Reach" performance mode at the time of "Jackpot" includes "From the start of variation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "From formation of reach to before development", "After development to before re-variation", and The values of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are respectively associated with "revariation - confirmed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is "0" for "From the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation". ~19'', ``20~39'' for ``reach formation ~ before development'', ``40~69'' for ``after development ~ before re-variation'', and ``70~69'' for ``re-variation ~ confirmed''. 99”.

In other words, if the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is selected, the lighting timing from "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation" is 20%, and the lighting timing from "reach formation to before development" is 20%. , the lighting timing of "after development to before re-variation" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-variation to finalization" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected during the "Special Reach" production mode at the time of "Jackpot" is the lighting timing of "After development - before re-variation" or "Re-variation - confirmation" which is the latter half of the fluctuation production. is more likely to be selected (30%), but the first half of the variation effect, ``start of variation to end of high-speed variation'' or ``reach formation to before development'' is also configured to be more likely to be selected than the ``super reach'' production mode. be done.

In this way, when winning a jackpot in a fluctuating performance, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at various timings to suggest to the player that a jackpot will occur, thereby creating a surprising game and improving the game. You can improve your interest.

Further, the lottery regarding the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and the lottery regarding the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are performed separately. Therefore, depending on each lottery result, a pattern in which the confirmed lamp 311 lights up and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 lights up, the confirmed lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are both lit, the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit and the first decorative pattern group 421, It is configured such that there is a pattern in which the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 lights up. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily calculate the jackpot expectation level for each performance, and to facilitate the design of game specifications.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The first pending information storage area 223f contains information for performing a variable performance of the first special symbol being held, that is, information obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon starting winning in the main control device 110, and a pending ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 regarding the variable performance of the first special symbol transmitted by.

The audio lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to determine the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is configured to perform a performance.

The second pending information storage area 223g contains information for performing a variable performance of the second special symbol being held, that is, information obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon starting winning in the main control device 110, and the held ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 regarding the variable performance of the second different symbol transmitted by.

The audio lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223g and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to control the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223h contains information on the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed on the drum display device 81, that is, information obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon starting winning in the main control device 110 and held. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pitch number command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable effect, it stores the above-mentioned first pending information in order to execute the setting of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Information for performing variable effects (counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. ) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223h.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, details of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223f has four areas, first to fourth areas for storing first pending information. Each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223g has four areas, first to fourth areas for second pending information storage, like the first pending information storage area 223f. Each of the second pending information storage first to fourth areas includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223g4 where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, the execution information storage area 223h includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently executing first special symbol or second special symbol variation effect is stored, and a jackpot type counter. A jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored. 223h4 is provided at least.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. In addition, the first pending information storage first area is an area corresponding to the variable presentation of the first special symbol that is held first in terms of time among the variable presentations of the held first special symbol, and the first area that stores the first pending information The second information storage area is an area corresponding to the second-oldest variation performance of the first reserved special symbol in terms of time among the variation performances of the first reserved special symbol, and the first reservation information storage area 3 The area corresponds to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is the third oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the reserved first special symbol, and the fourth area for storing the first reservation information is This area corresponds to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is the fourth oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that have been held. Furthermore, the second pending information storage first area is an area corresponding to the variable presentation of the second special symbol that is held first in time among the variable presentations of the second reserved special symbol, and The second information storage area is an area corresponding to the second-oldest variation presentation of the second special symbol in terms of time among the variation presentations of the second special symbol that has been reserved, and the second area that stores the second pending information The area corresponds to the variation performance of the second special symbol that was held third oldest among the fluctuation performances of the second special symbol that was held, and the fourth area that stores the second hold information is This area corresponds to the variation performance of the second special symbol which is the fourth oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that have been held.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number of reserved balls command from the main control device 110, it inputs each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the corresponding special symbol. is extracted from the number of reserved pitches command. The audio lamp control device 113 then sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the corresponding first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or second pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, 223g1, jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, 223g2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, 223g3, fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. , 223g4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command is X (1≦X≦4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol that is reserved at that time The number of fluctuating effects of the symbol is X, and the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 included in the held ball number command are the number of fluctuating effects of the suspended first special symbol that are held Xth in time. Since this corresponds to the variation performance of the first special symbol, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the Xth area for storing first pending information are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number of reserved balls command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area X of the main control device 110 are stored in the first pending information storage area X.

On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a variation effect from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 stores the information in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. A process of shifting the information stored in the execution information storage area 223h is executed. In other words, if there is reservation information regarding the second special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that was reserved first in terms of time is started, so the second special symbol that was reserved first The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area corresponding to the variable production are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable production currently being executed. to each of the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4. On the other hand, if there is no pending information regarding the second special symbol and only pending information regarding the first special symbol exists, execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol that is suspended first in terms of time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol that was held first are currently It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable performance being executed.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first second pending information storage area, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third second pending information storage area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing first pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first area for storing first pending information, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing 1 pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing 1st pending information, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third first pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110. Further, the first holding information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second holding information storage areas 1 to 4 have the first holding ball storage areas 203d of the main control device 110, the first holding ball storage areas 1 to 4, respectively. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding ball storage area 203e and the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the audio lamp control device 113, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the fluctuating effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are being executed and on hold in the main control device 110 is stored in the execution information storage area. 223h, the first pending information storage area 223f, and the second pending information storage area 223g.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when pre-reading processing (not shown) is performed, the reserved first special symbol and second special symbol are retrieved from the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c. Understand the number of fluctuating performances (number of pending pitches). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved in the first to fourth areas for storing first reserved information and the first to fourth areas for storing second reserved information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating time, etc. For example, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c is "0", the number of reserved balls of the variable production of the first special symbol is Since the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol fluctuation performance is 0 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read in advance for the first reservation information storage first area, and the judgment is made. I do. Further, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls of the variable production of the first special symbol is 0 times, and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol's variable performance is 4, so the values of the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 are pre-read in the fourth area for storing the second reserved information, and the judgment is made. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 is configured to access the RAM 203, etc. of the main controller 110. I can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 provides a first reservation information storage area 223f and a second reservation information storage area 223g to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol reserved in the main control device 110. Since each counter C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the performance is also stored in the audio lamp control device 113, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f and the second pending information storage area 223g By referring to , the audio lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process. In other words, when the variable effect of the suspended first special symbol and/or second special symbol is executed, what will be the result of the variable effect (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will happen to the variable time? etc.) can be determined before executing the variable effects to determine the execution of various effects.

Note that the above-mentioned shift processing in the first holding information storage area 223f or the second holding information storage area 223g and the execution information storage area 223h is based on the number of held balls (variable pattern Based on the values of the sub-first held ball number counter 223b and the sub-second held ball number counter 223c before updating based on the reception of the command and the stop type command, the first holding information storage areas 1 to 4 are Data is moved (shifted) only in the area corresponding to the pending variable performance among the first to fourth second pending information storage areas.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-first pending pitch counter 223b before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first pending information storage area 223f (first pending information storage Assume that data is stored in the first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, the data in the second pending information storage area is shifted to the first pending information storage area, and the data in the first pending information storage area 223h is shifted to the first pending information storage area 223h. The data in the third area for storage is shifted to the second area for storing first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing first pending information.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first held ball counter 223b before update when receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command is "2", the data in the first holding information storage first area is transferred to the execution information storage area. 223h, the data in the second area for storing first pending information is shifted to the first area for storing first pending information, and the shifting of the data is completed. As described above, in this embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first pending information storage third and fourth areas in which no variable effects are pending, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first pending information storage area 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage area 1 to 4 is stored in an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223h or It may be configured to shift to the first to third areas for storing first pending information or the first to third areas for storing second pending information, respectively. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (withheld) in each of the first to fourth pending information storage areas or the first to fourth areas to store second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the special symbol variation performance and continuous notice performance on the drum display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, during execution of the fluctuating performance, lighting control of various lamps 311, etc. on the lamp display device 227 is executed, and further, audio output control from the audio output device 226 is executed in accordance with the progress of the fluctuating performance. .

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 44. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and main processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is started by inputting a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in this embodiment, “1 second”) is performed. (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 26) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the previous power-off did not end normally, so in this case, the process moves to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S116 in such a case.

Note that, as will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 39, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S107: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503: OFF and the setting key 501: ON were operated when the power was turned on. In order to start up the setting confirmation mode in the "setting confirmation mode," first, the probability display device (not shown) starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off. (S111), the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is ended (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is ended, and the process moves to S113. . In addition, in the processing of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing shifts to S113 in order to start up the startup mode in "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value and set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then an interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process moves to main processing (see FIG. 39), which will be described later.

The setting value command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in external output processing of the timer interrupt processing (see S201 in FIG. 40), which will be described later. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to, upon receiving this setting value command, store the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a memory provided in the RAM 223 for storing probability setting values.

On the other hand, in the process of S104, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), select whether to start the startup mode in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process moves to S116 in order to start up the start-up mode in "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, initialization process of the RAM 203 (S116, S117) is executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, such as when the hall starts operating, the power is turned on while holding down the RAM erase switch 503. Ru. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, if the power-off occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 processing (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserved ball counter 203a) is stored in the RAM 203. (clear to "0", etc.) (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S113.

On the other hand, in the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to change the startup mode to "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is "setting change mode", and it accepts changes (updates) of probability setting values from hall personnel etc. and confirms them. This is the process.

In this setting change process (S118), first, a probability display device (not shown) is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process moves to S122. This setting to start displaying the probability setting value causes the probability display device to start displaying the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may not be the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, but may always be fixed to a specific value. That is, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. The probability setting value may be "4", or may be "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. Thereby, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off, the hall personnel etc. can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode," the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. Thereby, the hall personnel etc. can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

In addition, when the startup mode becomes "setting change mode", if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is "3" or more, the probability setting value will be changed to "3" on the probability display device. ", and if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than "3", the display will start with the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. You may also do so. For example, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value a little (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it was set before the power was turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and if the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is updated by "1". 1”. Therefore, for example, if it is desired to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", the probability setting value must be changed almost once by repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. On the other hand, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability setting value as "3", the probability setting value can be set while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is determined whether the probability setting value is not within a predetermined range, that is, it is an abnormal probability setting value. If so (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process moves to S124. This initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or it may be "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, it may be "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing in S122 (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the processing in S123 is performed. is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, whereas if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability The set value is updated (S126) and the process returns to S122.

In updating the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is "6". ”, the probability setting value is returned to “1”. The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop process of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on in the process of S124 (S124: Yes). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on through the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. is determined (S127), and a jackpot random number table 202a is set according to the probability setting value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the switch is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the process in S129 (S129: No), the process in S129 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the process in S129 (S129: Yes), the end of displaying the probability setting value on the probability display device is set (S130), and this setting change process is performed. (S118) ends.

Note that after the setting change process is finished, the process returns to the startup process (see FIG. 37), moves to S116, executes the RAM 203 initialization process (S116, S117), and erases (clears) the data in the RAM 203. . In this way, by having the hall personnel etc. turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the process of S124 and confirming the probability setting value, the hall personnel etc. are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter. can be done.

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting that the setting key 501 is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999", "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the timer interrupt process S207 (see FIG. 40) described later (S153), and the process moves to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, opening and closing of the jackpot 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83 is controlled. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the variable display on the special symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process will vary depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at the time.

The processes of S152 and S153 described above, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated in the same way. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the common symbol random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. It can have randomness.

In the process of S151, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. In FIG. 44, since the NMI interrupt process described later has been executed, the process at power-off after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S151 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes in S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the timing when various settings by timer interrupt processing are completed and the updates of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed. . Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting process (S101). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S151. As a result, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, external output processing is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected The signal is output to an external output terminal board (not shown), etc. In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device), and the above-mentioned signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process is executed to execute the process when each special symbol wins ( S203).

After S203, next, a normal electric utility control process is executed to execute a drive control process for the normal electric utility 64c (S204). To briefly explain, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 83 on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " ○" symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electric symbol 64c is kept open for a predetermined period of time, while if a losing symbol of a normal symbol (for example, an "x" symbol) appears, the ordinary electric symbol 64c is opened. remain closed.

After the process of S204, the process of reading various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and stores detection information (winning detection information). Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value is The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number per common pattern counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per common pattern are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (first implementation). In the format, when they reach "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99" respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per common figure completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is converted into the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per common figure. The initial value is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, a starting winning process associated with winning the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b is executed (S208). The details of this starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, a gate passing process is executed to determine whether or not the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passing process (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is While being stored in a reserved ball storage area (not shown), the number of reserved symbols in a variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the regular symbol retaining lamp 84.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and the third A special symbol variation process is executed to set a symbol variation pattern, etc. (S210). In addition, the details of the special figure variation process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), the validity of the normal symbol is determined, and the normal symbol is a setting process for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 based on the determination result. Figure variation processing is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the winning probability of the normal pattern is either high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10). Then, a variable display of normal symbols is performed based on the result of validity, and a display result corresponding to the result of validity is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), execute the firing control process (S212), and further execute other processes that should be executed periodically (S213), and end this timer interrupt process. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to launch the ball on or off. Then, when the ball launch is on, in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, information on the ball launch signal is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although we have explained the case where the timer interrupt processing is executed, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. . For example, in this embodiment, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormal signal reading process (S202), the winning process (S203), the normal power control process (S204), and the switch reading process (S205) that are executed in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment. ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of in the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for this changes, even with this configuration, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41, the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S208).

In the starting winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if there has been a winning, the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is determined as the winning prize. A process of storing (holding) the ball in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the ports 64a and 64b is executed. It also executes a process for transmitting the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this starting prize winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting hole 64a (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special chart 1 ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the first starting port 64a (winning), which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40), , the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the first starting hole 64a (there is a starting prize) (S301: Yes), the value of the first held ball counter 203a (the number held in the main controller 110) is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N1) for dynamic display of one special symbol (fluctuating effect) is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number of pending balls N1 is not 4 (S302: No), this starting prize winning process (S208) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) Return to

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N1<4 (S302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a (number of active pending balls N1) (S303). This time, since the prize is to be won in the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each random value C1 to C3, CS1 (S304), and processing is performed. The process moves to S309.

In the process of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S305). Here, similar to the first starting port 64a, a special figure 2 ball entrance switch (not shown) is used to detect the ball entering the second starting port 64b (winning), which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40). Based on the output signal of (1), the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S305: Yes), the value of the second held ball counter 203b (the number held in the main controller 110) is determined. 2) It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N2) for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S306). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 64b (S305: No), or if there is a winning to the second starting port 64b but the number of pending balls N2<4 (S306: No), this The start winning process (S208) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N2<4 (S306: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (number of active pending balls N2) (S307). This time, since the prize is to be won in the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S308), and processing is performed. The process moves to S309.

In the process of S309, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27), and set as a storage destination in S304 or S308. The first reserved ball storage area 203d is the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the fluctuation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first pending ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S309). In addition, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and stoppage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are performed. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S309).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S304 based on winning to the first starting port 64a, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the process of S303 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first storage area. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved pitch counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area. , CS1 are held.

Further, for example, in the process of S308 based on winning to the second starting port 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition in the process of S307. If is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second storage first area. Further, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If so, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation third area, and if the value of the second reservation pitch counter 203b after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area. , CS1 are held.

Next, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or active held ball number N2) after addition by the process of S303 or S307, and the first Speak a command for the number of held balls containing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the command for the number of held balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S310 is finished, this starting prize winning process (S208) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Note that the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 to be included in the held pitch count command in the process of S310 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S309, or the values of the first held pitches in the process of S309 may be used. You may use the read value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

In addition, in the processing of S301 and S305, if the ball wins in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b at the same time, the winning process of the ball in the first starting port 64a is executed with priority, and The system waits for the winning process of the ball entering the opening 64b, and executes the winning process of the ball entering the waiting starting opening 64b in the starting winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) is to control the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variable performance performed on the drum display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S401). During a jackpot, during a jackpot game that is displayed on the drum display device 81 and special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of a jackpot game (i.e., jackpot opening), and during a jackpot game. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S401, if any of the special symbols is hitting the jackpot (S401: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S210) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S401, if it is determined that there is no jackpot (S401: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S402), and the special symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not dynamically displayed (S402: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Thereby, the stopped symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation performance) are displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the stopped symbols can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S403, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved pitch counter 203b (the value of the second special pitch reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N2) for dynamic display (fluctuating performance) related to symbols is greater than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second held ball counter 203b (active held ball number N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second held ball counter 203b (number of active held balls N2) is subtracted by 1 (S405). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (fluctuating effects) related to the second special symbol that has been suspended is started by the variation start process (S410) to be described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift processing (S406) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 2 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted, such as the third area.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the second held ball counter 203b (operating held ball number N2) is "0" (S404: No), then the first held ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value (number N1 of operation pending balls of dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first held ball counter 203a (active held ball number N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first held ball counter 203a (actual held ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S408). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) among the dynamic displays (fluctuating effects) related to the first special symbol that has been held is started by the movement start process (S410) described later, so the held ball This is because the number decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted, such as the third area.

After the data shift process in S406 or S409, a fluctuation start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the held ball execution area 203f by the data shift process ( S410), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Note that the fluctuation start process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In the process of S407, if it is determined that the value of the first held ball counter 203a (operating held ball number N1) is "0" (S407: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the drum display device 81, etc. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S411). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or activated The period until any value of the number of reserved pitches (N2) is determined to be greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S411: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays a demonstration effect on the drum display device 81 or the like based on the reception of the display demo command. control to display.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is no held ball when a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation performance is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demonstration performance is displayed on the drum display device 81.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S411 that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time period longer than the predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped is performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S412 when the second predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Thereby, when there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration performance immediately.

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S402: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S413 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If (variable time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display on the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the special LED group 37b( That is, a display mode is set in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S413: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S415). The stop symbols are set in advance by a variation start process (S410) which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S410), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type counter The symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined by the value of C2.

In the first embodiment, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit up, and when the judgment result is a jackpot, each LED is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. The LED group is displayed by lighting.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop symbol of the variable performance on the drum display device 81 is synchronized with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. In order to confirm the display, a confirmation command is set (S416), and the process moves to S417. The confirmation command is a command for causing the drum display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the fluctuating performance of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a determined manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S417, in order to determine whether or not the system is in the "time saving state", it is determined whether the value of a time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S417).

In the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), it is a "time saving state" and in that state, any one of the special symbols is dynamically displayed (fluctuation effect) once. Since it has ended, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S418), this special symbol fluctuation process (S210) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S417: No), it is not the "time saving state" but the "normal gaming state" or the "probability fluctuation state", so the process of S418 is skipped, this special figure variation process (S210) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation start process (S410) which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S410). This fluctuation start processing (S410) is based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the gaming state, and performs a jackpot or loss lottery (jackpot lottery) according to the gaming state, and also draws special symbols. The dynamic display performed on the display device 37 and the drum display device 81 and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the variable performance are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state" (S501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the state is not a "probability fluctuation state" (S501: No), the gaming state is a "normal gaming state" or a "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state. Therefore, a jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 28(a)) for the low probability state is set (S502), and the process moves to S504. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, so a jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503), The process moves to S504.

In the process of S504, a jackpot lottery (win/fail determination) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S502 or S503. ) processing is performed (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. The determination is made based on the relationship between the game mode and the game state (mode) at the time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal low probability state ("normal gaming state" or "time reduction state"), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value is 50/10,000 for the value "1" and 60/10,000 for the set value "6". Furthermore, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot probability is set to 500/10000 with the setting value “1”. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "6" is 600/10000.

In the process of S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the processing in S504, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S504: Yes), then the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 28(b)) and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f are The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the value of (S505).

In this process, after the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, the special jackpot type until the next jackpot is set. The symbol becomes a high-probability state and the winning assistance function continues, which is a "10R variable jackpot" that moves to a "probability fluctuation state," or after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the special symbol remains a high-probability state until the next jackpot. Either the "5R fixed variable jackpot" where the winning assistance function continues, or the "10R regular jackpot" where the special symbol is in a low probability state but the winning assistance function is valid until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10. It is determined whether it is a jackpot or not. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of a jackpot on the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the held ball execution area 203f determines whether the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e. If the data is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) and shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f, The jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. In addition, if the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f and the jackpot The jackpot type is determined based on the type table 202b.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S506), and the process moves to S509. Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 perform the performance based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. A mode is selected, and a dynamic time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) is determined from among the selected effect modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the process of S457, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the performance mode is associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. Select. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected performance mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S504 that it is not a jackpot (S504: No), a display mode for a loss is set (S507). In the process of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved ball number counter are set. Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball counter 203b and the current gaming state, the performance mode displayed on the drum display device 81 is "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, "non-reach (normal )”, “Normal Reach”, “Super Reach”, or “Special Reach”. In the first embodiment, a stop pattern corresponding to each performance mode is provided depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state", a "probability fluctuation state", or a "time reduction state". The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the selection counter C3 is different.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss is determined (S508), and the process moves to S509. In the process of S508, the variable time until the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 stop displaying a losing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (performance mode) at the time of loss determined in the process of S507, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a loss are judged and determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. This makes it possible to standardize programs and reduce development man-hours during development.

In the processing of S509, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the processing of S506 and S508, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S509). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery and the jackpot is a "10R guaranteed variable jackpot" and the variable pattern of "25 seconds" "super reach" is selected, the jackpot/" Variation pattern commands are set that indicate "10R Probable Variable Jackpot" and "Super Reach" of "25 seconds". In addition, if you lose the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of "25 seconds" "Super Reach" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the loss/"25 seconds" "Super Reach" will be set. .

In this way, even if the variable effects have the same variation time, by setting the appropriateness of the variable effect and the general content of the variation pattern in the variable pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the effect mode including the appropriateness. By understanding the contents and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation performance in more detail based on that information.

In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S505 or S507 (S510), and the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 42) ) Return to

Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is a "10R surefire jackpot", without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, the "7" symbol, etc.), A stop type command is set that indicates a "10R guaranteed strange jackpot". In addition, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "10R normal jackpot", you can say "10R normal jackpot" without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol, etc.). Set a stop type command to indicate that

On the other hand, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Super Reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "Super Reach" production mode. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected, the "Normal Reach" effect at the time of loss without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "737", etc.) ” Set a stop type command that indicates the production mode. Furthermore, if you do not win the jackpot and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "non-reach" production mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect and Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stopping result of the variable effect in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are processed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40) that is executed next. A command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of the NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power outage or the like occurs. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110.

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 45) that is started upon power-on, and a main process (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S1116 (see Figure 46). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1116. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1116 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process moves to S1008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process moves to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off process in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process moves to S1008.

In addition, in the processing of S1002, if the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1116. The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the drum display device 81 or the like. You can.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 46). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), the interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process moves to S1012. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1004 to S1006 and then S1008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process moves to S1012.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S1008 from S1004 via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a set value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the set value command is received (S1012: No). When a set value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the RAM 223, and the process moves to the main process (see FIG. 46).

In this way, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 46) is executed until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability setting value set by the main control device 110, and can execute the processing subsequent to the main processing based on the probability setting value. In addition, if the setting value command is not received from the main controller 110, the final stage of the startup process of the main controller 110 has not been reached and the startup process of the main controller 110 has not been completed normally, so the The startup process of the lamp control device 113 is also not terminated normally, and the transition to the main process is not made. With this configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the start-up process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and also to check whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the audio lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a state where the audio lamp control device 113 is not in use.

Note that in the process of S1012, a process of waiting until a set value command is received from the main controller 110 is performed, but in this case, due to a momentary power outage (so-called instantaneous power outage), only the audio lamp controller 113 If the power is turned off and the main control device 110 continues to be powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 will repeatedly execute the process of S1012, and there is a possibility that it will not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, if a set value command is not received from the main controller 110 for a predetermined period, the audio lamp control device 113 is placed in a safe mode in which control regarding the set value is not executed and other controls are started. It may also be configured to launch.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not, whereas S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable effect process of S1110 This is because the command determination process in S1111 is a process that is preferably executed in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the process in S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive a command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1110 in a short cycle, the command determination process Based on the command received by the user, settings regarding the variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was previously executed (S1101: Yes), the process moves to S1102. Note that if the process in S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 45, the process directly advances to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107, which will be described later (S1103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without providing notification through this power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot performance process is performed to execute a performance related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111, which will be described later (S1105), and the process moves to S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the period of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation", a process to change the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. A stage change command is set for the device 114. By including information regarding the presentation mode corresponding to the changed stage in this stage change command, the display control device 114 performs a process of changing the presentation mode to a presentation mode corresponding to the stage executed on the drum display device 81. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation performance, pressing the frame button 22 will display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, and pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display" will display the expectation of a jackpot. The effect may be changed to a more appealing effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of a plurality of ready-to-reach effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (S1106) is finished, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, or the lighting process of the final lamp 311 is changed to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81. etc. are set. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After the process of S1108, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process moves to S1110. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable presentation performed on the drum display device 81 is set based on a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process in S1108 is also performed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed on the drum display device 81. executed.

In the process of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the drum display device 81, a variable effect process is executed, which is a process for starting a variable effect based on the variable pattern command and stop type command received from the main controller 110. do. Details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the fluctuation effect processing, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1111), and the process moves to S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters such as the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are incremented by 1). 223e are cleared to "0" when both reach "99").

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d updated here is used to select whether or not to perform the effect (lighting) on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 during the variable effect, and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e It is used to select whether or not to turn on the final lamp 311 (lighting timing) during a variable performance.

When the process of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display on the drum display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed, and the main control device 110 reads out and analyzes the first command received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S1202). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), a variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used as a display variation pattern to notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later. Used when setting commands. Thereafter, this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1204). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when setting a display stop type command to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later. used for. Thereafter, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set on (S1206), this command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

In addition, the stop type command is used to indicate the stop type of the fluctuating performance for which the fluctuating pattern was indicated by the fluctuating pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the fluctuating pattern command when starting the fluctuating performance. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a on in the process of S1206, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 48) executed later, the values of the counters C1, etc. included in the held pitch count command are first extracted. A determination is made as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect that was received matches the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command. Also, whether or not the stop type of the variable effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the number of held pitches command matches the stop type of the variable effect extracted from the received stop type command. Make a judgment. As a result of these determinations, in the first variation effect, if the variation pattern based on the number of held balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of held balls command If the stop type does not match the stop type, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

As a result of the process in S1204, if it is determined that a stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for causing the drum display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed. If it is determined that this confirmed command has been received (S1207: Yes), a confirmed command for display is set (S1208), this command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). .

The display fixed pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 46). Ru. The display control device 114 performs display control so that the variable display of the third symbol is displayed in a fixed manner on the drum display device 81 at the fixed timing indicated by this display fixed pattern command.

As a result of the processing in S1207, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved pitch count command has been received (S1209). If it is determined that the held pitch number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the first held pitch number counter 203a and/or the second held pitch number counter 203b of the main controller 110 included in the held pitch number command ( (see FIG. 26) (i.e., the number of balls held in the variable performance of the first special symbol and/or second special symbol held in the main control device 110), and extracts the value of It is stored in the first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c (S1210). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are also included in the held ball number command, are transferred to the sub-first held ball number counter 223b updated in S1210. Or, the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second pending ball counter 223c, or the second pending information storage area 1 of the second pending information storage area 223g. - stored in the fourth area (S1211), ends this command determination process (S1111), and returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

Here, the held ball count command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, so it is sent every time there is a starting prize. , S1212, the value of the sub-first held ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second held ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the sub-first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the reserved pitch counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of the sub-first held ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second held ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may change from the values of the first held ball number counter 203a and/or of the main controller 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second held ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub-first held ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second held ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of starting winning detection. , the value of the first held ball number counter 203a and/or the second held ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 can be adjusted.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform prefetch processing by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. There is. That is, if the suspended variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. It is possible to decide on the execution of various effects.

As a result of the processing in S1209, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S1209: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1212), and this command determination processing (S1111) is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). Here, if the received other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the received command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is A command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command through the process of S1212, is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then is output as a command for main processing. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114 through the process (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110). This variable effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46), and various processes for causing the drum display device 81 to perform a variable effect are executed.

In the fluctuation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, off) (S1401: No), this means that at least a stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation production The process (S1110) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off in order to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402), Next, it is determined whether the variable performance to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of the determination, if it is a variable performance related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data included in the first pending information storage area provided in the first pending information storage area 223f is transferred to the execution information storage area 223h. (S1404), and further shifts the data included in the first pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the first pending information storage area 223f to the first pending information storage areas 1 to 3. (S1405), the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (S1406), and the process moves to S1410.

In other words, in this case, the variable performance of the first special symbol that was held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that was held first in terms of time is started, so the first special symbol that is held is The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information first area corresponding to the fluctuating performance that has been performed are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the fluctuating performance that is being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing first pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first area for storing first pending information. , moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area to the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth area for storing first pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing first pending information.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same value as each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the first holding information storage first - The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored in the ~fourth areas, respectively. become.

On the other hand, in the process of S1403, if it is determined that it is not a variable performance related to the first special symbol, that is, if it is determined that it is a variable performance related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second pending information storage area The data included in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407), and the data included in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h. - Shift the data included in the fourth area to the second reservation information storage first to third areas (S1408), subtract 1 from the value of the sub-second reservation pitch counter 223c (S1409), and proceed to S1410. Transition.

In other words, in this case, the variable performance of the second special symbol that was held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance of the second special symbol that was held first in terms of time is started, so the first held The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information first area corresponding to the variable effect that has been executed are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable effect that is being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first area of the second pending information storage. , moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area to the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the fourth area for storing second pending information are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third area for storing second pending information.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same value as each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the second holding information storage first - The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 are stored in the ~fourth areas, respectively. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, a variation pattern of a variation effect to be executed from now is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1410). Thereafter, in order to display a variable effect on the drum display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). Ru. The display control device 114 starts display control of the variable effect so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the drum display device 81 in accordance with the variable pattern indicated by this display variable pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, the stop type of the variable performance to be executed from now is acquired based on the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1412). Thereafter, a display stop type command is set based on the obtained stop type of the variable effect (S1413), and the process moves to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). Ru. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when permanently displaying the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1411. do.

In the process of S1414, a final lamp lighting setting process is performed to determine whether or not to light the final lamp 311 and its lighting timing in the currently executed variable effect (S1414), and the process moves to S1415. Note that this confirmed lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In the process of S1415, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern of the rear light guide plate 420 is selected in the variable performance executed this time. A light guide pattern setting process is performed to set whether or not to light up the group 421 (S1415), and then this variation effect process (S1110) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). Note that this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the confirmed lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this confirmed lamp lighting setting process (S1414). This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed in the variable effect process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable effect to be executed from now on, and if a jackpot occurs, It is determined at which timing of the fluctuation performance the confirmation lamp 311 is to be lit.

In the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable performance stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a jackpot will not occur (S1501: No), the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on, this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is ended, and the process proceeds to the fluctuation effect process (see FIG. 48). return.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur (S1501: Yes), execution is performed with reference to the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see FIG. 35) according to the value of the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e. The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable performance to be performed is set (S1502), and the process moves to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs based on the jackpot won this time (S1503). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" occurs (S1503: Yes), at the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 is long (for example, " 10 seconds) is set to be performed in a long lighting pattern (S1504), this final lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is ended, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur based on the jackpot won this time, that is, if the jackpot in which the "time reduction state" occurs has been won (S1503: No ), at the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502, it is set that the confirmation lamp 311 is to be lit in a short lighting pattern (for example, "2 seconds") (S1505), and this confirmation lamp lighting is performed. The setting process (S1414) is ended and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

Note that if the lighting time of the confirmed lamp 311 set in the process of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the variable time of the variable effect being executed, for example, when the variable effect is confirmed, execution of the long lighting pattern may be started. In such a case, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the variable effect is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be brought forward from the initially set timing (for example, by 10 seconds from the time of confirmation). It may be configured to start from the timing "before"). Furthermore, the short lighting pattern may be turned on even if the "probability fluctuation state" is won.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in a fluctuating performance, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to indicate to the player that a jackpot will occur at various timings of the fluctuating performance, thereby providing an unexpected game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by changing the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 according to the type of jackpot won, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations and suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed during the variation effect process (see FIG. 48), and determines whether each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. Various processes for determination are executed, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, a process for changing the lighting area of the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed.

In the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), first, in the variable performance to be executed from now on, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or It is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 has been won (S1601). This determination is made by referring to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and whether or not the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit in the variable performance to be executed. will be drawn by lottery.

In the process of S1601, the execution lottery of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is not won. If it is determined that (S1601: No), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is ended and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if the first decorative pattern group 421, second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, or fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has been won in the lottery, ( S1601: Yes), next, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be lit are determined (S1602).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the bubble group pattern that is the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Bubble"), a "reach display" is formed in the variable effect. (i.e., at the end of the variable element of "low speed variation" and at the start of the variable element of "normal reach"; the same applies hereinafter), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are set to "blue". The light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is then set to turn on (S1603), and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the cherry blossom snowstorm pattern that is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "cherry blossoms"), a "reach display" is formed in the variable effect. At this timing, among the front lower LEDs 414c, the right and left end front lower LEDs 414c are set to light up in "pink" (S1604), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is finished, and the fluctuation effect process is started. Return to (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the sunfish pattern that is the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Sunfish"), the timing at which the "reach display" is formed in the variable production Then, among the front lower LEDs 414c, the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right and left ends are set to light up in "green" (S1605), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is finished, and the fluctuation effect process (S1415) is completed. (See FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the cherry blossom snowstorm pattern that is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the sunfish pattern that is the third decorative pattern 412 are selected as lighting targets (S1602: "Sunfish & "Sakura"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect, among the front lower LEDs 414c, the front lower LEDs 414c at the right and left ends are lit in "pink", and the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right and left ends are lit in pink. The LED 414c is set to turn on in "green" (S1606), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is ended, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the fish school pattern that is the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Fish school"), first, at the start of the "reach display", That is, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 lights up when a reach is formed (S1607). This determination is made when the lighting timing and lighting time of the confirmed lamp 311 set in S1502, S1504, and S1505 of the confirmed lamp lighting setting process (see FIG. 49) arrive (overlap) while the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed. This is done by determining whether the As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 does not light up during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 when forming the ready-to-reach (S1607: No), at the timing when the "ready-to-reach display" is formed in the variable production, The rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged in the order of the right region → center region → left region of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each region are arranged from the right side. The light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is completed, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is lit during execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 when forming a reach (S1607: Yes), the timing at which the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect In the state where the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, only the rear lower LED 424 is arranged in the order of right area → center area → left side area of the rear light guide plate 420, and three LEDs 424 provided for each area. are set to light up in red, blue, and green from the right side, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is off, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 are set to turn on from the rear. The three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each area are set to light up in the order of right side area → center area → left side area of the side light guide plate 420, and in "red", "blue", and "green" from the right side. (S1609), ends the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), and returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

In this way, during the execution of the variable effect executed by the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81 are used to control the variable effect. By executing the jackpot expectation degree suggesting performance, it is possible to perform a performance rich in variation and suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, in the drum display device 81, which is different from the liquid crystal display device, which can easily perform additional preview effects, etc., additional preview display can be performed on the front side using the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. Even when the drum display device 81 is used, which makes it difficult to display a preview, it is possible to enrich the performance contents of the variable performance and suitably increase the attention of the game. Furthermore, while the confirmation lamp 311, which has the highest importance in the variable production, is executed, the scale of the production by the first decorative symbol group 421, which has lower importance for the game than the confirmation lamp 311, is reduced and executed, and the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is The lamp 311 is configured to make the effect noticeable. With this configuration, the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

<A: Display multiple display areas by lighting one LED using a diffusion lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 (the same applies to the rear upward diffusion lens 423) includes the left diffusion section 425a and the front diffusion section 425b. A plurality of concave portions formed by the right direction diffusion portion 425c are provided at least by the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 of 1 is transmitted in three directions (i.e., the front direction, The light is diffused in three directions: a direction tilted 20 degrees to the left with respect to the front direction, and a direction tilted 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction. In addition, since the left direction diffusion section 425a, the front direction diffusion section 425b, and the right direction diffusion section 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same width. configured. As a result, by lighting one LED, a plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to each diffused optical path can be made to emit light in the same color, and even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of colors can be produced. By executing the presentation, the presentation effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<B: Designs are placed on the optical path, and designs are also placed where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes a portion where the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “red” light overlap each other (“dark red”), a “red” ” (“light red”), a portion where the “red” and “blue” light paths overlap (“purple”), and “red” (“red”). The area where the optical path of the ``'' light and the optical path of the ``green'' light overlap (``yellow''), the optical path of the ``red'' light, the optical path of the ``blue'' light, and the optical path of the ``green'' light. The area where the optical path of the ``blue'' light and the optical path of the ``blue'' light overlap (``white''), the area where the optical path of the ``blue'' light and the optical path of the ``blue'' light overlap (``dark blue''), and ``blue''. ("light blue"), a portion where the "blue" and "green" light paths overlap ("blue-green"), and "green". There are areas where the optical path of the ``'' light and the optical path of the ``green'' light overlap (``dark green''), and areas where the optical path of the ``green'' light is displayed only (``light green''). Each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged in each overlapping part.

As a result, even in a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap, so that The emitted light color is made different between the non-overlapping part and the overlapping part, and the display is configured to be able to display more colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted light colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be further simplified, and the control burden for controlling the light emission of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of single-color light emitting diodes without using full-color LEDs, cost reductions can be realized by using single-color light-emitting diodes, which are cheaper than full-color LEDs, and The light emission control of the LEDs is further simplified, and the control burden on the LED light emission control can be reduced.

Further, with respect to pattern 1 of the first decorative pattern group 421, it is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of one color in a predetermined part, and overlaps with the optical path of light of another color in a part other than the predetermined part. Place it in That is, by forming one pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 so that the size falls within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, each part of the one pattern has a different luminescent color, and the one pattern can be made into a variety of colors. It can be expressed with different colors.

<C: Moving display & colorful display by sequentially lighting up different LEDs in each horizontal partition area>
Among the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are arranged three each in the right side area, center area, and left side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c located on the rightmost side By sequentially lighting up the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 located in the center, and the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 located on the left side, the first decoration is An effect is performed as if the school of fish, which is the symbol group 421, is swimming from the right side to the left side.

In addition, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are placed on the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the board first decorative symbol group 60a and the board second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By sequentially turning on the lights from 1 to 3, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the 13th game board surface are executed integrally, providing a powerful effect using the entire 13th surface of the game board, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other (lighting method for reducing the fish school display area when lighting the confirmation lamp)>
When the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the production by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed, and the configuration is configured so that the production by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, stands out. . Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width in the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative pattern group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side in front view of the rear light guide plate 420) is not lit or is slightly lit. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

<E: One light guide plate for weak and medium notices, another light guide plate for strong notices>
When configuring a fluctuating performance to be able to execute multiple patterns of effects indicating jackpot expectations, one pattern of effects with low jackpot expectations (i.e., second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413) is configured to be executable. (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while effects with a high expectation of jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on the other light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). By doing this, when performing a performance with a low expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to suppress the lighting display of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot due to noise or the player's viewing angle, etc., and execute a performance without causing discrepancies. be able to.

<F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, the optical path direction of the LED is different for each display object, a few direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multidirectional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) in one light guide plate. 2 directions, bubble group), strong effect in small directions (weak effect in places where light paths overlap)>
On the front light guide plate 410, a fourth decorative pattern group with the lowest jackpot expectation is located in the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). 413, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only in lateral light. In addition, the second decorative pattern group 413 has a higher jackpot expectation in the portions where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed, and the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to be visible only by vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the light in the vertical direction, the vertical light will cause the jackpot to be higher than the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is turned on when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412, which has a high expectation level, is displayed by lighting up, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is displayed by lighting up, Even when the 4 decorative pattern groups 413 are lit and displayed, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be created at an unintended timing. Even if the pachinko machine 10 becomes visible from the front side, discrepancies in performance can be minimized and a game that does not give players a sense of discomfort can be provided.

<G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, the light path direction of the LED is different for each display object, a small direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multidirectional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) in one light guide plate 2 directions, bubble group), small direction is located in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical optical path and the horizontal optical path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). A fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only in horizontal light. In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation level is higher in the portions where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) in the fourth decorative pattern group 413. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are formed higher than the height of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, and are configured to be visible only by vertical light. Furthermore, the rear light guide plate 420 is placed on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). A drum display device 81 is arranged to form the first decorative symbol group 421 and to execute a variable performance of the third symbol, which is the main performance of the game. In this way, in the portions of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper reverse R-shaped portion), the main effects of the game are displayed. By arranging a drum display device 81 that executes a three-symbol fluctuating performance and configuring it to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the performance with the highest expectation of jackpot in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance, which is important as a game, can be realized. It is possible to enhance the performance effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and to increase the degree of attention to the game, while configuring the system so as not to hinder the display results and performances with high expectations for jackpots. can.

<H: One light guide plate with planar shape and R shape, both shapes guide light from the planar shape part (light does not guide from the R shape part)>
In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end surface (part) of the flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420. It is configured so that no light enters from the R-shaped portion (that is, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is attempted to enter from the R-shaped portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the R-shaped portion, and there is a possibility that a desired pattern cannot be illuminated appropriately or may be difficult to illuminate. Furthermore, it is necessary to arrange the LEDs and the like along the shape of the end face of the rounded portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the R-shaped part is formed along the external shape of the performance member such as the drum display device 81 or the movable accessory, and when an LED board or the like is placed on the side of the R-shaped part, the design of the performance member There is a risk that the degree of freedom will be restricted. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having an R-shaped portion, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased by allowing light to enter from the end surface (portion) of one of the flat plate portions. I can do it.

<I: R shape/inverted R shape, 1 preview display is displayed up to the switching point (design display area determination part), no design is placed in the part where the R shape switches>
In the front light guide plate 410, decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, the lower flat plate portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion; It is configured such that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the switching points (regions) with the shape parts. This means that when a decorative pattern is placed at the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped part and the regular R-shaped part, the decorative pattern is placed in the part placed in the regular R-shaped part and in the lower inverted R-shaped part. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to reach the parts properly, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, the player may see the player in an unintended manner. Therefore, by configuring so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the switching point (area) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion, the expression of the pattern to be displayed by light guiding is improved. It is possible to perform the production appropriately and without any discrepancies.

<J: Cover to prevent abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of strong warning light guide plate (slit part of sunfish/foam light guide plate, display area forming member)>
By arranging a lens cut 432 at the vertical position of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 and between the fixed lamp 311, the incident light is diffused by the lens cut 432. It can be made (weakened). Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to the lighting of the respective LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is transmitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incident, it is possible to suppress abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, and 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the first decorative symbol group 421 that has the highest jackpot reliability (expectation level), light enters from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the light from entering the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 is somewhat diffused (weakened), thereby preventing erroneous It is possible to suppress abnormal lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, which has a large production discrepancy when the lighting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

<K:1 light guide plate has strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for weak areas has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
The front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA) like the rear light guide plate 420, and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each light converging The light incident from the first end surfaces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end surfaces in a straight (or almost straight, upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end surface of each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is not diffusely emitted from the second end surface side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, but is condensed. Since the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that you want to display are lit, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 are not lit, and the decorations that you want to display are lit. Only the symbols 411, 412, and 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, when trying to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot reliability, the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and with higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative pattern group 413 Alternatively, if the third decorative pattern 412 lights up, there will be a discrepancy in the content of the performance, and there is a possibility that the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d and 416d to prevent the light directed toward the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, from being diffused, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be displayed at an appropriate timing. This makes it possible to make it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the content of the performance.

<L:1 light guide plate has strong and weak effects, at least the irradiation for strong areas is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, 3-way lens)>
For decorative pattern groups with high jackpot expectations, that is, the third decorative pattern 412, etc., a diffuser lens such as that used for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 is used instead of a condensing lens. You may. The third decorative pattern 412 has a higher expectation of a jackpot than at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player is paying attention to during the game. It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the third decorative pattern 412 by comprehensively irradiating the third decorative pattern 412 with light using a diffusion lens. In addition, when lighting the fourth decorative pattern group 413, if the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, is lit, an inconsistency will occur, but the third decorative pattern 412, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than the third decorative pattern 412, lights up, the player still prefers to execute the third decorative pattern 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation level. , and not so much attention is paid to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a jackpot, so that discrepancies in performance are less likely to occur. Therefore, condensing lenses 415d and 416d are used for the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, and a diffusion lens is used for the third decorative pattern 412, which has a high jackpot expectation. The presentation effect of the light guide plate 410 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<M: Multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusion means>
When a plurality of light guide plates 410, 420 are used to make it possible to execute a plurality of patterns of effects indicating jackpot expectations in variable effects, in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., front light guide plate 410), condensing lenses 414d, 415d, By utilizing 416d, a plurality of types of effects (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be executed individually, and the other light guide plates ( That is, by employing the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in a variety of ways. With this configuration, it is possible to perform effects that are greater than the number of light guide plates 410, 420, and by performing flashy effects on light guide plates that employ diffusion lenses 423, 425, variations in effects can be achieved. This can increase the amount of attention paid to the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a pachinko machine 10 in a second embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 are arranged in a plurality of R-shaped parts along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (i.e., a downward inverted R-shaped part). from the side (upper, lower, right or left) end surface of the flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. It was configured to illuminate each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 by irradiating light.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. Further, the second front lower LED 441 is connected to the second front light guide plate 440 from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped part 440a, which is the only R-shaped part formed at the lower part of the second front light guide plate 440. irradiate the light. Furthermore, the second rear-side downward LED is connected to the second rear-side downward LED from the lower end surface of the second rear-side lower positive R-shaped part 450a, which is the only round-shaped part formed at the lower part of the second rear-side light guide plate 450. It is configured to irradiate light onto the light plate 450.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to a schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 55, for convenience of explanation, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, the second display area forming member 460, and the drum display device 81 that constitute the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment are shown. It is expressed by expanding the interval.

As shown in FIG. 55, the light guiding unit 400 of the second embodiment is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the second display area forming member 460, the second display area forming member 460, the second display area forming member 460, It is composed of a second front light guide plate 440 and a second rear light guide plate 450.

Like the display area forming member 430, the second display area forming member 460 is made of transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate), and is a part of the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is formed into a flat plate shape that is different from (irrelevant to) the outer peripheral shape. Note that it is formed in a shape different from the shapes of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, the second display area forming member 460 is arranged so that three symbols are visible on each reel LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. 4) of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. 2 central openings 461 are formed. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is formed around the periphery of the second central opening 461, and is configured so that the rear side of the second lens cut 462 cannot be seen or is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. There is. Therefore, the second lens cut 462 at the periphery of the second central opening 461 clearly shows the symbol display area and effective line on the drum display device 81 to the player. Further, from the second central opening 461, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 are exposed. It is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, from the lower part of the second lens cut 462 on the lower side, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear side provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 The lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the second front light guide plate 440 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), has a shape different from the outer circumference of the drum display device 81, and has a shape different from the outer circumference of the drum display device 81. A second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a having a shape opposite to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (that is, an R-shaped portion opposite to the R shape that is the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81) and a second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a that is continuous from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. and a second front upper flat plate portion 440b having a shape along the second display area forming member 460.

The second front light guide plate 440 also connects a drum display device 81 and a part of the second rear light guide plate 450, which are arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, to a second display area forming member. 460 is configured to be visible from the second central opening 461.

Further, on the back side of the second front light guide plate 440 (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10), various uneven lens cuts corresponding to the second front upper decorative pattern 442 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 are provided. By lighting up the second front lower LED 441 disposed below the second front light guide plate 440 in front view, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is illuminated. is configured to be displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a second front upper LED (not shown) disposed on the side of the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front is lit. Thereby, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 formed on the back side of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b is configured to be displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Note that a condenser lens is arranged to condense the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiate it onto the end surface of the second front light guide plate 440. Good too.

Here, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second front upper decorative pattern 442 directs light incident from the side direction in front view from the second front upper LED (not shown) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has a shape that can be reflected, and has a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not or does not easily reflect the light incident from the upper direction when viewed from the front by the second front lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second front lower decorative pattern 443 reflects the light incident from the upper direction (vertical up and down direction) when viewed from the front by the second front lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured with a shape (for example, a horizontal groove) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the front side direction from the second front upper LED (not shown) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. has been done. With this configuration, when it is desired to light up the decorative patterns 442 and 443 of the second front light guide plate 440 as appropriate, the direction of the light guided into the second front light guide plate 440 (incidence direction) By configuring the decorative patterns 442 and 443 that can be lit and displayed differently for each of the two front light guide plates 440, the plurality of decorative patterns 442 and 443 can be individually lit and displayed on the second front light guide plate 440. The power of expression on the light plate 440 can be improved, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, a second front lower decorative pattern 443 is disposed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and a second front lower decorative pattern 443 is arranged to display the second front lower decorative pattern 443 by lighting. The light emitting surface of the LED 441 is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Since the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided inside the second front light guide plate 440 is weak, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is not properly lit. There is a possibility that it will not be carried out. Therefore, in order to accurately illuminate and display the second front lower decorative pattern 443 disposed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R shaped part 440a, the end face far from the second front lower inverted R shaped part 440a (i.e. , the upper end face of the second front upper flat plate part 440b), but the end face near the second front lower inverted R shaped part 440a, that is, the second front side from the lower end face of the second front lower inverted R shaped part 440a. The lower LED 441 guides light to the second front lower decorative pattern 443. By configuring in this way, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 can be illuminated and displayed accurately, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the second rear light guide plate 450 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. A second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a having a shape corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (that is, an R shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81); A second rear upper flat plate part 450b is formed continuously and has a shape along the second display area forming member 460 (second front upper flat plate part 440b).

The second rear light guide plate 450 also connects a part of the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the second rear light guide plate 450 to the second central opening of the second display area forming member 460. 461 so that it can be visually recognized.

Further, on the back side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (that is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10), lenses with various concave and convex shapes corresponding to the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are provided. By lighting the second rear lower LED 451 which has been cut and is arranged below the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front, the LED 451 formed on the back side of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a is illuminated. The second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the second rear upper decorative pattern 453 is arranged on the side of the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front. By lighting up an LED (not shown), the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 formed on the back side of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. configured. Note that a condensing lens is arranged to condense the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiate it onto the end surface of the second rear light guide plate 450. may be configured.

Here, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 allows the light incident from the lateral direction when viewed from the front from the second rear upper LED (not shown) to pass through the front of the pachinko machine 10. It has a shape that can be reflected toward the side, and has a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not or makes it difficult to reflect the light incident from the upper direction when viewed from the front by the second rear lower LED 451 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. In addition, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 directs the light incident from the upper direction (vertical up and down direction) when viewed from the front by the second rear lower LED 451 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The shape is such that the light incident from the lateral direction when viewed from the front by the second rear upper LED (not shown) is not or is difficult to be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a horizontal groove). ). With this configuration, when it is desired to light up the decorative patterns 452 and 453 of the second rear light guide plate 450 as appropriate, the direction of the light guided into the second rear light guide plate 450 (incidence direction ), the plurality of decorative patterns 452, 453 can be individually lit and displayed on one second rear light guide plate 450 by configuring the decorative patterns 452, 453 to be displayed by lighting up differently. The expressive power of the light guide plate 450 of No. 1 can be improved, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, a second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is arranged on the back side of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is displayed by lighting. The light emitting surface of the second rear lower LED 451 is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. Since the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided inside the second rear light guide plate 450 is weak, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 lights up. may not be done properly. Therefore, in order to accurately illuminate and display the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 disposed on the back side of the second rear lower regular rounded portion 450a, it is necessary to Not the end face (that is, the upper end face of the second rear upper flat plate part 450b), but the end face near the second rear lower positive R-shaped part 450a, that is, the lower part of the second rear lower positive R-shaped part 450a. Light is guided from the side end surface to the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 by the second rear lower LED 451 . By configuring in this way, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be illuminated and displayed accurately, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are bent in directions away from each other. A predetermined space is provided between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 formed on the rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. A space is formed. With this configuration, even when the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are lit at the same time, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 due to the predetermined space are By forming a predetermined interval between the second rear lower decorative pattern 453, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed so that they can be recognized from each other, and The second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can provide a three-dimensional effect.

In addition, in order to light up the second front lower decorative pattern 443 on the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), a second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is provided with a second front lower decorative pattern 443. By arranging the second lower front side LED 441, it is not necessary to arrange the lighting LED on the extension of the second front upper flat plate part 440b of the second front side light guide plate 440, so the restrictions regarding the arrangement of the LEDs are relaxed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and has the same effects.

<Third Embodiment> Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment employing the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is guided (irradiated) into the front light guide plate 410 through the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d. ), the light from the LEDs 422c and 424 is guided (irradiated) into the rear light guide plate 420 through the diffusion lenses 423 and 425, and the light guide plates 410 and 420 of 1 are The same type of lens was used for this. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a diffusion lens 473 and condensing lenses 475b and 476b are used together for one third light guide plate 470 formed in a shape along the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81. .

Specifically, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 that is equivalent to (or the same as) the first decorative pattern group 421 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470. At the same time, a third lower part equivalent to (or the same as) the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the first embodiment is provided on the back side of the third lower flat plate part 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped part 470b of the third light guide plate 470. A decorative pattern group 474 is formed. In order to display the third upper decorative pattern group 471 by lighting, the third light guide plate 470 is configured to be irradiated with light from the third upper LED 472 via the third upper diffuser lens 473. In addition, in order to display the third lower decorative pattern group 474 by lighting, the light from the third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is transmitted through the third right condensing lens 475b. In addition to irradiating the third light guide plate 470, the light from the third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 via the third left condensing lens 476b. Configure it to do so. Note that the relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 in the third embodiment is better when the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is lit and displayed, as in the first embodiment. It is set as an effect that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is lit and displayed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 shows the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third upper LED 472, and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third upper LED 472, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment. Schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the right side LED unit 475 and the third right side LED 475a, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third left side LED 476a of the third left side LED unit 476. It is a front view. In addition, in FIG. 56, the third upward LED 472, the third right LED 475a, the third left LED 476a, the third upward diffusion lens 473, the third right condensing lens 465b, and the third left LED The condensing lens 476b is schematically expressed for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 56, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 is formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 as a fish school pattern, which is a pattern imitating schools of a plurality of types of fish. The uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471 converts the light incident vertically and diagonally from the light guided to the third regular R-shaped portion 470c into the pachinko machine. 10. Light that is easily emitted or emitted from the front and is incident from another direction (for example, lateral direction) is directed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. It is configured so that it does not emit light or is difficult to emit. Therefore, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light diffused downward or diagonally from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470, and becomes visible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of third upward LEDs 472 are provided above the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of recesses are formed on the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front. When the third upward diffusion lens 473 is irradiated with light, the light is diffused in multiple directions (in the third embodiment, three directions: left, center, and right) from each of the first diffusion lenses 473. It is configured. Note that the third upward diffusion lens 473 has the same configuration as the rear downward diffusion lens 425 in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, nine third upward LEDs 472 are provided, and one of the third upward diffusion lenses 473 corresponds to one third upward LED 472. A recess is arranged. Further, in the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470, the rightward diffusion portion or the leftward diffusion portion is not formed, and the frontward diffusion portion and the leftward diffusion portion are formed. , the third upward diffusion lens 473 is formed only by the front direction diffusion section and the right direction diffusion section. With this configuration, the light emitted by the third upper LED 472 is irradiated onto the third light guide plate 470 without wasting the light without diffusing the light in the direction where the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is not arranged. be able to.

The light irradiated downward in front view (downward side in the drawing) from the third upper LED 472 through the front diffuser (not shown) of the recess in the third upward diffuser lens 473 is 1 Irradiates leftward or rightward from the adjacent third upward LED 472 through the leftward diffuser (not shown) or rightward diffuser (not shown) of the first recess in the third upward diffuser lens 473 It is configured so that the (diffused) light and each optical path overlap at the intersection. In addition, the light irradiated downward from the front view from the third upward LED 472 through the left diffuser or right diffuser of the concave portion 1 in the third upward diffuser lens 473 is A portion where the light irradiated (diffused) in the right or left direction from the upper LED 472 through the right or left diffusion portion of the first recess in the third upper diffusion lens 473 and the respective optical paths intersect. are configured to overlap.

Specifically, for example, each LED of the third upper LED 472 is set to "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue" in order from the right side. ” and “green”, “red” light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upward LED 472, "Blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right (that is, the eighth from the left) of the third upward LED 472, and "Green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh from the left) of the LED 472, and from the right of the third upper LED 472. "Red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth (i.e., sixth from the left) LED, and the "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper LED 472 corresponding to the fifth (i.e., from the right) LED. "Blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the LED of the third upper LED 472 (fifth from the left; center. The "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth LED from the left (fourth from the left), and ) The "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the LED, and is transmitted to the eighth LED from the right (i.e., second from the left) of the third upper LED 472. The "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from the corresponding third upper diffusion lens 473, and the third upper LED corresponding to the ninth (i.e., the leftmost) LED from the right of the third upper LED 472 is diffused. “Green” light is diffused from the diffusion lens 473 along an optical path with a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 includes at least a portion (“red”) that is displayed only by the optical path of “red” light; The part where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light overlap ("purple"), the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "green" light overlap, Parts that are displayed (“yellow”), parts that are displayed only by the optical path of “blue” light (“blue”), and optical paths of “blue” and “green” light that overlap Each fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is displayed in a total of six different display colors: a portion that is displayed (“blue-green”) and a portion that is displayed only by the optical path of “green” light (“green”). are displayed respectively. Then, one fish pattern of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is arranged on each optical path or in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even if the lighting pattern has a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the third upward diffusion lens 473, and the optical paths of each diffused light overlap, so that the parts that do not overlap are The emitted light color that occurs in the overlapping portion is made different, and the display is configured to be able to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted light colors, the light emission control of the LEDs can be further simplified, and the control burden for controlling the light emission of the LEDs can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of single-color light-emitting diodes without using full-color LEDs, it is possible to reduce costs by using single-color light-emitting diodes, which are cheaper than full-color LEDs, and The light emission control of the LEDs is further simplified, and the control burden on the LED light emission control can be reduced.

Further, for the fish pattern 1 of the third upper decorative pattern group 471, it is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of one color in a predetermined part, and overlaps with the optical path of light of another color in a part other than the predetermined part. Arrange them so that they overlap. That is, by forming one fish pattern of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 so that the size falls within the range of a plurality of optical path widths, the light emitting color of each part of the first fish pattern is made different, and the third The fish pattern 1 of the upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in a variety of colors.

In addition, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, among the three third upper LEDs 472 arranged in the right side area, central area, and left side area of the third light guide plate 470, the rightmost LED By sequentially lighting up the third upper LED 472 located at the center, the third upper LED 47 located at the center, and the third upper LED 472 located at the left side, the school of fish, which is the third upper decorative pattern group 471, looks as if it were An effect that appears to be swimming from the right side to the left side is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, on the third light guide plate 470, a third lower decorative pattern group 474 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles is formed on a third lower flat plate portion 470a and a third lower inverted R shape. It is formed in the entire area of the portion 470b. This third lower decorative pattern group 474 is arranged at least in a position that does not overlap (avoids) the optical path of the light diffused from the third upward diffusion lens 473 in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. Therefore, even if the third upper LED 472 is lit, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is difficult to be lit.

In addition, the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 is arranged on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front. When light is irradiated onto the right end surface of the third right condensing lens 475b provided, the light is not diffused from the left end surface of the third right condensing lens 475b and is directed straight (leftward direction). ) is configured to proceed. Furthermore, the third left side LED 476a provided on the left side of the third lower flat plate part 470a of the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front causes the third left side of the third lower flat plate part 470a of the third light guide plate 470 to When light is irradiated onto the left end surface of the third left condensing lens 476b disposed in It is configured to move (towards the right).

Further, the positions of the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are such that one third right LED 475a and one third left LED 476a are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). It is arranged like this.

The uneven lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474 allows the light that is guided to the third lower flat plate part 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped part 470b to be incident in the horizontal direction. The reflected light is emitted or easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions (e.g., vertical direction or diagonal direction) is removed by a concave-convex shaped lens cut corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474. Therefore, it is configured such that it is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident laterally from the left end surface and/or right end surface of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470. It becomes visible.

Here, as described above, in the third light guide plate 470, the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, the third lower flat plate portion 470a, and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b include the decorative pattern groups 471, 474. However, as with the front light guide plate 410 of the first embodiment, any decorative pattern group 471, 474 is also not arranged. When a decorative pattern to be displayed as a light guide is placed at the switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, the portion placed in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and the It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 to reach the portion disposed in the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, the light may not reach the intended portion. There is a risk that the image will appear in a way that is not intended. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, neither of the decorative pattern groups 471 and 74 is disposed at the switching point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. , it is possible to appropriately express the pattern to be displayed by guiding the light, and to perform a performance without causing discrepancies.

The third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the first The light incident from the end surface is emitted from the second end surface in a straight (or almost straight, leftward or rightward direction in the drawing of FIG. 56) direction. As a result, the light incident from the first end surface of each of the condensing lenses 475b and 476b is not diffusely emitted from the second end surface side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, but is condensed in one direction. Therefore, when you want to light up the third lower decorative pattern group 474, you can light up the corresponding LEDs 475a and 476a without lighting up other decorative patterns (i.e., the third upper decorative pattern group 471). , only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative pattern group 471, so when trying to light up the third lower decorative pattern group 474, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is formed on the same light guide plate 470. If the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the third lower decorative symbol group 474, lights up, there will be a discrepancy in the performance contents, and there is a possibility that the game performance according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 can be displayed at an appropriate timing by configuring the condenser lenses 475b and 476b not to diffuse the light to the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which has a low jackpot expectation. This makes it possible to make it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the content of the performance.

On the other hand, since the light incident from the third upward LED 472 through the third upward diffusion lens 473 is guided downward and diagonally downward, the third upper decorative pattern group There is a possibility that the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which is disposed below 471 in front view, is arranged, and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is displayed by being lit. However, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 has a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative pattern group 471, and if the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is lit, Even if the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than 471, lights up, the player focuses on executing the third upper decorative pattern group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation level, and has a lower jackpot expectation level. Since not much attention is paid to the execution of the third lower decorative pattern group 474, production discrepancies are less likely to occur. Therefore, the condensing lenses 475b and 476b are used for the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which has a low jackpot expectation, and the diffuser lens 473 is used for the third upper decorative pattern group 471, which has a high jackpot expectation. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the third light guide plate 470 and increase the attention to the game, while making it difficult for discrepancies in presentation to occur.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and has the same effects.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, with reference to FIG. 57, details of a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be adopted in the variable element of "pseudo variation" performed in the variation effect of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo-stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation production of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR is configured to be different from each other in the drum display device 81. . More specifically, it can be roughly divided into: (1) the third symbol in descending order (i.e., "8" → "7" → "6" →...) in the direction of fluctuation (downward) on the left reel LR; are arranged, while the third symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e. "1" → "2" → "3" →...) in the direction of fluctuation (downward) on the middle reel CR and right reel RR. ing. Furthermore, (2) the third symbol of the "345" symbol, which is a combination of a plurality of symbols, is arranged on the middle reel CR, which is the final stop symbol row. Furthermore, (3) the third symbol corresponding to the "4" symbol (a part of the "345" symbol) arranged on the middle reel CR is not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. (4) On the left reel LR, the "chance" symbol is arranged in a visible position next to the "1" symbol, while on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, the "chance" symbol is arranged in the "8" position. ” are arranged in a visible position next to the design.

The configuration of (1) above is mainly used for the so-called single reach, which is the "reach display" on the first effective line on each effective line, and the "reach display" on the second effective line, in the variation production of the third symbol. This is to increase the variety of so-called double reach, which is the ``display''. Suppose that in a drum display device 81 configured such that three third symbols are visible on each reel LR, CR, and RR, all reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged in the same order (e.g., ascending order). In this case, the so-called single reach will occur only on the middle effective line, and the so-called double reach will occur only on the upper effective line and the lower effective line. In such a case, there is a risk that variations in the "reach display" may become obsolete and the player may lose interest in the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, at least the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR and the right reel RR that can form a "reach display" is reversed (that is, descending order and ascending order), so that the upper row, middle row, and lower row A so-called single reach can be generated on each effective line, and a so-called double reach can be generated on a downward-sloping effective line and an upward-sloping effective line. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety in which "reach display" can occur, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the configuration (2) above can change to a jackpot result when the "345" symbol stops on the middle reel CR, regardless of whether the "reach display" is formed or not. With this configuration, the "345" symbol is set as a so-called chance symbol, and even if the "reach display" does not appear because the stop symbols on the left reel LR and right reel RR are different, Even if there is, the system is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot can remain until the final stop symbol row has stopped. More specifically, if the above-mentioned "345" symbol has stopped when the drive of the middle reel CR has stopped (temporary stop), the "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element will cause all reels LR, CR, and RR to fluctuate again. It is structured so that it can be developed into. This variable element of "re-variation" can be selected only when a jackpot lottery result has been derived, so in the variation performance, the "345" symbol stops and the variable element of "re-variation" is executed. This makes it possible to perform a so-called one-shot reversal effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the configuration of (3) above, while "4" is included only in the "345" symbols arranged only on the middle reel CR, "4" symbols are not arranged on the left reel LR and right reel RR. Although the "reach display" itself cannot occur due to the "4" symbol, it makes the "345" symbol on the middle reel CR stand out and highlights its specialness, and the "345" symbol stops at the middle reel CR. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the gameplay of whether or not the game is more noticeable.

In addition, the configuration of (4) above is the switching of the number symbols on the left reel LR where the number symbols are arranged in descending order (i.e., "8" symbol → "7" symbol → ... → "1" symbol). "Chance" symbols (hereinafter, "Chance" symbols may be abbreviated as "C" symbols) are arranged in the area between the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol. At the same time, the number symbols on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, where the number symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1" symbol → "2" symbol →... → "8" symbol), ie, " ``Chance'' symbols are arranged between the ``8'' symbols and the ``1'' symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a "chance" symbol that is not a numerical symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable element of "pseudo variation", the variable element of "re-variation", or the "special" symbol with the highest jackpot expectation The system is configured so that the variable element of ``Reach'' is carried out, and the ``chance'' symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variable performance is continuously executed and a jackpot can be expected in the variable performance. In this way, in the fluctuating production, on each reel LR, CR, and RR that fluctuate downward, by arranging "chance" symbols with different properties from the numerical symbols in the middle of the numerical symbols arranged in descending or ascending order. In addition to making it easier to recognize the numerical symbols that change on each reel LR, CR, and RR, we also arrange "chance" symbols that have different characteristics from the numerical symbols to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in (5) variation performance, when a "reach display" with a "7" symbol occurs, a jackpot result that can cause a "probability variation state" (i.e., "777 ”) is configured to easily appear. In other words, if you win the jackpot lottery, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol can be selected, while if you do not win the jackpot lottery, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol can be selected. is configured so that it is difficult to select. With this configuration, it is possible to amplify the player's expectation of a jackpot at the stage when the "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the variable element of "pseudo variation", an effect is provided in which the "reach forming symbol" changes in stages. More specifically, in the variation element of the "pseudo variation" of the fourth embodiment, a symbol change effect is provided in which the "reach forming symbol" changes in three steps (in ascending order). At the end of the variable element "1", the "1" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel LR, and the "1" symbol also stops in the middle row of the right reel RR, and the "1" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel RR. In a situation where "reach display" is occurring on the active line (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"), when the variation element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, a pseudo stop symbol will be displayed. The "reach display" of a certain "1" symbol changes to the "reach display" of a "2" symbol, which is also a pseudo-stop symbol, and then stops (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo-stop 2") ), and then changes to the "reach display" of the "3" symbol (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "reach formation"), and then various "reach displays" are executed from the variable elements of "normal reach". be done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a "reach display" will occur with any number symbol in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", that is, a "reach display" that can cause a "probability fluctuation state" will occur. It is possible to perform a performance of "yes or no", enrich the variations of the game, and improve the interest of the game. The number of stages that can be changed in stages in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" may be any number of times that can be executed within the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", and may be 2 stages or less (including 1 time). That's fine, and 4 or more levels are fine.

However, in performing the fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation", the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR are configured as in (1) to (4) above, and in addition, the game In the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to perform a variable performance according to the specifications, in the above-mentioned symbol change performance executed in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation", "pseudo stop 1" at the time of the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation", Certain restrictions occur on the stop patterns of each pseudo stop pattern of "pseudo stop 2" and "reach formation".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be executed with the variable element of "pseudo variation" will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo-stop symbols that can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation presentation of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed by the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state where the stop symbol is stopped, and FIG. 58(b) shows a state where the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(a). FIG. 58(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach forming pattern" is stopped from the state in FIG. 58(b), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state where "reach display" is performed from the state of (c). In addition, in FIG. 57, "●" indicates the middle reel CR which is changing, and the numbers on the left and right of it indicate the stopped symbols on the left reel LR and right reel RR. Further, in FIG. 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "Pattern 1", "Pseudo Stop 1" is the "1" symbol, "Pseudo Stop 2" is the "2" symbol, and "Reach Formation" is the "3" symbol is the "Pseudo" symbol. The variable elements of "Variation" (i.e., "1●1" → "2●2" → "3●3") are not constrained by the configurations of (1) to (5) above, so they can be executed. It is configured.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" ends, the left reel of the drum display device 81 is displayed as "pseudo stop 1". The "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle part of the LR and right reel RR, creating a state as if a "reach display" with the "1" symbol had occurred. Then, the variable performance progresses while the "reach display" with the "1" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a), the left reel LR and right reel RR rotate downward, and "2" appears in the middle part of the left reel LR and right reel RR on the drum display device 81 as "pseudo stop 2". The symbols are pseudo-stopped, and the state is as if the "reach display" with the "1" symbol has changed to the "reach display" with the "2" symbol (see FIG. 58(b)). Then, the variable performance progresses while the "reach display" with the "2" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the left reel LR and right reel RR rotate downward, and a "3" symbol appears in the middle part of the left reel LR and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as "reach formation". has been stopped, and the state has changed from the "reach display" with the "2" symbol to the "reach display" with the "3" symbol (see FIG. 58(c)). Then, from this state, the "reach display" shown in FIG. is executed.

Returning to FIG. 57, the explanation will be continued. Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e., "pattern 2", "pseudo stop 1" is "2" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "3" symbol, and "reach formation" is "4" symbol) , "2●2" → "3●3" → "4●4") is constrained by the configuration of (3) above, that is, the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol. It is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e., "pattern 3", "pseudo stop 1" is "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "4" symbol, and "reach formation" is "5" symbol) , "3●3" → "4●4" → "5●5") is similar to "Pattern 2" above, due to the restriction due to the configuration of (3) above, that is, "4 ” Since it does not contain any symbols, it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e. "pattern 4", "pseudo stop 1" is "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "5" symbol, "reach formation" is "6" symbol) , "3●3" → "5●5" → "6●6") does not include the "4" symbol, so the restriction due to the configuration in (3) above does not affect it, but "pseudo stop 1" Although it was a "reach display" (i.e. reach by "3" symbol) that could generate a "probability fluctuation state" in "reach formation", a "reach display" that did not generate a "probability fluctuation state" ( In other words, the reach due to the "6" symbol) has changed, and it is a so-called falling effect that makes it appear that the profit that can be awarded has decreased, so it should not be executed so as not to dissuade the player from playing the game. It is composed of

Next, the variation element of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e., "pattern 5", in which "pseudo stop 1" is "4" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is "6" symbol) , "4●4" → "5●5" → "6●6"), like the above "Pattern 2" and "Pattern 3", is constrained by the configuration of (3) above, that is, the left reel LR and the right Since the reel RR does not contain the "4" symbol, it is configured such that it cannot be executed.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e. "pattern 6", "pseudo stop 1" is "5" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "6" symbol, "reach formation" is "7" symbol) , "5●5" → "6●6" → "7●7") are not restricted by the configurations of (1) to (5) above, and are therefore configured to be executed.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e. "pattern 7", "pseudo stop 1" is "6" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "7" symbol, "reach formation" is "8" symbol) , "6●6" → "7●7" → "8●8") is a "reach display" where a jackpot is likely to occur in "pseudo stop 2" (i.e., "7") due to the restriction in (5) above. However, the "reach formation" has changed to the normal "reach display" (i.e. reach by the "8" symbol), and the so-called profit that can be given seems to have decreased. Since it is a down-and-fall effect, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so as not to dissuade the player from playing the game.

Next, the variation elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e., "pattern 8", in which "pseudo stop 1" is the "7" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "8" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "C" symbol) , "7●7" → "8●8" → "C●C") is a "reach display" where a jackpot is likely to occur in "pseudo stop 1" (i.e., "7") due to the restriction in (5) above. However, in "Pseudo Stop 2", it changes to the normal "reach display" (i.e., reach by the "8" symbol), which is a so-called decline that discourages players. Since it is a performance, it is structured so that it cannot be executed. Also, if the "C" symbol stops, the variable element of "re-variation" may be executed, so this pattern cannot necessarily be said to be a so-called falling effect, but if the "C" symbol stops, Since the variable element of the "pseudo variation" is configured so that it can be executed, and the variable element of the "pseudo variation" is executed again from the variable element of the "pseudo variation", the "pattern 8" cannot be executed. It is configured so that it does not.

Next, the variable elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e. "pattern 9", "pseudo stop 1" is "8" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "C" symbol, "reach formation" is "1" symbol) , "8●8" → "C●C" → "1●1") is a "reach display" (i.e., However, in the "reach formation", the "reach display" (i.e., the reach with the "1" symbol) does not generate the variable elements of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation". Since this is a so-called down-turn effect where the profits that can be awarded appear to have decreased, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so as not to dissuade the player from playing the game.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e., "pattern 10", "pseudo stop 1" is "8" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "1" symbol, "reach formation" is "2" symbol) , "8●8" → "1●1" → "2●2"), from "Pseudo Stop 1" to "Pseudo Stop 2", skips the "reach display" by the "C" symbol and displays "8 ” symbol changes to a “1” symbol, and is configured so that it can be executed because it is not limited by the configurations of (1) to (5) above. In addition, in the case of this "Pattern 10", in order to omit (skip) the "C" symbol and execute the variation element of "Pseudo variation", the symbol control in the above "Pattern 1" and "Pattern 6" (each reel The acceleration/deceleration patterns of LR, CR, and RR, changes in the time scale of constant speed fluctuation, fine adjustment of slip return, etc.) are configured to be different.

Note that, like this "Pattern 10", a pattern in which any of the consecutive symbols is skipped and the variable element of the "pseudo variation" is executed may not be executed. With this configuration, the control pattern for each reel LR, CR, and RR regarding the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" can be simplified, and the control burden regarding symbol control can be reduced.

Next, the variation elements of "pseudo fluctuation" (i.e. "pattern 11", "pseudo stop 1" is "C" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is "1" symbol, "reach formation" is "2" symbol) , "C●C" → "1●1" → "2●2") is a "reach display" (i.e., However, in the "reach formation", the "reach display" (i.e., the reach with the "2" symbol) does not generate the variable elements of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation". This is a so-called down-and-out effect that would disturb the players, so it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" are selected from among "pattern 1", "pattern 6", and "pattern 10". The pseudo stop symbol in is selected, and other patterns (i.e., "Pattern 2", "Pattern 3", "Pattern 4", "Pattern 5", "Pattern 7", "Pattern 8", "Pattern 9" and " "Pattern 11") is configured so as not to be executed with a "pseudo variation" variation element. With this configuration, it is possible to perform variable performances while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies in performances, which may cause players to feel strange and lose interest. It is possible to suppress this and improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation," it suppresses the execution of the so-called falling effect where the third symbol with a large profit temporarily stops changes to the third symbol with a small profit. By preventing the player from becoming disinterested, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot result with a predetermined number symbol appears in a variable production, the number symbol changes while maintaining the jackpot result within the variation production, a so-called "full rotation" production. The symbol control and audio output control in will be explained.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the configurations of the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, middle reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 that constitute the drum display device 81 will be described. The configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, middle reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, so in FIG. 59, the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) will be described as an example.

The left reel unit 81a1 includes a cylindrical member 610, which is a cylindrical base, and a left reel LR wound endlessly around the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical member 610. Then, in order to maintain the state in which the left reel LR is wound around the cylindrical member 610, the cylindrical member is The left reel LR is attached to 610.

As described above, on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel LR, numerical symbols and "chance" symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals (see FIG. 4). A mounting recess 610a is formed in the center of the cylindrical member 610, and a drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is mounted to the mounting recess 610a via a disc-shaped connecting plate 611. As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 causes the cylindrical member 610 to rotate around the drive shaft, and this rotation causes the numbers on the left reel LR to be visible from the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 6). The symbols and "chance" symbols are configured to change.

The stepping motor 600 is fixed to the side surface of a fixing plate (not shown) arranged in an upright position within the drum display device 81 with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw. A reel position detection sensor 620 in which a light emitting element 621 and a light receiving element 622 are held at a predetermined interval is fixed to this fixed plate.

Furthermore, a base end 632 of an initial position member 630 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the connecting plate 611 integrated with the cylindrical member 610 with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

The distal end portion 631 of the initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from the base end portion 632, and is aligned so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620. Each time the left reel LR rotates once, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passing of the tip end 631 of the initial position member 630, and each time a detection signal is sent to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 33). Output. The display control device 114 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel LR every rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set, for example, so that the left reel LR is rotated once by applying an excitation signal of 400 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 600, that is, the left reel LR, is determined by the output mode of this excitation signal. The rotational position of is drive-controlled by the display control device 114.

More specifically, the left reel LR has a plurality of symbols and areas (in the fifth embodiment, a total of 16 symbols including number symbols, "chance" symbols, and blank areas) in the long side direction (circling direction). is depicted. Therefore, in order to switch from a symbol (region) at a predetermined position to the next region (design), that is, to change the symbol by one frame, 25 pulses (=400÷16 symbols=16 frames) are required. Then, which symbols and areas are visible from the central opening 431 (see FIG. 6) of the display area forming member 430 are determined based on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel position detection sensor 620 is output. It is possible to perform pattern control to make an arbitrary pattern and area visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430.

Therefore, as described above, among the symbols and regions attached to the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR, the number of symbols and regions that can be visually recognized through the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430 is It is determined by the size of the symbol (area) and the vertical length of the central opening 431, and in the fifth embodiment, each reel is configured to have three LR, CR, and RR. Therefore, when the reels LR, CR, and RR are all stopped, 3×3=9 symbols and areas are visible to the player.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66.

First, the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 61 is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment employs a hybrid two-phase excitation drive system stepping motor that employs a one-two phase excitation drive system. Note that the stepping motor 600 is not limited to a hybrid type or a two-phase stepping motor, and may employ various stepping motors such as a stepping motor with a four-phase excitation drive method, a stepping motor with a five-phase excitation drive method, or a stepping motor with a one-phase excitation drive method. You can.

As shown in FIG. 60, the hybrid stepping motor 600 includes a rotating section 602 arranged at the center, a first shaft section 603, a second shaft section 604, and a third shaft section arranged around the rotating section 602. 605 and a fixing part 601 having a fourth shaft part 606.

The rotating section 602 is composed of a near side rotating section 602a magnetized to the N pole and a back side rotating section 602b magnetized to the S pole, and is provided around the near side rotating section 602a (outer periphery). It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state where it is relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the periphery (outer periphery) of the back side rotating part 602b are located between the teeth. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotating section 602a and the back rotating section 602b.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first shaft portion 603 and the third shaft portion 605 are bifilar-wound with an excitation coil L1 and an excitation coil L3, and the winding end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3 are connected to each other. is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply +B (for example, 24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L2 and the excitation coil L4 are bifilar-wound around the second shaft section 604 and the fourth shaft section 606, and the winding end of the excitation coil L2 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L4 are connected. , the above-mentioned DC power supply +B is also applied here.

Here, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the first shaft section 603, and the first shaft section 603 is excited to the S pole and the third shaft section 605 is excited to the N pole is referred to as "A phase". . In addition, contrary to the "A phase", an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third shaft section 605, and a phase in which the first shaft section 603 is excited to the north pole and the third shaft section is excited to the south pole. is called "reverse A phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is written above "A").

Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the second shaft section 604, and the second shaft section 604 is excited to the S pole and the fourth shaft section 606 is excited to the N pole is referred to as "B phase". . Also, contrary to the "B phase", an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth shaft section 606, and the second shaft section 604 is excited to the north pole, and the fourth shaft section 606 is excited to the south pole. The phase is referred to as "reverse B phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is written above "B").

In the fifth embodiment, in the stepping motor 600 of the 1-2 phase excitation drive system, in the case of the 1-phase excitation drive system, "A phase", "B phase", "reverse A phase", and "reverse B phase" are used. By sequentially applying excitation signals to the rotating portion 602, the rotating portion 602 can be driven to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise.

That is, for example, when first applying (energizing) the "A phase", the protrusion of the first shaft part 603 which has become the S pole, the tooth of the front rotating part 602a, and the third shaft part 605 which has become the N pole. The protrusions and the teeth of the rear rotating portion 602b face each other due to the suction force. Next, when the "B phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft part 604 which has become an S pole, the teeth of the front rotating part 602a, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft part 606 which has become an N pole. and the teeth of the rear rotating portion 602b face each other due to suction force. Furthermore, when the "reverse A phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the first shaft part 603 which has become the N pole, the tooth of the back rotating part 602b, and the third shaft part 605 which has become the S pole. The protrusion and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other due to the suction force. Next, when the "reverse B phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft part 604 which has become the N pole, the tooth of the back side rotating part 602b, and the fourth shaft part 606 which has become the S pole. The protrusion and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other due to the suction force. By energizing in this order, the rotating section 602 rotates clockwise in FIG. 60.

Here, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between excitation data and excitation order pointers in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a 1-2 phase excitation drive method is adopted in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed. In one-phase excitation, only one set of the first to fourth shaft parts 603 to 606 is excited, and in two-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of first to fourth shaft parts 603 to 606 are excited. . In this 1-2 phase excitation drive method, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method is: (a) energizing only the "A phase" (1-phase excitation), and then (b) energizing both the "A phase" and the "B phase". (2-phase excitation), then (c) energize only the "B phase" (1-phase excitation), then (d) energize both the "B phase" and the "reverse A phase" (2 phase excitation), then (e) energize only the "reverse A phase" (single-phase excitation), then (f) energize both "reverse A phase" and "reverse B phase" (two-phase excitation) , then (g) energize only the "reverse B phase" (1-phase excitation), then (h) energize both the "reverse B phase" and "A phase" (2-phase excitation), and then ( This is a drive method that returns to a).

In the fifth embodiment, the left reel LR is configured to rotate once with the excitation signal of 400 pulses, so the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is 9 degrees.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 600 is given to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as excitation data shown in FIG. 62. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and is processed by the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114 during periodic processing in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1102 in FIG. Appropriate excitation data is output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 by the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the same time interval (see S1109 to S1109). This excitation data determines the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase. Note that the timer interrupt processing of the display control device 114 may be performed at intervals of 1 millisecond, which is the same interval as the periodic processing in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

The excitation phase during initial excitation of the stepping motor 600 is configured to perform two-phase excitation. In the case of one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than that in two-phase excitation, so there is a possibility that a sufficient initial velocity cannot be obtained. If a sufficient initial velocity is not obtained, there is a high possibility of step-out, so two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation.

Moreover, when stopping the stepping motor 600, the configuration is such that four-phase excitation is performed immediately after two-phase excitation is performed. If the braking process is performed using only two-phase excitation, there is a concern that the strong braking force will cause the rotational speed to drop sharply, making the player feel uncomfortable with the movement of each reel LR, CR, and RR when braking. be done. On the other hand, by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation, each reel LR, CR, and RR can be stopped smoothly.

When using the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment, drive characteristics as shown in FIG. 63 or FIG. 64 are required. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of variation effects in the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed during the "full rotation" performance in the fifth embodiment.

The example shown in FIG. 63 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, and the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the variable production starts, making it difficult for the player to see the symbols. an acceleration period Ta during which the rotation reaches a constant speed at a high speed of about A first deceleration period Tc in which the rotation is slowed down to a constant speed at a low speed that is visible, a low constant speed period Td in which the rotation is performed at a constant low speed, and a period from the low constant speed rotation to a stop. and a second deceleration period Te.

In other words, the period consisting of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant speed period Tb matches the execution time of the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" in the variation performance, and is set so that Ta+Tb=10 seconds. has been done. In addition, the period consisting of the first deceleration period Tc, low speed constant speed period Td, and second deceleration period Te is until the left reel LR is stopped during the execution time of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect. It is set so that Tc+Td+Te≦5 seconds.

The example shown in FIG. 64 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 during a "full rotation" performance, which is a type of "revariation" performance mode. In the "full rotation" production, when a jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot result due to the "5" symbol) appears on any active line, the jackpot symbol changes again, and each reel LR, CR, An effect is executed in which each RR rotates about one time and changes to another jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot result with a "6" symbol). Then, the re-fluctuation and temporary suspension are executed a plurality of times, and finally the jackpot symbol (for example, the jackpot result by the "7" symbol) corresponding to the jackpot result won in the jackpot lottery is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the stepping motor 600 starts rotating at a constant high speed that the symbol is difficult to see for the player after the "full rotation" effect is started for the symbol that has been temporarily stopped in various variable elements. A first acceleration period T1 leading up to high speed rotation, a first high speed constant speed period T2 during which the high speed constant speed rotation occurs, and all reels LR, CR, and RR which were being rotated at high speed constant speed stop simultaneously (so-called A first temporary stop period T3 which is a temporary stop period from when the rotation is started again after a short stop), a second acceleration period T4 until the high speed constant speed rotation is reached again, and a second high speed period during which the high speed constant speed rotation is performed. It is divided into a constant speed period T5.

That is, during the period consisting of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "1" symbol that appeared before the start of the "full rotation" effect) ) changes to the next second temporary stop symbol (for example, jackpot of the "2" symbol), the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player in the first temporary stop period T3, and the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player during the second acceleration period T4 and the second temporary stop symbol. In the period consisting of the high speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol is set to change to the next main stop symbol (for example, a jackpot of the "3" symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the first acceleration period T1 and first high-speed constant speed period T2 on all reels LR, CR, and RR are 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds. Hereinafter, milliseconds are referred to as milliseconds. ), and the first temporary stop period T3 during which the second temporary stop symbol is displayed on all reels LR, CR, and RR is 0.5 seconds (500 ms). Furthermore, the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant speed period T5 in all reels LR, CR, and RR are configured to be performed in 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, when the above-mentioned "Full rotation" effect is executed in the variable element of "Re-variation", the execution time from the first temporary stop symbol to the appearance of the main stop symbol is 4.5 seconds (4500ms). After that, the final stop symbol is displayed for 0.5 seconds (500 ms), so that the variable element of "re-variation" ends.

Here, as mentioned above, the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR have reversed symbol arrangement, so when the "full rotation" is produced, all reels are reeled from the first temporary stop symbol. Drive LR, CR, and RR around 1 rotation (that is, around 16 symbols = around 16 frames (about ±2 frames).Hereinafter, rotating all reels LR, CR, and RR 14 frames to 18 frames is referred to as "about 16 frames around". When changing the symbol to the second temporary stop symbol (sometimes referred to as "one rotation"), the amount of change in the symbol on the left reel LR is configured to be different from the amount of change in the symbol on the middle reel CR and right reel RR. has been done.

Specifically, for example, as a result of the "reach display", the jackpot symbol "1" is temporarily stopped at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR as the first temporary stop symbol, and the "full rotation" is performed. When the effect is executed, in order to stop the jackpot symbol of "2" symbol as the second temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, and RR, the left reel LR where the symbols are arranged in descending order must be It is necessary to change the symbols by 16 frames for 1 rotation - 2 frames = 14 frames, while the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which have symbols arranged in ascending order, correspond to 16 frames for 1 rotation + 2 frames = 18 frames. , it is necessary to change the design. In other words, in the "Full Rotation" performance, when changing from one temporary stop symbol to the next temporary stop symbol, the left reel LR has a higher speed than the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. The structure is such that the amount of fluctuation is 4 frames less than that of the right reel RR.

In this case, in order for the reels LR, CR, and RR, which were fluctuating at high speed during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2, to simultaneously stop and change to the second temporary stop symbol, the first It is necessary to rotate all the reels LR, CR, and RR in alignment with the second temporary stop symbol during the acceleration period T1 or the first high speed constant speed period T2. In order to align all reels LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol of "1" symbol) is stopped and displayed; While all the reels LR, CR, and RR that are on the left reel start rotating at the same time, only the left reel LR changes the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed, etc.) to the fluctuation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR. Different from the pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed, etc.), the second temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol of "2" symbol) is released after about one revolution of all reels LR, CR, and RR. ) at the same time, or (2) among all reels LR, CR, and RR that are stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol, select the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which have a large amount of change up to the second temporary stop symbol. The rotation is started first, and the number symbol corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol on the middle reel CR and right reel RR (for example, the "2" symbol on the middle reel CR and right reel RR) becomes the second temporary stop symbol on the left reel LR. The rotation of the left reel LR is started at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the vicinity of the number symbol corresponding to (for example, the "2" symbol on the left reel LR), and all reels LR are , CR, and RR, with the second temporary stop symbols aligned and the rotational speeds matched, all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped simultaneously at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Several drive control patterns are possible.

However, in the case of the drive control pattern (1), although the rotation start timings of all reels LR, CR, and RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare multiple acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR in the first acceleration period T1. Or, it is necessary to prepare multiple patterns of the rotational speed of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, or it is necessary to control the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and rotational speed. As a result, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR to adjust the acceleration pattern and rotational speed becomes complicated. In addition, each reel LR, CR, RR has a blank area formed between the numerical symbols, so each reel LR, CR, In RR, when the rotation speed etc. are different (misaligned) and the number symbols are not aligned, blank areas are lined up in the horizontal direction of the number symbols, causing fluctuations as if the number symbols are aligned. This may give a sense of discomfort and may disturb the game during the "full rotation" performance.

On the other hand, in the case of the drive control pattern (2), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1, and the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and rotation speed is Although adjustment control is required, there is no need to prepare multiple patterns of rotational speeds of the reels LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although the rotation start timing of the left reel LR deviates from the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which may cause a sense of discomfort, the timing is relatively early in the first high-speed constant speed period T2 of each reel LR, CR, and RR. This allows all reels LR, CR, and RR to be aligned and fluctuate at a constant speed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR from the drive control pattern (1), reduce the control burden, and at a relatively early stage of the first high-speed constant speed period T2. (at least in the second half), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, prevent him from losing interest in the game, and improve the interest in the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive control the reels LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" performance using the drive control pattern (2) above.

Further, as described above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to a constant speed rotation state after a predetermined acceleration period, but this acceleration period starts from the time when the previous variable performance stops, Since this is the transition time to a state in which the fluctuation performance is clearly executed (i.e., high-speed constant speed rotation in the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation"), the stepping motor 600 changes from the acceleration state to the constant speed rotation state as soon as possible. It is desirable to make a transition. To this end, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600 may be switched quickly, but this may cause step-out or rotational instability.

In particular, in the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating section 602 are attracted to the protrusions of the respective shaft sections 603 to 606 during initial excitation, the initial rotational vibration (microvibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) of the rotating section 602 may occur. ) occurs. Although the rotational shaking differs depending on each specification, for example, there are cases where about 5 to 6 round trips occur, with one round trip every 30 ms. Therefore, it is necessary to set the switching mode of the excitation phase during the acceleration period while taking such initial rotational fluctuation into consideration.

Each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the fifth embodiment suppresses the influence of the above-mentioned initial rotational fluctuation, and the acceleration pattern at the time of "full rotation" is the same as that of the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR. and are set differently. Specifically, the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in the same normal acceleration pattern as at the start of normal fluctuation (see S2015 in FIGS. 65 and 70), while the left reel LR starts rotating in the normal acceleration pattern (see S2015 in FIGS. 65 and 70). Rotation starts with a special acceleration pattern different from the pattern.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, each excitation pattern during acceleration of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" performance will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern for normal acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern for special acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram. Further, FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of music during the "full rotation" performance in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the "full rotation" performance performed on the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 68(a) is a hypothetical jackpot result with the "1" symbol. FIG. 68(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel CR and right reel RR have started rotating in the normal acceleration process from the state in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(c) is a schematic diagram showing that the middle reel CR and right reel RR are rotating at a high and constant speed from the state of FIG. 68(b), and the left reel LR is rotating at a special acceleration process. FIG. 68(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which rotation has started, and FIG. 68(d) shows that the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR are rotating at high speed and constant speed from the state in FIG. 68(c). FIG. 68(e) is a schematic diagram showing the state, and FIG. 68(e) shows a state in which the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR are rotating at high speed and constant speed, similar to the state in FIG. 68(d). FIG. 68(f) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the provisional jackpot result with the "2" symbol has stopped from the state of FIG. 68(e). In addition, in FIG. 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

First, in the example of the normal acceleration process shown in FIG. 65, the acceleration process is the same as that at the start of fluctuation of each reel LR, CR, RR in the fluctuation performance, and is set as "acceleration order 1" (1 pulse) which is the initial excitation. , the state set to two-phase excitation is maintained for 67 interrupts (ie, 67 timer interrupt processing = 134 ms). Thereafter, as "acceleration order 2", it is switched to 1-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for 8 interrupts (i.e., 16 ms). Thereafter, as "acceleration order 3", it is switched to two-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for 7 interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). Thereafter, the excitation phases are alternately switched, and the excitation phase switching interval is set to gradually become shorter. As a result, 150 interrupts = 2 ms x 150 = 300 ms is set as the excitation period for "acceleration order 1 to 25" of the normal acceleration process, that is, the period in which 25 pulses corresponding to one symbol change are output, and during that period, It becomes possible to eliminate the above-mentioned initial rotational shaking. Further, by reusing the acceleration pattern used at the start of fluctuation, the number of types of acceleration patterns can be reduced and the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the example of special acceleration processing shown in FIG. 66, the initial excitation "acceleration order 1" (for 1 pulse) is set to 2-phase excitation, which results in 17 interrupts (i.e., 17 timer interrupt processing = 34 ms). It is retained for a period of time. Thereafter, as "acceleration order 2", it is switched to one-phase excitation similarly to the normal acceleration process, and this state is maintained for 8 interrupts (ie, 16 ms). Thereafter, as "acceleration order 3", it is switched to two-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for 7 interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). Thereafter, the excitation phases are alternately switched, and the excitation phase switching interval is set to gradually become shorter. As a result, 100 interrupts = 2ms x 100 = 200ms is set as the excitation period for "acceleration order 1 to 25" of the special acceleration process, that is, the period in which 25 pulses, which are one symbol change, are output, and during that period, The above-mentioned initial rotational shaking can be eliminated.

That is, the special acceleration process drives and controls the left reel LR so that it accelerates to high-speed constant speed rotation in a period 100 ms shorter than the normal acceleration process. Therefore, in the "full rotation" performance, the left reel LR can be rotated at a high and constant speed in a relatively short time.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, during the "Full Rotation" performance, first, the middle reel CR and the right which are stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (i.e. "1" symbol) The reels RR start rotating at the same time by normal acceleration processing (see when the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 68(a) and (b)). Then, when a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotated at a high and constant speed, corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the near side of the position (see the start of rotation of the left reel LR in Fig. 67 and Fig. 68(c)), the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) is stopped and displayed. The left reel LR starts rotating by special acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the above-mentioned high-speed constant speed rotation (see the constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 68(d) and (e)), the left reel LR The second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the middle reel CR and right reel RR are maintained in a horizontally aligned state, and the high-speed steady state is maintained. It is set to rotate quickly. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which were rotating at a high speed and constant speed, are simultaneously and so-called bit stopped. Then, the second temporarily stopped symbols (i.e., "2" symbols) are stopped and displayed on the middle active line (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 67, and the timing in FIG. 68 ( f)).

With this configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be simplified, reducing the control burden, and at least in the second half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the number symbols are Since the number symbols can be rotated while aligning them with no blank area in the horizontal direction, it does not give the player a sense of discomfort, prevents them from losing interest in the game, and improves the interest of the game. can.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do this, by adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, the period from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) when it is displayed in a stopped state during the production of "full rotation" and appears. It is configured to output a predetermined piece of music that is synchronized with the period during the period. Further, the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR is configured to match the beats (rhythm) that are output (struck) at equal intervals in the music.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, during the "full rotation" performance, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) to the first symbol. The change time of the 2 temporary stop symbol (i.e. "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music to be output during the change time is set to beats per minute, which indicates the number of beats per minute. Per Minute (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "BPM") is 120, that is, the tempo is one beat every 0.5 seconds, and one measure of the music is output in 4/4 time. Configure it as follows. Then, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure. Configure it to start rotating at the timing of .

In this case, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that changes the acceleration every 300ms. At the same time, one frame of the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped symbol to the second symbol is rotated in a total of 2000 ms. Changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR is started in synchronization with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of one bar in a song with a BPM of 120 and a 4/4 time signature.

On the other hand, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, rotates the first 1 frame (i.e. from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) with a special acceleration process of 200ms, and rotates the remaining 13 frames (i.e. , from the above-mentioned blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol in a total of 1500 ms. . That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronization with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of one bar in a song with a BPM of 120 and a 4/4 time signature.

Then, with all reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high and constant speed, the third beat (weak beat) and fourth beat (weak beat) of one bar are output, and then, at the end of the one bar, (After the end of the 4th beat. 2000ms after the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating), the rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR stops simultaneously, and the second temporary reel appears on the active line in the middle row. The stop symbol (namely, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, during the "full rotation" performance, the difference in the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be compensated for by the beat of the music that can be recognized by the player's hearing. By combining these, the discrepancies caused by visual recognition are canceled out (suppressed) by the harmonization (synchronization) of the tempo perceived by hearing, and the "full rotation" performance does not give players any sense of discomfort, and the "full rotation" performance has the highest jackpot expectation in the game. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU (not shown) in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. As such MPU processing, a motor control process (see FIG. 69) that drives and controls the stepping motor 600 and a reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) executed within the motor control process are mainly executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing motor control processing executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. Note that the motor control process may be configured to be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114, for example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The motor control process shown in FIG. 69 is executed within the main process that is periodically executed after a predetermined start-up process in the display control device 114 is completed, and mainly controls the drive of the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81. Execute.

In this motor control process, first, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to control the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any one of the reels LR, CR, and RR (S2001). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no need to control the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR (S2001: No), that is, even when all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped. If so, this motor control process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that it is necessary to control the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR (S2001: Yes), the detection result of the reel position detection sensor 620 and the excitation Based on the number of data outputs, a process of determining the rotational positions of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed is executed (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether the braking start timing for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed has arrived (S2003). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the braking start timing for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed has arrived (S2003: Yes), the rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed is started. Therefore, the process moves to reel rotation processing (S2004), and after the reel rotation process (S2004) is executed, the process moves to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the braking start timing for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed has not arrived (S2003: No), the process skips S2004 and moves to S2005.

Here, the reel rotation start processing (S2004) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing reel rotation start processing (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In this reel rotation start processing (S2004), first, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is the start time of a variable effect (S2011). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that it is the time to start the variable production (S2011: Yes), all reels LR, CR, and RR start rotating by normal acceleration processing (S2012), and this reel rotation start processing (S2004) is finished, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). In addition, when it is determined that it is the start time of the fluctuation effect, it is further determined whether it is a normal fluctuation performed when the number of held balls is small or a shortened fluctuation performed when the number of held balls is large, and the normal fluctuation is performed. If this is the case, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR may be started in the normal acceleration process, while if it is a shortening variation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR may be started in the special acceleration process. good.

On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the variable performance (S2011: No), then it is determined whether it is the time for the "full rotation" performance (S2013). As a result of the determination, if it is not the "full rotation" performance (S2013: No), this reel rotation start process (S2004) is ended and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a "full rotation" performance (S2013: Yes), then all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop time has elapsed. It is determined whether the timing is the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (S2014).

As a result of the determination in S2014, if it is determined that all reels LR, CR, and RR are in a temporarily stopped state, and it is determined that the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: Yes), the middle reel CR and The right reel RR starts rotating with normal acceleration processing (see Fig. 65) (S2015), and at this timing, 1 in 1 bar of a song corresponding to the "full rotation" performance (i.e., BPM 120 and 4/4 time) The beat is output from the audio output device 226 (S2016), this reel rotation start process (S2004) is ended, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S2014, if it is determined that all reels LR, CR, and RR are in a temporarily stopped state, and it is determined that the timing has not elapsed for the temporary stop time (S2014: No), next, It is determined whether the left reel LR is in a temporarily stopped state and the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed, that is, it is the timing to start rotating the left reel LR (S2017).

As a result of the determination in S2017, if it is determined that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR is subjected to special acceleration processing ( (see FIG. 66) (S2018), and at this timing, the second beat of one measure of the music corresponding to the production of "Full Rotation" is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), and this reel rotation start processing After finishing (S2004), the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). In addition, in the process of S2017, if it is determined that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the timing has not elapsed for the temporary stop time (S2017: No), this reel rotation start process (S2004 ) and returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2005, a reel control process is performed (S2005), and the process moves to S2006. In this reel control process (S2005), excitation data generation process for controlling the rotation of the stepping motor 600 is performed. Further, in order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of acceleration tables (see FIGS. 65 and 66) are stored in the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114. In the table, at least data of an acceleration counter and data of a switching interval are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data of the acceleration counter.

The reel control process in S2005 uses a switching interval counter, an acceleration counter, and an excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114. The number of timer interrupts corresponding to the excitation phase switching interval is set in the switching interval counter. The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600. When a stepping motor 600 with 1-2 phase excitation is used, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are performed alternately, and the phase excitation patterns at that time are 8 patterns as shown in FIG. The value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer specifies which excitation data during which phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114. be done.

In this reel control process, it is determined whether each reel LR, CR, RR is being braked or not, and if it is not being braked, on the condition that the numerical information of the switching interval counter is "1" or more, The numerical information of the switching interval counter is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the numerical information after the subtraction is "0". If the numerical information is not "0", the reel control process is terminated, while if the numerical information is "0", an acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, In the acceleration table, data of the switching interval corresponding to the current value of the acceleration counter is set in the switching interval counter. For example, when the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR starts, the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) is executed, so that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is 25". In this case, numerical information of "2" is set in the switching interval counter.

Next, an excitation order pointer update process is executed. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and when the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". Thereafter, an excitation data table as shown in FIG. 62 is read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and excitation data corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read. Then, the read excitation data is stored in the RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are the targets of execution of the reel control process.

Next, on the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, the numerical information of the acceleration counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, when switching the excitation phase next time for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are currently being processed, switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set. In this case, since the execution is performed on the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, if the numerical information of the acceleration counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Further, when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "0", the switching interval is 1 interrupt. Therefore, once the numerical information of the acceleration counter becomes "0", the excitation phase is switched in accordance with the numerical information of the excitation order pointer each time the timer interrupt process is executed. This state is a constant speed state.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the control of the stepping motor 600 has ended for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR (S2006), and the control for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR is determined. When the control of the stepping motor 600 is completed (S2006: Yes), the excitation data for each of the rotating reels LR, CR, and RR is output to the input/output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display control device 114 (S2007). ), this motor control process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if the control of the stepping motor 600 has not been completed for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped, and this motor Control processing ends.

Output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 is a data writing process to the output port (not shown) corresponding to the input/output port 608, so the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) receives excitation data. This means that excitation data is supplied simultaneously with writing to the input/output port 608. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately performs the process of energizing the excitation phase designated by the excitation data, and the excitation process for the rotating portion 602 is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol, are simultaneously moved by normal acceleration processing. Start rotating. Then, when a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotated at a high and constant speed, is the second temporary stop symbol on the left reel LR, and the left reel LR, which is displayed stopped at the first temporary stop symbol, is specially accelerated. Rotation starts due to processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the above-mentioned high speed constant rotation, the second temporary stop symbol on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbol on the middle reel CR and right reel RR are aligned horizontally. It is set to rotate at a high and constant speed while maintaining the same speed. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol reaches the active line in the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which were being rotated at a high and constant speed, are simultaneously and so-called bit stopped, and the reels are placed on the effective line in the middle stage. The second temporary stop symbols are respectively stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be simplified, reducing the control burden, and at least in the second half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the number symbols are Since the number symbols can be rotated while aligning them with no blank area in the horizontal direction, it does not give the player a sense of discomfort, prevents them from losing interest in the game, and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, have a change time from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music to be output during the change time is set to BPM 120, which indicates the number of beats in one minute, and one measure of the music is output in 4/4 time. . Then, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure. Configure it to start rotating at the timing of . With this configuration, during the "full rotation" performance, the difference in the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be compensated for by the beat of the music that can be recognized by the player's hearing. By combining these, the discrepancies caused by visual recognition are canceled out (suppressed) by the harmonization (synchronization) of the tempo perceived by hearing, and the "Full Rotation" performance does not give players any sense of discomfort, and the "Full Rotation" performance has the highest jackpot expectation in the game. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the performance of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the sound for one bar of the music is output, and the sound for the one bar is output. The rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR is started on the first beat of the bar, and the rotation of the left reel LR is started on the second beat of the bar, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the song are determined. It was synchronized with. In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, it is possible to It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the performance of "full rotation", the main sound (for example, loud volume, main melody, female A tonic that forms a part (soprano or alto), melody line, etc., and auxiliary sounds to the tonic (for example, a volume lower than the loud volume, a sub melody (accompaniment), a male part (tenor or bass), a bass line, etc.) ), the tonic sound is output when the center reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating, and the subtone is output when the left reel LR starts rotating. Configure. In this case, the acceleration pattern for the middle reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, normal acceleration processing).

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, with reference to FIG. 71, the driving manner and timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" performance, and the output manner and timing of a music composed of a tonic and subtone will be explained. do. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of music during the production of "full rotation" in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, during the production of "full rotation" in the sixth embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (i.e. "1" symbol), are Rotation is started at the same time by normal acceleration processing (when the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotation in FIG. 71). Then, when a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotated at a high and constant speed, corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing when the left reel LR reaches the near side of the position (when the rotation of the left reel LR starts in FIG. 71), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol), is moved to the middle reel CR and Similar to the right reel RR, rotation is started by normal acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the above-mentioned high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 71), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (that is, the "2" symbol) and the second temporary stop symbols (ie, "2" symbols) of the middle reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at a high and constant speed while maintaining a horizontally aligned state. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which were rotating at a high speed and constant speed, are simultaneously and so-called bit stopped. Then, the second temporarily stopped symbols (namely, "2" symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 71).

With this configuration, the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be made common and the drive control can be simplified, reducing the control burden, and the first high-speed constant speed At least in the second half of the period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning each other without any blank area in the horizontal direction of the number symbols, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable and is prevented from losing interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do this, by adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, the period from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) when it is displayed in a stopped state during the production of "full rotation" and appears. It is configured to output a predetermined piece of music that is synchronized with the period during the period. Further, the music is composed of a tonic tone and a subtone, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR is configured to match the output start timing of the tonic tone and the output start timing of the subtone.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, during the "full rotation" performance, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) to the first symbol. The change time of the 2 temporary stop symbol (namely, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music to be output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the output of the tonic tone in the song starts, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the same time as the output of the tonic tone in the song starts. Configure it to start rotating at the right time.

In this case, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that changes the acceleration every 300ms. At the same time, the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) are rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped symbol to the second symbol is rotated in a total of 2000 ms. Changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in synchronization with the output of the tonic of the music for 2 seconds.

In addition, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, processes the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by normal acceleration processing of 300 ms, similar to the middle reel CR and right reel RR. At the same time, the remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) are rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol is rotated in a total of 1600 ms. The symbol changes from to the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the left reel LR starts rotating in synchronization with the output of the subtone that is output 400 ms after the start of the 2 second music.

Then, with all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high and constant speed, the tonic and subtones of the song are continuously output, and then when the song ends (middle reel CR and right reel RR 2000ms after the start of rotation), the rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR stops simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row. Ru.

By configuring in this way, during the "full rotation" performance, a music piece is created that allows the player to hear the discrepancy in the rotation start timing of the reels LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player. By driving in accordance with the output of each element, the above-mentioned visual discrepancy is canceled out (suppressed) by the auditory harmonization (synchronization) of the music, and the "full rotation" performance does not give the player a sense of discomfort and allows the game to be played. It is possible to suppress the player from becoming disinterested in the game in the "full rotation" performance, which has the highest expectation of a jackpot, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by commonizing and executing the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" performance with the normal acceleration process, there is no need to provide a special acceleration pattern such as special acceleration process. , the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be simplified, and the control burden regarding symbol control can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the sound for one bar of the music is output, and the sound for the one bar is output. Start the rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR on the 1st beat of the bar, and start the rotation of the left reel LR on the 2nd beat of the 1 measure, and determine the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the tempo of the song. It was synchronized with. In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, it is possible to It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, three or more sounds (for example, do-re-mi (code C) change from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. )) The first note (e.g., Domi), which is at least one note constituting the chord formed by synthesizing the chords, and the second note (e.g., G), which is the remaining note of the chord. At the same time as outputting a music (sound effect) composed of Configure. In this case, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern for the middle reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, normal acceleration processing).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, with reference to FIG. 72, the driving manner and timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full rotation" performance, and the music (sound effect) composed of the first sound and the second sound The output mode and timing will be explained. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of music during the "full rotation" performance in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, during the "full rotation" performance of the seventh embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (i.e. "1" symbol), are Rotation starts at the same time by normal acceleration processing (when the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in FIG. 72). Then, when a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotated at a high and constant speed, corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., “2” symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing when the left reel LR reaches the near side of the position (when the left reel LR starts rotating in Fig. 72), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol), is moved to the middle reel CR and Similar to the right reel RR, rotation is started by normal acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the above-mentioned high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 72), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (i.e., "2" symbol) and the second temporary stop symbols (ie, "2" symbols) of the middle reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at a high and constant speed while maintaining a horizontally aligned state. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which were rotating at a high speed and constant speed, are simultaneously and so-called bit stopped. Then, the second temporarily stopped symbols (namely, "2" symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line in the middle row (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 72).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. In order to do this, by adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music during the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol), It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, during the "full rotation" performance, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., "1" symbol) to the first symbol. The change time of the 2 temporary stop symbol (namely, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music to be output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the output of the first note of the song (in the seventh embodiment, the domi of the domiso triad) starts. , the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the timing of the start of output of the second note in the song that is the above chord (in the seventh embodiment, G of the triad of Do Re Mi). .

In this case, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) by normal acceleration processing that changes the acceleration every 300ms. At the same time, one frame of the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporarily stopped symbol to the second symbol is rotated in a total of 2000 ms. Changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, the middle reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in synchronization with the output of the first sound of the music for 2 seconds.

In addition, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, processes the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by normal acceleration processing of 300 ms, similar to the middle reel CR and right reel RR. At the same time, the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) are rotated at a high speed constant speed of 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol is rotated in a total of 1600 ms. The symbol changes from to the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the left reel LR starts rotating in synchronization with the output of the second sound, which is output 400 ms after the start of the 2 second music.

Then, with all the reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high and constant speed, the first and second notes of the song are continuously output to form a chord, and then the song ends. The rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped simultaneously in synchronization with the time (2000ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and right reel RR), and a second temporary stop symbol (i.e., "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, during the "full rotation" performance, the difference in the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be replaced with a chord that can be recognized by the player's hearing as a harmony. By driving in accordance with the output of the first and second sounds that make up the sound, the above-mentioned visual discrepancy is canceled out (suppressed) by the audible musical harmony, and the player is It is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" performance, which has the highest expectation of jackpot in the game, without giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when each reel LR, CR, RR from the second temporary stop symbol to the main stop symbol rotates, each reel LR, CR, RR from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol It may be configured to output a chord (for example, reshiso (chord G)) that does not cause a sense of discomfort in combination with the chord (for example, do-re-mi (chord C)) that was being output when the rotation of . With this configuration, the symbol control and audio output control during the entire "full rotation" performance are executed as an integrated and harmonious performance, and the "full rotation" performance does not give the player a sense of discomfort. First, it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest in the game in the "full rotation" performance, which has the highest expectation of jackpot in the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the domizo triad was output in accordance with the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR, but instead of this, other Triads (major triad, minor triad, augmented triad, diminished triad) and tetrachords (major seventh chord) (major seventh), minor seventh chord (minor seventh), minor major seventh chord (minor major seventh), diminished fifth minor seventh chord (half diminished), diminished seventh chord (diminished)・Configure it to output the following chords: 7th), augmented major 7th), and pentad chords (minor 9th chord, major 7th minor 9th chord). Good too.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first to sixth embodiments, and has the same effects.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred. For example, each embodiment can improve its performance by adding one or more parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing one or more parts of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values listed in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of an acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index of about 1.49 to 1.53). In contrast, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate resin, refractive index of approximately 1.59) or optical plastic (polymethyl methacrylate resin, refractive index of approximately 1.491 to 1.57). , nylon (nylon resin, refractive index approximately 1.53), or polyester (polyester resin, refractive index approximately 1.60). In this case, the shapes of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 (i.e., the left diffuser 425a, the front diffuser 425b, and the right diffuser 425c) are determined according to the refractive index of each resin. It is preferable to configure the configuration so that the first decorative pattern group 421 is reliably irradiated (diffused) with light by changing the configuration as appropriate.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, one recess in the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 has three sides: the left diffuser 425a, the front diffuser 425b, and the right diffuser 425c. The LEDs 422c and 424 are configured to diffuse light in three directions, ie, to the left, to the front, and to the right with respect to the direction in which the light is irradiated by the LEDs 422c and 424. On the other hand, one concave portion in the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 is configured with two sides or four or more sides, so that the light diffusion direction can be set in two directions or in four directions. It may be configured so that the direction is greater than or equal to the direction.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, one LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 in the rear light guide plate 420 is positioned so that they form a pair in the vertical direction (positions where they overlap in the vertical vertical direction). It was set up in Further, one LED of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c of the front light guide plate 410 was provided so as to form a pair in the left-right direction (positions overlapping in the horizontal left-right direction). On the other hand, one LED of the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424, or one LED of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c is located at a position where they do not overlap in the vertical up-down direction or the horizontal left-right direction. It may be configured to be provided so as to be shifted. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a blank area where no light is irradiated on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and to prevent each decoration from occurring on the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. The symbols 411, 412, 413, and 421 can be displayed reliably, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are formed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of one of the LEDs 422c and 424, respectively. It was configured like this. On the other hand, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed on the entire upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 can be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422c and 424, and the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 is improved. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 422c and 424.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, each side of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c, which constitute one concave portion of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425, They were constructed so that the lengths were equal. On the other hand, each side of the left diffusion section 425a, the front diffusion section 425b, and the right diffusion section 425c may have different lengths. In particular, when the sizes of the decorative patterns to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different, the length of each side may be formed depending on the size of the display objects. Specifically, for example, if there is a first display target whose display target size is a predetermined size and a second display target whose size is twice that of the first display target, the second display target The length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object is configured to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object. In this way, by forming the length of each side of the diffusion lens to correspond to the size of the display object, each display object can be appropriately illuminated.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is composed of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, each having a shape along the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 having a cylindrical outer shape. On the other hand, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a light guide plate that follows the outer circumferential shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate that has a shape unrelated to the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81 (for example, a flat plate shape). You may. Further, the light guide unit 400 may be configured with a plurality of light guide plates having a shape (for example, a flat plate shape) that is unrelated to the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Furthermore, in the case where the third symbol is displayed on a flat display device such as a liquid crystal display device instead of the drum display device 81, a light guide plate (for example, The light guide unit 400 may be configured with a light guide plate having a shape unrelated to the external shape of the liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape having a rounded portion in part). In addition, when the third symbol is displayed on a flat display device such as a liquid crystal display device instead of the drum display device 81, a shape unrelated to the external shape of the flat liquid crystal display device (for example, The light guide unit 400 may be configured with a plurality of light guide plates having a shape in which a portion has an R-shaped portion.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to be able to display three types of decorative patterns (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413), and The light plate 420 is configured to be able to display one type of decorative pattern (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421), and the two light guide plates 410, 420 can perform four types of effects, which are more than the number of light guide plates 410, 420. It was composed of On the other hand, three or more light guide plates may be configured to be able to perform a plurality of types (for example, four or more types) of effects that are greater than the number of light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, both the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to have a regular R-shaped portion that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. In contrast, the light guide plate on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed with a shape having a regular R shape, while the light guide plate on the back side is formed with a shaped part having an inverted R shape part that is opposite (pair) to the regular R shape. It may be configured to form. In this case, a predetermined presentation device (for example, a movable accessory or a liquid crystal display device) is provided in the space between the light guide plate having a regular R shape on the front side and the light guide plate having an inverted R shape on the back side. Good too. With this configuration, the light guide plate on the front side and the light guide plate on the back side create an integrated and powerful three-dimensional effect, which enhances the effect of each light guide plate and draws attention to the game. can be increased.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the vertical width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on. On the other hand, the execution mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed may be configured to be executed in a horizontally reduced manner. Further, when displaying the first decorative symbol group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the board first decorative symbol group 60a and the board second decorative symbol group 60b may be configured not to be executed. With this configuration, the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the fish school pattern at the top of the first decorative pattern group 421 is configured not to light up. On the other hand, when executing the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the display color of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the confirmation lamp 311 side is changed to the display color of the confirmation lamp 311 (for example, "red"). It may be configured to execute in a display color that is clearly different from that (for example, "blue"). With this configuration, the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. . Therefore, it is possible to configure the game so that the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is not obstructed. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the effects by the front light guide plate 410 and the effects by the rear light guide plate 420 are performed separately so as not to overlap. On the other hand, by performing the effects using the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 at the same time, a variety of effects can be performed and the effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the game. can increase the attention of

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the performance scale of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, or when the variable performance performed on the drum display device 81 is executed. In this case, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, or the scale of the variable performance may be reduced and executed. Examples of reduction in the production scale include reducing the production width or production range, reducing production color or production brightness, and reducing production time.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the drum display device 81 is used to determine whether or not to draw a jackpot by varying the third symbol. On the other hand, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, and a rotary belt display device are used to perform variable effects to perform a jackpot lottery. It may also be configured such that a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded depending on the result.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, a movable accessory is provided that can indicate the game result in the variable performance in advance, and when the range of motion of the movable accessory overlaps the performance part of the first decorative symbol group 421, the range of motion of the movable accessory is The production width of the first decorative pattern group 421 may be reduced so as not to overlap with the first decorative pattern group 421. Further, the movable range of the movable accessory may be reduced so as not to overlap with the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421. In this case, the system is configured to give priority to the performance with higher jackpot expectation for the variable performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it possible to distinguish between a plurality of performances so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and it is possible to highlight performances with high expectations for a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that it does not interfere with the performance that is important as a game.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end surface of the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is illuminated. The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 can be illuminated by allowing light to enter from the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 may be configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end face, and each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 may be configured to be lightable. Specifically, the front light guide plate 410 is configured so that light can enter from the horizontal end face of the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be lit, and the front light guide plate The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 may be configured to be able to be illuminated by allowing light to enter from the lateral end surface of the regular R-shaped portion 410.

In this case, regarding the lighting of the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, a condensing lens is used to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413. , 412 are configured so that they are not illuminated, while a diffusion lens is used to light up the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation level than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. When it is desired to light up the group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 may be clearly illuminated. Even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit and displayed while the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is turned on, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Also, it is possible to minimize discrepancies in performance and provide a game that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the placement positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 that shows the result of the variable presentation of the third symbol, are arranged are as follows: This is also the area where movable accessories and the like that perform the effects are stored and arranged. In this case, the LED boards for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 must be arranged so as to avoid the arrangement position and movable range of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory or LED There is a possibility that the degree of freedom in designing the board will be reduced. Therefore, an LED board for lighting up the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 that shows the result of the variation effect of the third pattern, is arranged. By forming the movable accessory in a location that does not interfere with its arrangement position and movable range (for example, above or below the front light guide plate 410), it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the movable accessory or the LED board. .

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 are lit on the rear light guide plate 420 so as to display the first decorative pattern group 421 moving from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be turned on so that the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed moving from below or above to above or below. In this case, the LEDs 422c and 424 are arranged in the left-right direction of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 arranged in the left-right direction are sequentially turned on from either direction to multiple directions. An effect such as moving and displaying the symbol group 421 from below or above to above or below may be performed.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 employs condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d to enable each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 to be lit, and the rear light guide plate 420 uses a diffusion lens. 423 and 425 were adopted, and the first decorative pattern group 421 was configured to be lightable. On the other hand, in one light guide plate, a condensing lens and a diffusing lens may be employed so that each decorative pattern can be illuminated. Specifically, for example, a low-reliability decorative pattern with a low jackpot expectation is placed in a position where it can be seen by lighting a condensing lens, and a high-reliability decorative pattern with a high jackpot expectation is placed in a position where it can be seen by lighting a diffuser lens. Arrange it so that it is visible. In this case, when lighting a low-reliability decorative pattern, the configuration is such that the high-reliability decorative pattern cannot be lit due to the condensing of light by the condensing lens; is configured so that the low-reliability decorative pattern can be illuminated by the diffusion of light by the diffusion lens. Even if a low-reliability decorative pattern is displayed while a high-reliability decorative pattern is lit, the discrepancy in performance is small. Therefore, even if a low-reliability decorative pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when a high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, discrepancies in performance can be minimized. It is possible to provide the player with a game that does not make him or her feel uncomfortable.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, and the second decorative pattern group 411 and third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative pattern group, are placed on the front side. A first decorative pattern group 421, which is formed collectively on the light plate 410 and has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern 412, is placed on the rear side different from the front light guide plate 410. It was formed on the light guide plate 420. In contrast, only the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, is formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421 and the second decorative pattern, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed on the front light guide plate 410. The group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 may be formed on the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment described above, each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413 is arranged so that none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are located in the region where the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 switch. was forming. On the other hand, there is a part where the upper flat plate part and the upper inverted R-shaped part switch, a part where the upper inverted R-shaped part and the normal R-shaped part switch, a part where the normal R-shaped part and the lower inverted R-shaped part switch, or , any one of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 may be located at a portion where the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are switched.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment described above, the light guide plates 410 and 420 are configured so that light enters from the upper flat plate part or the lower flat plate part. On the other hand, the light may be configured to enter from the end face of any one of the R-shaped portions.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, when performing a variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, the symbols on the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbols on the middle reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. Ta. In addition, "4" symbols that are not arranged on the left reel LR and right reel RR are arranged on the middle reel CR. For this reason, since there is no jackpot pattern including the "4" symbol as a jackpot forming pattern, a reach forming pattern including the "4" pattern cannot occur even in the "reach display". Therefore, when stepping up the reach-forming symbols in a performance such as "pseudo fluctuation", for example, when increasing the number of the reach-forming symbols in ascending order, it is not possible to perform a step-up performance that includes "4". Specifically, as a three-step step-up performance, you can perform "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7", but you can perform "2" → "3". → "4" or "3" → "4" → "5" cannot be performed. Therefore, when performing a step-up effect of a reach forming symbol using a "pseudo fluctuation" or the like, the step-up effect is configured to be performed from a symbol that does not include "4". With this configuration, it is possible to perform a presentation that does not cause any discrepancy in the presentation and does not give a sense of discomfort.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, when performing a variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, the symbols on the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbols on the middle reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. Ta. For this reason, when performing a so-called full rotation effect in which the symbols on all reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and fluctuated in a variation effect, the symbols on the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are both arranged in ascending order, are aligned. When the symbols on the middle reel CR and right reel RR that you want to temporarily stop during full rotation after starting rotation are lined up with the symbols on the left reel LR, the symbols on the left reel LR and the symbols on the middle reel CR and right reel RR Start rotating so that the patterns are aligned. Then, by temporarily stopping the aligned symbols on any active line (for example, the middle line) and repeating this a plurality of times, a full rotation effect is executed. In this case, by outputting music (sound effects) in accordance with the timing of temporary stop, and also outputting music (sound effects) in accordance with the start and during rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR, It is possible to perform powerful performances that are rhythmic and have a good tempo.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with a board first decorative pattern group 60a imitating a fish school pattern and a board second decorative pattern group 60b, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with a first decoration having the same form as the fish school pattern. A symbol group 421 is provided, and the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to perform an integrated performance. In this case, the fish symbols are arranged so that the first decorative symbol group 60a on the game board 13 or the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 complete one fish symbol. It may also be configured to arrange. Specifically, for example, a pattern in which a part of a fish is cut off is placed in the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, and the remaining pattern part of the fish is placed on the rear light guide plate 420 to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The structure is such that one fish pattern is formed when the With this configuration, the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can continuously perform an integrated effect in the left and right direction, and the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 Unnaturalness caused by discontinuity of one fish pattern in a portion can be suitably suppressed. Note that the size of each divided fish pattern is determined by taking into account the height difference between the board surface position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (height in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10), and It is preferable to configure the fish pattern 1 so that it can be recognized without any discomfort (without looking unnatural) when viewed from the front direction.

<Modification 24>
In the first embodiment described above, the display area forming member 430 is not provided with decorative patterns or the like, and the effective line on the drum display device 81 is made clear. On the other hand, a decorative pattern may be arranged on the display area forming member 430 so that an integrated performance can be performed with the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13. Specifically, for example, also in the display area forming member 430, a fish school decorative pattern having the same form as the fish school pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421, the board first decorative pattern group 60a, and the board second decorative pattern group 60b is formed, The game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 may be configured to perform an integrated performance. In this case, for example, a pattern in which a part of the fish is cut off is placed on the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, the rear light guide plate 420, or the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 is placed on the remaining pattern of the fish. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, one fish pattern is formed. With this configuration, the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430 can continuously perform an integrated performance in the left and right direction.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment described above, the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430 was configured with a plurality of rib shapes. On the other hand, the lens cut 432 is configured so that light from the outside is difficult to enter into the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 by a light diffusion process (for example, a texture process) that has a fine uneven shape. You can.

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is collected by each condensing lens 414d, 415d, 416d, and the directivity is set in the front direction of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c. The front light guide plate 410 was configured so that the light was incident on the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which light is incident on the front light guide plate 410 using a light emitting means having a directivity different from the above configuration. Specifically, for example, a lens may be used that absorbs light in directions other than the front direction and irradiates only the front light in the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c.

<Modification 27>
In the first embodiment, the left diffusion part 425a, the front diffusion part 425b, and the right diffusion part 425c of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured to have the same shape, and each diffusion The lenses 423 and 425 were configured to diffuse the light irradiated at the same angle, respectively. On the other hand, the shape of each diffusion part 425a etc. is formed to be different between the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425, and the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are formed to have different shapes. The angle of the light diffused may be different between the two. With this configuration, light is guided into the rear light guide plate 420 from various directions, and the light is guided comprehensively into the rear light guide plate 420, so that all the first decorations The symbol group 421 can be appropriately illuminated. In addition, by making the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 different from the traveling direction angle of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the first decorative pattern group It is possible to give randomness to the lighting (light emitting) display of the first decorative pattern group 421, and it is possible to suppress the light emitting display of the first decorative pattern group 421 from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, in the rear downward diffusion lens 425, all the concave portions commonly constitute the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c, and the rear light guide plate 420 The rear downward diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end was also configured to have a rightward diffusion section 425c or a leftward diffusion section 425a. On the other hand, in the rear downward diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightward diffusion section 425c or the leftward diffusion section 425a is not formed, and the frontward direction diffusion section 425b and the leftward diffusion lens 425 are not formed. The rear downward diffusion lens 425 may be configured to be formed only by the direction diffusion section 425a, or the front direction diffusion section 425b and the right direction diffusion section 425c. With this configuration, the light emitted by each LED 424 can be irradiated onto the rear light guide plate 420 without wasting it without diffusing the light in a direction where the first decorative pattern group 421 is not arranged.

<Modification 29>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 notify the jackpot expectation degree suggestion in the fluctuating performance, the confirmation lamp 311 notifies the jackpot occurrence suggestion in the fluctuating performance, and different display devices notify each suggestion. It was configured to run. On the other hand, the jackpot expectation level suggestion and the jackpot occurrence suggestion may be executed by one display device, for example, one light guide plate, drum display device 81, or liquid crystal display device. In this case, when the execution timing of the jackpot occurrence suggestion and the jackpot expectation suggestion are combined, the execution area of the jackpot expectation suggestion during execution is It is preferable to reduce the size and execute the jackpot occurrence suggestion.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are disposed on the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variable effect of the third symbol, and the light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to perform the variable effect. It was configured to execute a preview performance. On the other hand, one or more movable accessories such as a shutter accessory may be arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the movable accessory may be configured to execute a preview performance in the variable performance.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the area of the drum display device 81 that is visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is defined as an effective line. It was configured as On the other hand, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be drivable, and the display area of the drum display device 81 that can be viewed from the central opening 431 may be configured to be variable, so that the number of effective lines can be changed. .

<Modification 32>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided at the lower side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (the lower side of the first starting port 64a when viewed from the front), and the variable winning device 65 has a big winning hole 65a that can be opened and closed only when a jackpot is won. It was equipped with only the function of a winning device for game balls. On the other hand, the variable winning device 65 includes a first special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variable performance of the first special symbol that can notify the execution status of the variable performance of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol lamp that variably displays the execution status of the variable performance of the first special symbol. A second special symbol lamp that is variably displayed in response to the variable performance, a first pending number lamp that corresponds to the number of pending special symbols, a second pending number lamp that corresponds to the number of pending special symbols, and a second special symbol lamp that corresponds to the pending number of the second special symbol. A so-called fourth pattern display, such as a firing mode notification lamp (so-called right-handed notification lamp) that indicates the firing mode to the player, an error notification lamp that notifies the player that normal play cannot be executed in the pachinko machine 10, etc. Functions such as a device or a game situation suggesting device may be added. With this configuration, the game situation can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65, so even if the drum display device 81 or various notification lamps are out of order, the variable winning device 65 The notification function makes it possible to accurately suggest the game situation, etc. to the player. In addition, the variable winning device 65, through gate 67, and second starting port 64b are arranged on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, so that a gaming state advantageous to the player (i.e., a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state") is created. ), in the case of a pachinko machine that allows players to play a so-called right-handed game, by adding functions such as a so-called fourth symbol display device and a game situation suggesting device to the variable prize winning device 65, the above-mentioned game By checking the variable winning device 65 in this state, it becomes possible to briefly suggest the game content (results) to the player.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in the same shape. On the other hand, the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be configured to be different. Specifically, for example, the rear is adjusted so that the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is different from the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425. The shapes of the side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear side lower diffusion lens 425 are configured. With this configuration, randomness is created in the overlap between the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear lower diffuser lens 425, and unexpectedness is created. A lighting display of a certain decorative pattern can be realized, and various performances can be performed.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment, the optical path widths of the lights emitted from the left diffuser 425a, the front diffuser 425b, and the right diffuser 425c that form one concave portion of the rear downward diffuser lens 425 are the same. Thus, the side lengths of the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c were formed. On the other hand, the optical path widths of the lights irradiated from the left direction diffusion section 425a, the front direction diffusion section 425b, and the right direction diffusion section 425c may be formed to be different from each other. Specifically, for example, the side lengths of the left diffuser 425a, the front diffuser 425b, and the right diffuser 425c are configured to be the same (for example, all 50 μm), and the light emitted from the front diffuser 425b is The width of the optical path of the light emitted from the left diffusion section 425a and the right diffusion section 425c may be different from each other. With this configuration, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusion parts 425a to 425c, and it is possible to realize a lighting display of an unexpected decorative pattern and perform various effects.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 are arranged so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated. It was composed. On the other hand, an LED (for example, front right LED 415c) corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is arranged only on one side (for example, right direction), and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is displayed by lighting. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the installation cost of the LED can be reduced.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, in order to display each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 on the front light guide plate 410 by lighting, each condenser lens 414d condenses the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 415d and 416d were placed. On the other hand, at least one of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, 416d is not arranged, and depending on the part, the light irradiated from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is The light may be configured to be irradiated directly onto the front light guide plate 410 without using a filter or the like. In particular, the LEDs corresponding to parts where there is little need to condense the light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c (for example, decorative patterns in which different decorative patterns are not adjacent to each other (i.e., the fourth decorative pattern group 413)) is configured so that no condensing lens is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the condensing lens in the portion where the discrepancy in presentation is unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts of the light guide unit 400, and reduce manufacturing costs.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 are formed on the upper end surface of the upper rear flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the lower rear flat plate portion, respectively. , 425, the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated and displayed. In contrast, the diffusion lens 425 is formed only on one end surface (for example, the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate part), and the diffusion lens 425 is formed on the other end surface (for example, the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate part). It may be configured such that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on the one end surface without forming a lens. With this configuration, the number of parts of the light guide unit 400 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the two light guide plates 440 and 450, the second front light guide plate 440 has the second front downward inverted R-shaped part 440a, which is the only R-shaped part in the second front light guide plate 440, and The light guide unit 400 was formed by the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second rear light guide plate 450. On the other hand, as the light guide unit 400, the front light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has a regular R shape part (i.e., in the same direction as the front side outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81) as the only R shape part. A front light guide plate having an R shape) and a rear light guide plate located on the back side of the front light guide plate have an inverted R shape part (i.e., an outer peripheral shape on the front side of the drum display device 81) as the only R shape part. A rear light guide plate having a reverse R-shaped portion) may also be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to form a predetermined space between the upper flat plate portions of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate. By configuring the movable accessory to be able to appear (appear, appear, etc.), it is possible to perform a variety of effects using the light guide unit 400 and other effect devices, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Further, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 each having a unique rounded portion were provided on the lower side of the drum display device 81. On the other hand, a light guide plate having only one R-shaped portion may be provided above, on the left side, or on the right side of the drum display device 81.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment, the two light guide plates 440 and 450 are each configured to have a rounded portion. In contrast, the R-shaped portion is formed only on one of the light guide plates 440, 450, and the R-shaped portion is not formed on the other light guide plate 450, 440, that is, the light guide plate is configured with only a flat plate portion. Good too. Alternatively, various effects may be performed using only one light guide plate having one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 (second rear lower decorative pattern 453) provided on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a) is In order to turn on the light, a second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) is arranged below the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a). Ta. On the other hand, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 (second rear upper decorative pattern 452) may be configured to be able to be lit by the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451). With this configuration, restrictions regarding the arrangement of LEDs in the light guide unit 400 can be relaxed, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

<Modification 41>
In the first embodiment, two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided, and light is irradiated onto one light guide plate 410 via the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and diffused onto the other light guide plate 420. It was configured to irradiate light through lenses 423 and 425. Further, in the third embodiment, one light guide plate 470 is provided, and light is irradiated to the light guide plate 470 through condensing lenses 475b and 476b, and light is irradiated through a diffusion lens 473. It was composed. On the other hand, when two light guide plates are provided, one light guide plate may have only one condenser lens, multiple condenser lenses, or one condenser lens, depending on the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit. Light is irradiated with only a diffusion lens, multiple diffusion lenses, a combination of a condenser lens and a diffusion lens, or neither a condenser lens nor a diffusion lens, and one condenser lens is used for the other light guide plate. It may be configured to irradiate light with only one condensing lens, one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens. . In addition, when one light guide plate is provided, depending on the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit, only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, or one diffusing lens may be used for the light guide plate. Alternatively, light may be irradiated using a combination of a plurality of diffusing lenses, a condensing lens, and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens. With this configuration, a desired lighting display can be performed on the decorative pattern on the light guide plate by appropriately employing a condensing lens or a diffusing lens depending on the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit. , it is possible to enhance the presentation effect on the light guide plate and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 41>
In the fourth embodiment, "chance" symbols are arranged on each reel LR, CR, and RR, and a game is created in which the "chance" is determined to stop or not. On the other hand, the "chance" symbols may not be arranged on each reel LR, CR, and RR, and the symbol arrangement may be made up of only numerical symbols. By configuring in this way, the acceleration/deceleration pattern and constant speed necessary to skip the "chance" symbols when the "chance" symbols are arranged during the "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element and full rotation can be adjusted. It is possible to simplify symbol control such as changing the fluctuation time scale and fine adjustment of slip return, and to standardize the acceleration/deceleration pattern, fluctuation time, and slip return variations of each reel LR, CR, and RR. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden of symbol control on each reel LR, CR, and RR.

<Modification 42>
In the fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo stop symbol in the variable element of "pseudo variation" has been described. On the other hand, the symbol control of the pseudo-stop symbols may be configured to be adopted in a re-lottery performance or a full rotation performance in which the jackpot symbol changes during a variable performance. With this configuration, the symbol control pattern in the re-lottery performance and the symbol control pattern in the "full rotation" performance can be simplified, and the control burden regarding symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 43>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, the symbol control and audio output control in the "full rotation" performance have been explained. On the other hand, the above-mentioned symbol control and audio output control can be controlled by other variable elements in the variable performance, such as the variable element of "pseudo variation", the variable element of "re-variation", or any of the "reach display". It may be configured to be adopted in a part of the performance. With this configuration, by linking the symbol control and audio output control in the fluctuating production, the sense of discomfort caused by the symbol control is canceled out (suppressed) by the auditory musical harmony, and the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

<Modification 44>
In the first embodiment, on each reel LR, CR, and RR, "chance" symbols, which are symbols that do not award a jackpot just by aligning and develop into one of the "reach displays", are arranged. On the other hand, on each reel LR, CR, and RR, "chance" symbols that do not directly award a jackpot are not arranged, and the symbol arrangement is made up of only numerical symbols that can directly award a jackpot when aligned. You can. With this configuration, when performing the so-called symbol step-up performance during the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" or the "full rotation" performance, symbol control can be performed without considering the "chance" symbol. As a result, by simplifying symbol control, the control burden regarding symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 45>
In the fourth embodiment, the "345" symbol, which is not arranged on the other reels LR and RR, is arranged on the middle reel CR. On the other hand, the middle reel CR may also have the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, and may be configured with an arrangement that does not include special symbols such as the "345" symbol. With this configuration, when performing the so-called symbol step-up performance during the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" or the "full rotation" performance, symbol control can be performed without considering the "345" symbol. As a result, by simplifying symbol control, the control burden regarding symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 46>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the output and non-output of music are alternated every time a temporary stop is made during the "full rotation" performance. On the other hand, a predetermined music piece may be continuously output during the "full rotation" performance, and other music pieces may be outputted in conjunction with each temporary stop and rotation start.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted by each LED 414c and the like is configured to enter from either end of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. On the other hand, for example, by providing a predetermined recess in the flat plate part or the R-shaped part of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 and irradiating the light to the recess, the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 can be It may be configured to irradiate light toward the inside of the light guide plate 420 and guide the light to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of each LED 414c can be improved.

<Modification 48>
In the first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, It was configured to perform a variation effect of the third symbol attached to the RR. On the other hand, by rotating each belt member by a rotating belt type reel mechanism composed of a plurality of belt members wound around a plurality of pulleys in a loop shape and having a plurality of third designs printed on them, the belt members are rotated. , a variation effect of the third symbol attached to each belt member may be performed.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, the first decorative pattern group 421 is moved from the right side to the left side in the front view by lighting and displaying the LEDs 422c and 424 in order from the right end in the front view to the left side in the front view in the rear light guide plate 420. It was configured to perform an effect as if it were moving. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in order from the right end of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view to the left side in the front view, and the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in order from the left end of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view to the right side in the front view. The first decorative pattern group 421 may be displayed as if it were moving from both ends of the rear light guide plate 420 toward the center.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, that is, when the lighting display of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the lighting display of the confirmation lamp 311 can be performed at the same time, In order to clearly execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 which is highly important for the game (suggesting that the jackpot probability is high), the performance area of the first decorative pattern group 421 is configured to be reduced. On the other hand, when the execution of multiple performances overlaps, a predetermined priority order (for example, high or low level of performance expectation, size or smallness of the performance execution area, early performance order) 1 based on the performance time or slowness, the length or shortness of the presentation time, the amount or amount of suggestive information (information to be transmitted to the player), the front side or rear side in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10, etc. It may be configured such that the presentation is performed preferentially (while other presentations are reduced). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize which effects should be prioritized based on predetermined rules set in advance.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 414c, etc. is collected by each condenser lens 414d, etc., and the light whose directivity is increased by the condensing lens 414d, etc. is directed almost directly in front of each LED 414c, etc. It was configured to emit light toward the front light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction. In contrast, the light emitted from each LED 414c etc. is configured to be directed toward the front light guide plate 410 with higher directivity than when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LED 414c etc. Good too. Specifically, for example, the light from each LED 414c, etc. is condensed using a condensing lens that can diffuse the light in the front direction of each LED 414c, etc. and in a diagonal direction (for example, about ±15 degrees) of the front direction. Alternatively, the front light guide plate 410 may be irradiated with the light in a slightly diffused manner.

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 424 etc. is diffused by each diffusion lens 425 etc., and the light whose diffusivity is increased by the diffusion lens 425 etc. is transmitted from each LED 424 etc. in the front direction. The structure was such that the light was guided in three directions: a left direction tilted at about 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and a right direction tilted at about 20 degrees to the right from the front direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each LED 424 etc. may be configured to be guided through the rear light guide plate 420 with higher diffusivity than when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LED 424 etc. good. Specifically, for example, the front direction of each LED 424, etc., the left direction tilted within about 15 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the right direction tilted within about 15 degrees to the right from the front direction. It may be configured such that the light from each LED 424 and the like is diffused and irradiated onto the rear light guide plate 420 using a diffusion lens capable of diffusing light.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the variation element of the "pseudo variation" is not executed in the pattern including the "4" symbol included in the "345" symbol arranged only on the middle reel CR. In other words, the non-common "4" symbols such as "2" → "3" → "4", "3" → "4" → "5", "4" → "5" → "6" etc. In addition to skipping patterns that include "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" → "6", which are non-common "4" symbols ( (omitted), and the variation element of "pseudo variation" in a pattern that indirectly includes the "4" symbol was also configured not to be executed. On the other hand, although the variation element of "pseudo variation" is not executed in a pattern that directly includes the non-common "4" symbol, "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" is not executed. A pattern that indirectly includes a non-common "4" symbol such as "→"6" may be configured to be executed as a pattern of the variable element of "pseudo variation." In this case, a pattern that does not include the "4" symbol is stored in advance, and the amount of change (amount of variation) in the symbol is different from the pattern that changes in the permutation (for example, "1" → "2" → "3"). Therefore, although symbol control different from the symbol control according to the permutation is required, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" and improve the interest of the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. The number of stages is not limited to six, and may be changed to any number of stages.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value, but the winning probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small winning may be changed.

In addition, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the startup process, a specific probability setting value (for example, ``1'') from the range of ``1'' to ``6'' is set as the probability. It may be forcibly set as a value. Note that if it is determined during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering some kind of disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the forced Execute the setting change process to have the parlor personnel change the probability setting value, prompt the parlor personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or change the probability setting value to normal. A specific probability setting within a range may be forced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction from the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is biased to return to its original position. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also allows the probability setting value to be easily changed.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", for example, and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100. The circuit board box 100 may be operable by a hall official or the like without opening the board box 100. This also allows the probability setting value to be determined easily.

In the above embodiment, when powering on the pachinko machine 10 and starting it in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, it may be configured such that at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the startup mode is set depending on the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, the hall may be configured to be able to select whether opening the inner frame 12 is to be a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the embodiments described above, the RAM erase switch 503 is installed in the main controller 110. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be installed in the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the embodiments described above, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed using the setting key 501. On the other hand, by using the setting key 501, you can change the number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won in one winning hole (for example, change from 3 balls to 5 balls), or drive a movable accessory that assists in winning a prize in the winning hole. The time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or the components that affect the flow of the ball (for example, the stage or croon on which the ball can roll). Settings related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed in multiple stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), etc. may be configured.

In each of the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 may be configured to face in the lateral direction (leftward or rightward) of the pachinko machine 10, in the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or to face the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You can.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the loss random numbers are set as continuous values, and whether or not it is a jackpot or a small win is determined by a range (for example, "0 or more"). 49 or less), and was configured to reduce the control burden on the main controller 110. On the other hand, each random number value (that is, the large winning random number value and the small winning random number value) that gives a gaming value may be arranged in a dispersed manner instead of being arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is updated with "0 to 999", the jackpot random number is set to "7,341,555,777,831", and the small hit random number is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845''.

Here, if a value that becomes a jackpot random number value exists continuously regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in a low probability state and a high probability state), There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a risk that there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be won fraudulently. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number value that gives a gaming value from the outside, increase the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, the jackpot random number for the low probability state and the jackpot random number for the high probability state specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. A jackpot random value may be set. With this configuration, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot can be changed by changing the value of the random number that results in a jackpot depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state). Since this can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number C2, etc. are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random numbers (so-called hard random numbers). With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is configured to increase evenly each time the set value increases. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value (or small win random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from the set value "1" to "3", the jackpot random number is increased by "2", while from the set value "4" to "6", the jackpot random number is increased by "5". Increase by increments. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be awarded changes greatly depending on the setting difference, and it is possible to provide a game with a rich intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the embodiment described above, the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small win type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small win is changed for each setting value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small win type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference occurs due to a change.

In the above embodiment, a common time saving counter is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to count the number of executions of each special symbol in the "time saving state". On the other hand, by using a special figure 2 time saving counter that counts only the number of fluctuating performances of the second special symbol, and a total time saving counter that counts the total number of fluctuating performances of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The end condition of the "time reduction state" may be determined by counting the number of dynamic displays of each special symbol in the "time reduction state", or only the number of times the first special symbol is displayed dynamically. A special figure 1 time-saving counter may be provided to count the number of executions of the first special symbol, and the "time-saving state" may be terminated depending on the number of executions of the first special symbol, and the conditions for ending the "time-saving state" may be determined. . With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the embodiment described above, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, each special symbol may be configured to be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is obtained (in the order in which it is reserved), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol is replaced by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be executed with higher priority.

In the above embodiment, in accordance with the setting change, the random number value that gives gaming value (i.e., jackpot random number value) is changed, and the changed amount is compensated for from the random number value that does not give gaming value (i.e., loss random number value). It was configured like this. On the other hand, if the random number value that gives gaming value (for example, jackpot random number value) is changed due to a setting change, the change will be applied to another random number value that gives gaming value (e.g., small winning random number number). ) may be configured to compensate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a difference in the game value that can be awarded for each setting, provide a game with a rich tone for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of small winning random numbers", "range of jackpot random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "range of re-jackpot random numbers")", " It may be configured such that each random number value is defined (set) so as to be arranged in the range of "loss random number value range". Here, the "range of re-jackpot random number values" is configured to correspond to the increase in the jackpot random number values due to the setting change. With this configuration, the random value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random value) is made adjacent to the random value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the losing random value), and The range of random numbers that do not change (that is, jackpot random numbers and small win random numbers that do not change even when settings are changed) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in a win/fail determination control program, the basic win/fail determination of a fixed random number value can be made common to all set values, while the increase in the jackpot random value due to setting changes can be additionally adjusted according to the set value. This makes it possible to easily design a control program and reduce development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in the following order: "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of small winning random numbers", and "range of loss random numbers". was. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in order of increasing (or decreasing) number of random values.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be arranged in the following order: "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of small winning random numbers", and "range of loss random numbers". was. In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a is defined (set) so that the "range of jackpot random numbers" that increases with the setting change is adjacent to the "range of loss random numbers" that decreases with the setting change. ). Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so that it is arranged in the following order: "range of small winning random numbers", "range of jackpot random numbers", and "range of loss random numbers". . With this configuration, the random value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random value) is made adjacent to the random value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the losing random value), and The range of random numbers that will not be changed (ie, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in a control program for determining whether a small hit is correct or not, the judgment of the small hit random value can be made common to all set values, and the increase in the jackpot random value due to a setting change can be additionally determined according to the set value. This makes it possible to easily design control programs and reduce development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (10 times higher) when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability variation state". On the other hand, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state", the small winning probability of the special symbol may be improved. Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if you set both the jackpot probability and the small win probability to be improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small win probability is also 5 times). good.

In the second embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game with the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small winning game with the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game with the first special symbol may be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game with the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small winning game with the first special symbol may be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game with the second special symbol. The winning probabilities of the small winning games may be configured to be the same.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, a so-called loop type game specification is adopted in which, when entering a "probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. On the other hand, a game in which a "probability fluctuating state" (so-called ST type) is given where the termination condition is to execute a dynamic display a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends, regardless of which jackpot is won after the jackpot ends. It may be configured by specifications. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and contribute to increasing the interest of the games.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability was configured to increase equally (all increased by 10 times) when the special symbol changes from a low probability state to a high probability state at all setting values. On the other hand, the increase rate of jackpot probability is changed for each setting value (for example, setting value "1" is 5 times, setting value "2" is 6 times, ... setting value "6" is 10 times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon of winning the jackpot game faster in the high probability state itself becomes a setting suggestion. Therefore, in a high-probability state, the game becomes interesting in that the player decides how quickly he or she can win the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that a setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. In contrast, the configuration is such that the setting difference in the jackpot probability in either state (low probability state or high probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or low probability state) is provided. You may.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for from the loss random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number may be compensated for from the small win random number and the loss random number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random number and the loss random number, and the change in the jackpot random number can be compensated for by a fixed number of jackpot random numbers. There is no need to compensate from a predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, there is no need to secure the number of the above-mentioned predetermined random numbers from the predetermined random number of 1 by the change in the jackpot random number, so there are no restrictions when designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, if there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion performance", the "setting suggestion performance" is configured to be performed at another timing (ending performance). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion performance", the "setting suggestion performance" may be configured to be executed in another round that exists in the jackpot. In this case, even though it is selected to execute the "setting suggestion effect" in a round other than the one that matches the probability setting value, if that round does not exist, the round that matches the probability setting value is excluded. It may also be configured such that "setting suggestion performance" is performed in other rounds.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggestion performance" is provided as a performance that suggests probability setting values that can be set in multiple stages, and the "setting suggestion performance" is configured to suggest to the player based on the probability setting value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, it may be configured such that multiple stages of events that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 are suggested to the player based on the lottery results. For example, which state (stage) is the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in which there are multiple stages (for example, "normal gaming state", "latent probability varying state", "probability varying state", and "time reduction state")? It may be configured to suggest which state (step) of a multi-stage production the player is in, or which state of a multi-stage jackpot expectation level the player is in. You can.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. Commands may also be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control device may be connected to the audio lamp control device, and the display control device may be configured to send commands for instructing output of each audio and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By incorporating these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation start flag is always set to ON when a stop type command is received. However, when a variation pattern command is received, When a stop type command is received after a change occurs, the fluctuation start flag may be set to on. Thereby, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation performance in a case where a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Further, the variation start flag may be set to on at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the fluctuation start flag is turned on, a display is displayed that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and sent to the display control device 114. This allows the display control device 114 to cause the drum display device 81 to perform a variable effect based on this display variation pattern command without waiting for the audio lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. . In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received, It may also be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variable performance executed by the drum display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the continuous preview effect may be executed on the drum display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the drum display device 81 may be provided, and the continuous notice effect may be executed on the drum display device 81. A continuous notice performance may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable performance. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. Further, a continuous preview performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with accessories that operate according to various performances and operating the accessories in a predetermined manner together with the variable performances. Further, by controlling the audio lamp control device 113 to output a sound for continuous preview performance from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, a continuous preview performance may be executed. A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable performance.

More specifically, the fourth symbol display device includes a first special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to a variable presentation of a first special symbol, and a second special symbol lamp that variably displays a variable display in response to a variable presentation of a second special symbol. A symbol lamp, a first reservation number lamp corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second reservation number lamp corresponding to the second special symbol are provided, and the first reservation number lamp corresponds to the winning to the first starting port 64a. lighting control (for example, displaying an increase or decrease according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol), and lighting control of the second reserved number lamp (for example, displaying an increase or decrease according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) in response to winnings in the second starting port 64b. (increase/decrease display according to the number of reserved balls), and the lighting control of the first special symbol lamp (for example, the first special symbol The lighting control of the second special symbol lamp (for example, the blinking display of the second special symbol lamp) is performed (for example, the lighting of the second special symbol lamp is controlled in accordance with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol). flashing display). In this manner, by notifying the type of special symbol being executed on the fourth symbol display device, it is possible to suggest to the player the execution mode of the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable effect is performed on the drum display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, the accessory operates in a predetermined manner, By outputting a sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting up or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a jackpot. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game by keeping an eye on the drum display device 81 where variable effects are performed, but the player also displays symbols on a fourth symbol display device that is separate from the drum display device 81, and A continuous notice performance is performed by the operation, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting/flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that it is easy to inform the player that a performance different from the usual one has been performed. It can be recognized. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By having the main control device 110 perform the correctness judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the lottery process. When performing a preview effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the drum display device 81, the display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, the audio output from the audio output device 226, Further, by combining at least two or more of the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other, a continuous preview effect may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display on the drum display device 81, display on the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, , combinations thereof), it is possible to prepare a plurality of continuous preview performance modes that are selected depending on the gaming state after the end of the continuous preview performance (10R definite strange jackpot, 5R definite strange jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, miss). .

Furthermore, when a continuous preview performance is performed, an image for the continuous preview performance that is different from the fluctuating performance may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous preview performance may be displayed when the fluctuating performance ends. This may be done by displaying a so-called "chance eye" which is a combination of predetermined symbols as the stopping symbol. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and , other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to OFF. In the command judgment process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed among other command processes, so the chance is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Set as a pattern. Therefore, the chance number can be displayed as confirmed when the variation is stopped. If the drum display device 81 continuously displays chance symbols as stop symbols for each variable performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she will finally get a jackpot.

In the embodiment described above, when there is a winning (starting prize) to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113. We have explained the case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer due to the starting prize is included as is and sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball count command to be notified to the pending ball count command. The types of counters included in the pitch count command may be part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The value of each counter acquired along with the winning start may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating performance corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the commands included in the command in one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to the number of suspensions, based on the information regarding the number of suspensions included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the embodiment described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for the number of held pitches, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the command for the number of held pitches may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of reserved pitches (or a command in which the value of each counter is indicated) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss Determine part or all of the type of deviation in the case of , and use these determination results in place of the value of each counter indicated by the command, or in combination with part or all of the value of the counter, It may also be stored in the RAM 223.

Further, for example, a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is performed with priority.

In the above embodiment, a case will be explained in which two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball enters. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, a corresponding held ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting hole, and for each starting hole, the number of held balls held as a result of winning the corresponding starting hole is displayed. The number may be counted. Further, for each starting hole, the maximum number of balls that can be held can be set in response to a winning start to the corresponding starting hole.

In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the ball has been held due to winning in the starting hole includes Information indicating whether the reservation may have been made by winning a prize in the starting slot may also be included. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which starting opening the variation effect was held on hold for. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a held ball number command is received, a held ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the held ball number command is set. When the number of held balls is set to , and a variable pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting hole by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the starting hole indicated in the variable pattern command by 1.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired in response to a winning (starting prize) at each starting hole. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in conjunction with the winning start is the one that was acquired in conjunction with the winning start in any of the starting openings. It may also include information indicating whether it exists. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting opening the fluctuation effect is associated with winning a starting prize. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in conjunction with a winning start to the corresponding starting hole is stored in a corresponding area. It may also be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variation performance for each starting point can also be held in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, in the case where the probability of a jackpot, the distribution probability of a jackpot type, the distribution probability of a loss type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won a starting prize, the pre-reading process determines whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variable performance. It is possible to correctly determine the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc., based on which starting opening the starting prize is entered into. In addition, if a variable performance based on a winning start at the first opening is given priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the other starting opening, the fluctuation based on a winning start at the first opening Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of times a fluctuating performance that will be the latest jackpot to be held can be correctly determined.

In addition, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a continuous notice when receiving the value of each counter acquired based on the starting prize to the starting port from the main control device 110 by command. When it is decided to start the performance, a continuous preview performance may be executed over all the variable performances (pending balls) that are on hold at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the starting prize has been won. In addition, in a pachinko machine that has multiple starting holes and performs a variable effect for a winning in one starting hole with priority over a variable effect for winning in any other starting hole, The start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value obtained in response to winnings in the starting opening where the variable performance is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of continuous notice performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in the starting slot with low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous preview performance is started for a fluctuating performance that corresponds to a prize winning in a starting slot with a low priority, and if the fluctuating performance is continuously suspended in a starting slot with a high priority, the continuous preview performance will take a long time to finish. There is a possibility that a situation may arise where this is not possible. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not determined whether or not the execution of a continuous preview performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in a starting slot with low priority, and the continuous preview performance is not determined for this variable performance. Since the process is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, the winning balls to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is four times. The number of times is not limited to three, or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, for winnings in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of balls to be held may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of balls to be held in each starting port is "4". ” may be any number other than ”. Further, the maximum number of balls held at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, is displayed numerically in a part of the drum display device 81, or the number of reserved balls is displayed in four divided areas. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by a few minutes, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured to do so.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to the vertically rotating reel drive by the drum display device 81, but can be caused by the horizontally rotating reel drive by the drum display device 81. Alternatively, the pattern may be displayed by moving the pattern as the identification information on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device along a predetermined path such as vertically, horizontally, or in an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Group A: Multiple display areas are displayed by lighting one LED using a diffusion lens>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting part (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guide means (for example, the rear side light guide plate 420);
A gaming machine A0 characterized in that it includes a diffusion means (for example, a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses light from the light emission means by a width of the light emission section.

According to the gaming machine A0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined part, predetermined information regarding the game is displayed. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the light emitting means by the width of the light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the light-emitting part of the light-emitting means can be made visible accurately, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A0,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the light guiding means is integrally formed at a predetermined end portion.

According to gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusing means is integrally formed at the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect that in the presentation means, the light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the presentation means.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The diffusion means is
At least a first direction irradiation section (for example, left direction diffusion section 425a) that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a predetermined first direction (for example, left direction), and a second direction (for example, left direction diffusion section 425a) different from the first direction. For example, a second direction irradiation section (for example, front direction diffusion section 425b) that emits light in the front direction); A game machine A2 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the multi-directional irradiation means provided in the diffusion means is provided with at least a first direction irradiation part that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a first direction, and a second direction irradiation part that irradiates light in a second direction. It will be done. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information arranged in multiple directions, and increases the attention to the game by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means. effective.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A2,
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the structure is such that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light emitting section is irradiated while being diffused in two directions by the diffusing means, so that the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the light emitting section of the light emitting means, or multiple pieces of information provided at different positions. It is possible to make the predetermined symbols visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the predetermined end portion is provided with a plurality of the multi-direction irradiation means.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, at a predetermined end, the diffusion means is provided with a plurality of multidirectional irradiation means. As a result, the light can be bundled and diffused in the first direction and the second direction by each multi-directional irradiation means, so that the predetermined information arranged in the first direction and the predetermined information arranged in the second direction This has the effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by making it possible to accurately visualize and enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means.

In gaming machine A4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a plurality of the multidirectional irradiation means are continuously formed at the predetermined end.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, at a predetermined end, a plurality of multidirectional irradiation means are continuously formed on the diffusion means. As a result, even if the light emitting part of the light emitting means is arranged at any part on the predetermined end side, the light emitting part in the light guiding means is illuminated by the multidirectional irradiation means continuously provided at the predetermined end. It is possible to continuously diffuse the light from the camera and make predetermined information visible. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be increased.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A5,
The multi-directional irradiation means
a third direction irradiation section (for example, right direction diffusion section 425c) that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a third direction (for example, right direction) different from the first direction and the second direction; A gaming machine A6 characterized by:

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third direction irradiation section provided in the multi-directional irradiation means irradiates the light from the light emitting means in a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction. This makes it possible to accurately view the predetermined information arranged in at least three directions, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. effective.

In gaming machine A6,
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third direction is configured not to intersect with the first direction and the second walking. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light emitting section is irradiated while being diffused in three directions by the diffusion means, so that it is possible to accurately visualize the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the light emitting section of the light emitting means. By increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A7,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the light guiding means is formed at at least two ends (for example, the upper end and the lower end of the rear light guide plate 420).

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least two end portions of the light guide means are provided with diffusion means. Thereby, by diffusing the light from each of the plurality of ends, it is possible to comprehensively diffuse the light with respect to the light guiding means. Therefore, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means can be made visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is.

In gaming machine A8,
The diffusion means is
A predetermined first end (for example, the lower end of the rear light guide plate 420) of the light guiding means, and a second end (for example, the upper end of the rear light guide plate 420) that is paired with the first end. A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that a side end portion) is formed at each side end portion.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the diffusing means is formed at a predetermined first end of the light guiding means and at a second end paired with the first end. Thereby, by diffusing the light from one end and the end paired with the end, it is possible to comprehensively diffuse the light with respect to the light guiding means. Therefore, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means can be made visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is.

<Group B: Designs are placed on the optical path, and designs are also placed where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group B have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting part that emits light (for example, one LED of the rear lower LED 424) and a second light emitting part different from the first light emitting part (for example, another LED of the rear lower LED 424). a light emitting means (e.g. a lower LED unit) having;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guide means (for example, the rear side light guide plate 420);
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B0 characterized in that it is formed at a position overlapping at least an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting section or an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light emitting section that emits light and a second light emitting section different from the first light emitting section. When the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the predetermined information is formed at least at a position overlapping the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be made accurately visible by the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section of the light emitting means, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, the game This has the effect of increasing attention to the

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting section that emits light (for example, one LED of the rear downward LED 424 or the front direction diffusion section 425b of the rear downward diffusion lens 425), and a second light emitting section different from the first light emitting section. (For example, another LED of the rear lower LED 424, or the left diffuser 425a or the right diffuser 425c of the rear lower diffuser lens 425). ,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means enters from a predetermined part, the predetermined effect includes predetermined information regarding the game (for example, a plurality of fish symbols in the first decorative symbol group 421 or a plurality of fish symbols in the first decorative symbol group 421). A light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the fish pattern (1) visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B1 is formed at a position overlapping at least an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting section or an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the presentation means has a first light emitting part that emits light and a second light emitting part different from the first light emitting part, and the light emitting means is provided with light emitted from the light emitting means. When the information enters from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the predetermined information is formed at a position that overlaps at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine using either the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, and enhancing the gaming experience. This has the effect of increasing attention to the

In gaming machine B1,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the gaming machine B2 is formed to have a size within a range of an optical path width of light emitted from the first light emitting section or an optical path width of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information is formed to have a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine using the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means and drawing attention to the game. It has the effect of increasing the

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the gaming machine B3 is formed in a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting part and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting part.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information is formed to have a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section. As a result, the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section can accurately make the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means and drawing attention to the game. It has the effect of increasing the level of

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B4 characterized in that an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting section and an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting section are formed at a position where they overlap.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting section and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting section overlap. As a result, the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section can accurately make the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means and drawing attention to the game. It has the effect of increasing the level of

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The light emitting means is
When the first light emitting section emits light of a predetermined first light emitting color (for example, "red"), the second light emitting section emits a second light emitting color (for example, "blue") different from the first light emitting color. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is equipped with a unique color light emitting means that emits light of.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first light emitting section emits light of a predetermined first emitted color, the second light emitting section emits light of a second emitted color different from the first emitted color by the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means. It is configured as follows. As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors, and the effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine B5,
The predetermined information is
consisting of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion,
The different color light emitting means is
A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the first predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the first light emitting portion, and the second predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion. .

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information is composed of a first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion. The different color light emitting means irradiates the first predetermined portion with the light emitted from the first light emitting portion, and irradiates the second predetermined portion with the light emitted from the second light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in different colors, and the predetermined information can be emitted in a variety of display colors, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means and increasing the attention to the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines B1 to B6,
A gaming machine comprising: a diffusion means (for example, a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light emission means by a width of the first light emission section or the second light emission section. B7.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means by the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part of the light emitting means can be made visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, the game This has the effect of increasing attention to the

In gaming machine B7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusing means is integrally formed at the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect that in the presentation means, the light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the presentation means.

<Group C: Sequentially lighting up different LEDs for each divided area in a predetermined direction, moving display & colorful display>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions in group C were made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the attention level to the game.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting section that emits light (for example, the right end LED of the rear lower LED 424) and a second light emitting section disposed on the side in a predetermined direction from the first light emitting section (for example, the right end of the rear lower LED 424). (one LED to the left of the LEDs), and a third light emitting part (two LEDs to the left of the right end LED of the rear downward LED 424) disposed further to the predetermined direction side from the second light emitting part. a light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a rear side light guide plate 420);
A gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising a sequential lighting means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) that sequentially lights the light emitting means from a predetermined direction side.

According to the gaming machine C0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the presentation means includes a first light emitting part that emits light, a second light emitting part disposed on the side in a predetermined direction from the first light emitting part, and a second light emitting part disposed further in a predetermined direction from the second light emitting part. A third light emitting section disposed on the side is provided. When the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means are sequentially turned on from the predetermined direction side by the sequential lighting means. As a result, the predetermined information provided on the light guide means can be made visible sequentially from the predetermined direction, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

Equipped with a production means (for example, the light guide unit 400, or the light guide unit 400 and the game board 13) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
At least a first light emitting section that emits light (for example, the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 or the board first decorative pattern group 60a), and a predetermined direction from the first light emitting section. A light emitting means having a second light emitting section (for example, the lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 or the rear light guide plate 420) disposed on the (for example, left side when viewed from the front) side. (For example, the lower LED unit 414 or the game board 13),
A light guide means (for example, for example) that makes predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least for the second light emitting section). a rear light guide plate 420);
The light emitting means is a sequential light emitting means that sequentially emits light from the first light emitting part toward the predetermined direction (for example, lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113, or lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113) 1 decorative symbol group 421, lighting control of a board first decorative symbol group 60a and a board second decorative symbol group 60b).

According to the gaming machine C1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light emitting section that emits light, and a second light emitting section disposed on the side in a predetermined direction from the first light emitting section. When light is emitted from the light emitting means to the light guiding means, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means sequentially emits light in a predetermined direction from the first light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information provided on the presentation means can be made visible sequentially from the placement position of the first light emitting section toward the predetermined direction, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, the game This has the effect of increasing attention to the

In the gaming machine C1,
Sequential light extinguishing means for sequentially extinguishing the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting section toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means (e.g., by the audio lamp control device 113) A game machine C2 characterized in that it is equipped with a lights-out control).

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the sequential light-off means, the light-emitting means, which have been sequentially emitted from the first light-emitting section toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light-emitting means, are sequentially extinguished toward the predetermined direction after the first light emission. As a result, after the predetermined information provided in the presentation means is made visible sequentially from the placement position of the first light emitting section toward the predetermined direction, the predetermined information is made sequentially invisible or difficult to see from the first light emitting section toward the predetermined direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform an impressive effect that makes it appear as if the predetermined information is moving in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is disposed. As a result, by increasing the performance effect of the performance means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2,
The sequential light emitting means is
A game machine C3 characterized in that it is provided with a light emitting color succession means for causing the second light emitting part to emit light in the same color as the light emitted by the first light emitting part.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second light emitting section is caused to emit light, the second light emitting section is caused to emit light with the color of light emitted by the first light emitting section by the emitted light color succession means provided in the light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to perform an impressive effect in which the predetermined information, which is visible in a predetermined luminescent color, appears to be moving in a predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is disposed. As a result, by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
The sequential light emitting means is
A game machine C4 characterized in that it includes at least a different color light emitting means for making the first light emitting part and the second light emitting part different in emitted color.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the different color light emitting means provided sequentially in the light emitting means are configured so that at least the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section emit light of different colors. Thereby, it is possible to perform a colorful effect as if the predetermined information, which is made visible in a plurality of colors, moves in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is disposed. As a result, by increasing the performance effect of the performance means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine C4,
The different color light emitting means is
After the first light emitting section emits a predetermined first light emitting color (for example, "red"), the second light emitting section emits light in the first light emitting color, and the first light emitting section emits light in the first light emitting color. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it emits light in a second luminescent color (for example, "blue") that is different from the luminescent color.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the first light-emitting section emits a predetermined first light-emitting color by the different-color light-emitting means, the second light-emitting section emits light with the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting section is different from the first light-emitting color. Light is emitted in the second emitted color. Thereby, it is possible to perform a colorful effect as if the predetermined information, which is made visible in a plurality of colors, moves in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light emitting section is disposed. As a result, by increasing the performance effect of the performance means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C5,
The production means is
At least, a predetermined first effect means (for example, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface) provided on the game area forming member (for example, the game board 13) through which the game ball can flow;
A second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420);
The sequential light emitting means is
A gaming machine C6 characterized in that after emitting light to the first effecting means, light is emitted to the second effecting means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the presentation means, at least a predetermined first presentation means is provided on the gaming area forming member through which the game ball can flow down, and dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the side of the first presentation means in a predetermined direction. A second presentation means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the possible display means. Then, the light emitting means sequentially emits light to the first effecting means, and then to the second effecting means. Thereby, by performing an integrated performance by the first performance means in the gaming area forming member and the second performance means provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the display means where the dynamic display of the identification information is performed, It is possible to perform a powerful performance by dynamic display of identification information and a predetermined performance based on predetermined information, and by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine C6,
A gaming machine C7 characterized in that, as the predetermined information, the first presentation means and the second presentation means visibly display the same type of symbol.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the predetermined information, the same type of symbol is visibly displayed on the first presentation means and the second presentation means. As a result, by performing a series of integrated performances with the first performance means and the second performance means, it is possible to perform a powerful performance, and by increasing the performance effect of the performance means, the attention to the game is increased. It has the effect of increasing the

In gaming machine C7,
A gaming machine C8 characterized in that, as the predetermined information, the first presentation means and the second presentation means form one symbol.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the predetermined information, one symbol is formed by the first presentation means and the second presentation means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of discomfort when performing a performance that spans the first performance means and the second performance means, and to perform a series of integrated performances, thereby making it possible to execute a powerful performance. This has the effect of increasing the attention to the game by increasing the performance effect of the performance means.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine C9 characterized in that the predetermined information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end, the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect of the performance means having the light guide means and increasing the attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C9,
A gaming machine comprising: a diffusion means (for example, a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light emission means by a width of the first light emission section or the second light emission section. C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means by the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part of the light emitting means can be made visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, the game This has the effect of increasing attention to the

In the gaming machine C9 or C10,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the diffusing means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect that in the presentation means, the light guiding means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the presentation means.

<Group D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other.>

Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

The inventions of group D have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second effect means (for example, a confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of a confirmation lamp 311) that is more important for the game than the first effect as the game progresses;
The first presentation means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting part (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guide means (for example, the rear side light guide plate 420);
a second effect that executes the second effect preferentially over the first effect when the second effect is executed by the second effect and the first effect is executed by the first effect; A gaming machine D0 characterized in that it is equipped with a performance priority means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D0, the first performance means performs the first performance as the game progresses. Further, as the game progresses, the second performance means performs a second performance that is more important to the game than the first performance. The light emitting means provided in the first presentation means has a light emitting part that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined part, the The predetermined information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, when the second performance is executed by the second performance means and the first performance is executed by the first performance means, the second performance is prioritized over the first performance by the second performance priority means. executed. As a result, even if the first performance and the second performance overlap, the second performance, which is more important for the game than the first performance, is executed preferentially, and the second performance is made more noticeable than the first performance. I can do it. Therefore, the performance content of the second performance, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the players, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

A first effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
a second performance means (for example, a confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second performance different from the first performance (for example, lighting or non-lighting of a confirmation lamp 311) as the game progresses;
a first performance reduction that is performed by reducing the scale of the first performance when the second performance can be performed by the second performance means and the first performance can be performed by the first performance means; A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is equipped with means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D1, the first performance means performs the first performance as the game progresses. Further, the second performance means performs a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses. Here, when the second performance can be performed by the second performance means and the first performance can be performed by the first performance means, the first performance reduction means reduces the performance scale of the first performance and executes the first performance. be done. Thereby, even if the first performance and the second performance are executed in parallel, by reducing the scale of the first performance, it is possible to make the second performance relatively noticeable. Therefore, at least, the performance content of the second performance can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Furthermore, "to reduce the scale of the production" means, for example, when reducing the execution area of the production, or reducing or reducing the size and amount of the symbols that appear as a production, the attention level (jackpot expectation level) ), when replacing a performance with a high level of attention to a performance with a low attention level, when reducing the luminance of the performance (increasing transparency), when decreasing the volume of the performance, or when performing other performances preferentially (toward the front side). For example, this may make it relatively difficult to see.

In the gaming machine D1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is a performance with a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value is given than the first performance.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance is set as a performance with a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the first performance. This results in
Even if the first performance and the second performance are executed in parallel, the scale of the first performance, which has a lower expectation that it will be given a predetermined gaming value than the second performance, is reduced, and the scale of the first performance is relatively lower than that of the second performance. By giving priority to executing the second effect, it is possible to make the second effect stand out. Therefore, the performance content of the second performance, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the players, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
a first performance lottery means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d) for determining whether or not to execute the first performance;
a second effect lottery means (for example, a confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e) for randomly selecting whether or not to execute the second effect;
A first performance that determines whether or not to execute the first performance based on the lottery result of the first performance lottery means when executing the second performance based on the lottery result of the second performance lottery means. A determination means (for example, light guide pattern setting process (S1415)),
The first performance reduction means is
A gaming machine D3 characterized in that when the first performance determining means determines that the first performance is to be executed, the performance scale of the first performance is reduced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance lottery means randomly selects whether or not to perform the first performance, and the second performance lottery means determines whether or not to perform the second performance. Further, when executing the second performance based on the lottery result of the second performance lottery means, the first performance determination means determines whether or not to execute the first performance based on the lottery result of the first performance lottery means. It is determined. When the first performance determining means determines that the first performance should be performed, the first performance reduction means reduces the performance scale of the first performance. As a result, even if the first performance and the second performance, in which the execution lottery is held separately, can be executed in parallel, the performance of the first performance depends on whether or not the first performance is executed. By reducing the scale, the second performance can be made relatively more noticeable. Therefore, at least, the performance contents of the second performance can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the players, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The first performance is
A gaming machine D4 that can be executed in a wider area than the performance area of the second performance.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance can be performed in a wider area than the second performance. In other words, even if the second performance and the first performance, which has a larger performance area than the second performance, are executed in parallel, by reducing the scale of the first performance to be executed, Since the scale of the performance is reduced, the second performance can be made more noticeable. Therefore, the content of the second performance can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
The first presentation means is
A light emitting unit including a first light emitting section that emits light (for example, the rear lower LED 424) and a second light emitting section that emits light (for example, the rear upper LED 422c);
As the first effect, when light is emitted from at least one of the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section, an irradiated means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes predetermined information regarding the game easily visible. 420) and,
The first effect reduction means is
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect and the first effect can be executed by the first effect, the light from either the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part A gaming machine D5 comprising: an irradiation reduction means that reduces or stops irradiation of light to reduce a visible range of the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the first effect means, light is emitted from a first light emitting section provided on the light emitting means, and light is emitted from a second light emitting section also provided on the light emitting means. Further, as the first effect, when light is emitted from at least one of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, predetermined information regarding the game is easily visible by the irradiated means. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect and the first effect can be performed by the first effect, the irradiation reduction means provided in the first effect reduction means causes the first light emitting part to Alternatively, the irradiation of light from either one of the second light emitting parts is reduced or stopped, and the visible range of the predetermined information is reduced. As a result, even if the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the irradiation of light from either the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section used for the first effect can be reduced or By stopping and reducing the visible range of the predetermined information as the first effect, it is possible to make the second effect relatively noticeable. Therefore, at least, the performance content of the second performance can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Note that "reducing or stopping light irradiation" refers to, for example, reducing the light emitting area, reducing the light emission brightness, stopping or interrupting the light emission, or reducing the light emission time. Examples include a case where the amount of light is decreased, or a case where light is emitted intermittently.

In the gaming machine D5,
The irradiation reducing means includes:
A gaming machine D6 characterized in that irradiation of light from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section corresponding to the predetermined information on the second presentation means side is reduced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the irradiation reduction means reduces or stops the irradiation of light from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section corresponding to the predetermined information on the second presentation means side. As a result, by reducing the visible range of the predetermined information on the second presentation means side among the predetermined information, at least the first presentation performed in the vicinity of the second presentation is made less noticeable, and the second presentation is made relatively more conspicuous. can be set. Therefore, at least, the performance content of the second performance can be clearly executed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D5 or D6,
The irradiation means is
a light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means;
Diffusion means (for example, rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part by more than the width of the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part. A gaming machine D7 is characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5 or D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when light is emitted from the light emitting means by the light guiding means as the irradiation means, the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section is diffused by the diffusion means by the width of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. As a result, the predetermined information whose range is larger than the width of the first light emitting part or the second light emitting part of the light emitting means can be made visible accurately, and by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guide means, the game This has the effect of increasing attention to the

In gaming machine D7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine D8, characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusing means is integrally formed at the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect that in the presentation means, the light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the presentation means.

<Group E: One light guide plate for weak and medium notices, another light guide plate for strong notices>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group E have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
First suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be given based on the determination result by the determination means, Second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded, or the second suggestion information indicates that the predetermined gaming value is awarded. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery to select the execution of any one of the third suggestion information (for example, first decorative symbol group 421) that can suggest to the player that the player has a high expectation level;
a first effect means (for example, front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
A gaming machine E0 characterized in that it comprises a second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) capable of executing the third suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means.

According to the gaming machine E0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means generates first suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given based on the determination result by the determination means, and the first suggestion information determines that the predetermined gaming value is Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation to be given is high, or third suggestion that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation to be given a predetermined game value is high based on the second suggestion information Any execution of the information will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the first presentation means, and also based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, a second presentation is made. The means configures the third suggestion information to be executable. As a result, the third suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of giving a predetermined gaming value is high based on the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information, By executing the first and second suggestion effects that can suggest that the expected level of expectations is low, it is possible to avoid large discrepancies in the effects if they are executed incorrectly due to noise or malfunction. 3. It is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being executed abnormally. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery to select the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means;
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; The second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that the player has a high expectation that the predetermined game value will be given is determined based on the second suggestion information. third suggestion information (for example, first decorative pattern group 421) that can be suggested to a person;
a first effect means (for example, front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c, etc.) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means;
A game characterized by comprising: second performance means (for example, rear light guide plate 420, each LED 424, etc.) capable of executing the third suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Further, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of suggestion based on the suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, the suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be awarded, and an expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be awarded based on the first suggestion information. There are provided second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the game value is high, and third suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined game value is high based on the second suggestion information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the first presentation means, and also based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, a second presentation is made. The means configures the third suggestion information to be executable. As a result, the third suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of giving a predetermined gaming value is high based on the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information, By executing the first and second suggestion effects that can suggest that the expected level of expectations is low, it is possible to avoid large discrepancies in the effects if they are executed incorrectly due to noise or malfunction. 3. It is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being executed abnormally. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine E1,
The first presentation means is
a first light emitting section (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, a left direction or a right direction when viewed from the front);
a second light emitting section (e.g., lower front LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., upward in front view) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting section is incident from a predetermined first part, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting section is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. a first light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second suggestion information is incident from a second part different from the first part;
The first light guide means:
A first output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the first direction to the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the second direction to the front side of the game machine. (for example, the vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413);
A second output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the game machine. (for example, the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 or the horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first light emitting section provided in the first presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting section provided on the first presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Light is emitted in the direction. Furthermore, when the light emitted from the first light emitting section enters the first light guiding means from a predetermined first part, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the second light emitting section When light emitted from the gaming machine enters from a second part different from the first part, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The first light emitting section provided in the first light guiding means allows the light irradiated in the first direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the game machine, and is irradiated in the second direction. The light is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the game machine. Further, the second light emitting portion provided in the first light guiding means allows the light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction. The light is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the first presentation means, depending on the light from the first direction, the first suggestion information is made visible while the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult to see, and depending on the light from the second direction, the second suggestion information is made visible. By making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult while making it possible, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even in one first presentation means. As a result, even if a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the first presentation means, each piece of suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of suggestive information in the first presentation means, the presentation effect of the first presentation means can be enhanced, which has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine E2,
The first presentation means at least includes:
Directivity improving means for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section (for example, a front downward condensing lens 414d, a front right condensing lens 415d, or a front left LED 416c) ), a gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity improving means provided in the first effecting means increases the directivity of at least the light emitted from the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section. Thereby, even if a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the first presentation means, only the suggestion information about the irradiation target can be made visible accurately. Therefore, in the case where the second suggestion performance that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is high based on the first suggestion information is executed by the same first production means as the first suggestion information, Also, by controlling the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section to emit light, each piece of suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible. As a result, the desired suggestion information can be made visible accurately, and by accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The second presentation means is
a third light emitting section that emits light (for example, the lower rear LED 424);
A second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes only the third suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the third light emitting section is incident from a predetermined third part. 420) and
A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it includes a diffusion means (for example, a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the third light emitting section by a width of the third light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the second effect means, when light is emitted from the third light emitting section and the light emitted from the third light emitting section is incident from a predetermined third part, the second light guide means generates the third suggestion information. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the third light emitting section is diffused by the diffusion means by the width of the third light emitting section. As a result, in the second light guiding means provided with only the suggestion information 1, by diffusing the light emitted from the third light emitting part by more than the width of the third light emitting part, It can also irradiate light over a wide area. As a result, for example, even if the third suggestion information is provided in a large size in the second light guiding means, the third suggestion information can be made accurately visible, and the presentation means having the light guiding means can make the third suggestion information visible. By increasing the effect, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine E4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guiding means. This has the effect that in the second presentation means, the second light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means. There is.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E5,
The first presentation means and the second presentation means are
A gaming machine E6 characterized in that the gaming machine E6 is arranged overlappingly with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first presentation means and the second presentation means are arranged overlappingly in the front direction of the gaming machine. This has the effect that by making a plurality of pieces of suggestion information visible in one performance area, the performance effect of the performance means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine E6,
The first presentation means is
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that it is disposed closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the second presentation means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first presentation means is arranged closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the second presentation means. That is, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion, which have a lower expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the third suggestion information, are placed on the front side of the gaming machine of the second presentation means configured such that the third suggestion information is visible. A first presentation means configured to allow information to be visually recognized is arranged. As a result, even if, for example, light from the indoor lighting of a game hall is irradiated from the front side of the gaming machine, the amount of light that reaches the second producing means can be reduced by the first producing means, This has the effect of suppressing erroneous lighting of the third suggestion information, which has a greater effect on production discrepancies than other suggestion information.

<Group F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction is different for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multidirectional area in one light guide plate (2 directions, bubble group), strong effect in small directions (weak effect in places where light paths overlap)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group F were made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be given; A suggestion information lottery means (for example, the MPU 221 )and,
and production means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
a first light emitting unit (for example, a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left-right direction);
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410). a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second suggestion information is incident;
At least, the second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F0 is characterized in that the presentation means is provided at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means selects first suggestion information that can suggest to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, or a predetermined amount from the first suggestion information. The execution of second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the game value will be given is selected by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. Here, the first light emitting means provided on the presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided on the presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. irradiated. In the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first part, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means becomes visible. When the light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the presentation means, the second suggestion information is provided at least at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the second suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined game value is high based on the first suggestion information is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the second suggestion information from being abnormally executed due to noise or malfunction if the second suggestion information has a large performance discrepancy. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery to select the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player, based on the determination result by the determination means;
comprising a presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; second suggestion information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level for the game is high;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left-right direction);
a second light emitting section (for example, a lower front LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting part is incident from a predetermined first part (for example, the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the lower inverted R-shaped part), the first suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is transmitted from a second portion (for example, the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410) that is different from the first portion. a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second suggestion information is incident;
The second suggestion information is
The light guide means is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, in the regular rounded portion of the front light guide plate 410). The gaming machine F1 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Further, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of suggestion based on the suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. Here, the suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be awarded, and an expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be awarded based on the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the price is high is also provided. A first light emitting section provided in the presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light emission section also provided on the presentation means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. be done. Further, the first suggestion information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light emitting section is incident from a predetermined first part by the light guiding means provided in the presentation means, When the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second suggestion information is provided in the light guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. That is, the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestion information is emitted from at least one of the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. It is formed in a position that is visible only in the light that is used. Thereby, even if light is erroneously emitted from the first light emitting section due to noise or malfunction, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information with a large production discrepancy from becoming visible. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine F1,
The production means includes at least the following:
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting part. Game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the presentation means, at least the first suggestion presentation that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestion information is provided in the presentation means. Even in the case of execution, the light emitted from the first light emitting section should be irradiated accurately to the position where the first suggestion information is provided, and the light may not reach or be difficult to reach the position where the second suggestion information is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting section. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine F1 or F2,
The first suggestion information is
In the light guiding means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape) A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it is provided in a section).

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first suggestion information is provided in the light guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light on the second suggestion information, the light on the second suggestion information is given a predetermined gaming value more than the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information, which has a high degree of expectation, is made visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the discrepancy in performance is small. . As a result, the expectation level that a predetermined gaming value is given to the portion where the optical path of light in the second direction corresponding to the second suggestion information intersects with the optical path of light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information is increased to a second level. By providing the first suggestion information that is lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, discrepancies in presentation can be minimized. This has the effect that it is possible to provide a game that does not make players feel uncomfortable.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
A game machine F4 characterized in that it includes a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the production means, the production means executes a second suggestion production that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestion information. Even if the game machine This has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
A gaming machine F5 comprising a diffusion means (for example, a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light emitted from the second light emitting section by a width of the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the light emitted from the second light emitting section is diffused by the diffusion means provided in the presentation means by the width of the second light emitting section. Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestion information emitted from the second light emitting unit via the diffusion means, the light for the second suggestion information is The second suggestion information, which has a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the first suggestion information, is made visible, and when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the first suggestion information becomes visible. Even in this case, the discrepancy in performance is small. Thereby, the light from the second light emitting section is diffused and the second suggestion information is comprehensively irradiated with the diffused light, thereby making it possible to clearly recognize the second suggestion information. Even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy in presentation and provide the player with a game that does not feel strange. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F5,
The light guiding means is
A first output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the first direction to the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the second direction to the front side of the game machine. (for example, the vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413);
A second output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the game machine. (for example, the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 or the horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the game machine by the first emitting part provided in the light guiding means, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. Further, the second emitting portion provided in the light guiding means allows the light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction to be emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the production means, depending on the light from the first direction, the first suggestion information is made visible while the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult to see, and depending on the light from the second direction, the second suggestion information is made visible. At the same time, by making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult to view, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even in one presentation means. As a result, even if a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of suggestion information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means is enhanced, which has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction is different for each display object, small directional area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and multidirectional area in one light guide plate (2 directions, bubble group), the small direction is located in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group G have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be given; A suggestion information lottery means (for example, the MPU 221 )and,
and production means (for example, front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
a first light emitting unit (for example, a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left-right direction);
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is emitted from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410). a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second suggestion information is incident;
The display means is
The game machine G0 is characterized in that the presentation means is disposed on the rear side in a front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). .

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means selects first suggestion information that can suggest to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, or a predetermined amount from the first suggestion information. The execution of second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the game value will be given is selected by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. Here, the first light emitting means provided on the presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided on the presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. irradiated. In the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first part, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means becomes visible. When the light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the presentation means, a display means is provided at least on the rear side in a front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the display means for displaying the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the light from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. As a result, even if the first light emitting means or the second light emitting means erroneously emit light due to noise or malfunction, the first indication due to malfunction will be displayed at the position where the display means indicating the result of the game is arranged. The probability that the information or the second suggestion information will be executed can be reduced. As a result, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Display means (for example, drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect regarding the game based on the determination result by the determination means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery to select the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player, based on the determination result by the determination means;
comprising a production means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; second suggestion information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level for the game is high;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left-right direction);
a second light emitting section (for example, a lower front LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting part is incident from a predetermined first part (for example, the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the lower inverted R-shaped part), the first suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is transmitted from a second portion (for example, the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410) that is different from the first portion. a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second suggestion information is incident;
The display means is
In the light guide means, a gaming machine at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine G1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, the display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect regarding the game based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and the suggestion information lottery means Based on the lottery result, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and an expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given based on the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the price is high is also provided. Here, the first light emitting section provided on the presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second presentation means also provided on the presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. irradiated. Then, when the light emitted from the first light emitting section is incident from a predetermined first part, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the light guiding means provided in the presentation means. When the light emitted from the two light emitting parts is incident from a second part different from the first part, the second suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the display means is disposed on the back side of the gaming machine in a front view of the light guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. . Accordingly, by arranging the display means capable of executing a predetermined effect regarding the game on the back side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effect means do not intersect, the display By configuring the predetermined performance related to the game executed by the means so as not to interfere with the performance, and configuring the predetermined information in the performance means so as to be visible, the performance effects of the display means and the performance means are respectively enhanced, and the effect on the game is improved. This has the effect of increasing attention.

In gaming machine G1,
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means;
a gaming value imparting means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of imparting the gaming value to the player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means; , comprising:
Equipped with
The display area is
In the light guide means, a gaming machine at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is,
The dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. appears, a gaming value can be awarded to the player by the gaming value awarding means. The display area of the display means is disposed on the back side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front in a position in the light guiding means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. be done. As a result, the identification information indicating whether or not to give a gaming value is dynamically displayed on the back side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the presentation means do not intersect. By arranging the display means in which the display is performed, the dynamic display performed by the display means is configured so as not to interfere with the performance, and the predetermined information indicating the degree of expectation that gaming value is given in the performance means can be visually recognized. This has the effect of increasing the performance effects of the display means and the performance means, respectively, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The production means includes at least the following:
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting part. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the presentation means, at least the first suggestion presentation that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestion information is provided in the presentation means. Even in the case of execution, the light emitted from the first light emitting section should be irradiated accurately to the position where the first suggestion information is provided, and the light may not reach or be difficult to reach the position where the second suggestion information is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting section. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3,
The first suggestion information is
In the light guiding means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape) A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is provided in a section).

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first suggestion information is provided in the light guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light on the second suggestion information, the light on the second suggestion information will be given a predetermined gaming value more than the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information, which has a high degree of expectation, is made visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the discrepancy in presentation is small. . As a result, the expectation level that a predetermined gaming value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction corresponding to the second suggestion information intersects with the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information is increased to a second level. By providing the first suggestion information that is lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, discrepancies in performance can be minimized. This has the effect that it is possible to provide a game that does not make players feel uncomfortable.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4,
The second suggestion information is
In the light guiding means, the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect at a position (for example, a regularly rounded portion of the front light guide plate 410); , a gaming machine G5 characterized in that the display means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second suggestion information is a position in the light guiding means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect, and the display means is located at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction is viewed from the front of the game machine. It is provided on the front side. As a result, in a portion on the back side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the presentation means do not intersect, the display means capable of executing a predetermined presentation regarding the game and the predetermined game presentation are provided. By making the suggestion information indicating the degree of expectation that value will be added executable together, the predetermined presentation and the suggestion information can be configured to be visible within the same visual field, and the presentation effects of the display means and the presentation means can be adjusted respectively. This has the effect of increasing the attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5,
The production means is
A gaming machine G6 characterized in that it includes a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the production means, the production means executes a second suggestion production that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestion information. Even if the game machine This has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6,
The light guiding means is
A first output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the first direction to the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the second direction to the front side of the game machine. (for example, the vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413);
A second output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the game machine. (for example, the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 or the horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the game machine by the first emitting portion provided in the light guiding means, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. Further, the second emitting portion provided in the light guiding means allows the light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction to It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the production means, depending on the light from the first direction, the first suggestion information is made visible while the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult to see, and depending on the light from the second direction, the second suggestion information is made visible. By making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult to view, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even in one presentation means. As a result, even if a plurality of pieces of suggestion information are provided in the production means, each piece of suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of suggestive information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means is enhanced, which has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group H: One light guide plate with planar shape and R shape, both shapes guide light from the planar shape part (light is not guided from the R shape part)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting part (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a rear side a light guide plate 420);
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a bent-shaped part (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped part, a regular R-shaped part or a lower inverted R-shaped part) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped part,
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine H0, characterized in that it is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined part, predetermined information regarding the game is displayed. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate shaped part and a bent shaped part bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shaped part, and a light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined part in the flat plate shaped part. be done. As a result, it is possible to make predetermined information visible by inputting light into the light guide means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means, thereby improving the degree of design freedom regarding the light emitting means, and improving the gaming experience. This has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, thereby increasing the level of attention to the game.

a first performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first performance related to the game (for example, a variation performance of the third symbol);
A second effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) related to the first effect,
The second presentation means is
A light emitting unit (for example, lower LED unit 414) having a light emitting part (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guide means (for example, a front guide) makes predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative pattern group 411) visible from the front side of the game machine. light plate 410);
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a front side part (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped part, a regular R-shaped part, or a lower inverted R-shaped part) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first presentation means; Equipped with
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine H1, characterized in that it is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first performance means is configured to be able to execute a first performance related to the game, and the second performance unit is configured to be able to execute a second performance related to the first performance. Further, the light emitting means provided in the second effect means is provided with a light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part by the light guide means also provided in the second effect means. When the gaming machine is played, predetermined information regarding the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped part and a front side part that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first presentation means. The light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. That is, the light is configured to enter the light guiding means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, rather than from a portion corresponding to the front side portion existing on the front side of the first presentation means. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guiding means from the front side, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the front side, making it impossible or difficult to express specified information in a desired manner. There is a risk. Furthermore, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side part, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the front side part is located on the front side of the gaming machine of the first effect means, and when a light emitting part etc. is arranged to correspond to the front side part, the design of the second effect means (light guide means) There is a risk that the degree of freedom will be restricted. Therefore, in the second presentation means having a front side portion, the above-mentioned problem is suitably solved by entering the light from a portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is not the front side portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means is increased. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine H1,
The front side part is
A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the first performance means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the front side portion is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the first presentation means. This is because when trying to make light enter the light guiding means from the external shape-related part, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the external shape-related part, and the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do so. Furthermore, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the external shape related part is located on the front side of the gaming machine of the first effect means, and when a light emitting part etc. is arranged so as to correspond to the external shape related part, the second effect means (light guiding means) There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing may be restricted. As a result, in the second presentation means having an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the first presentation device, the above-mentioned problem is suitably solved by allowing light to enter from a portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is not the external shape-related portion. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means can be increased.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The first presentation means is
A gaming machine H3 characterized by comprising display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means provided in the first presentation means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, if the external shape-related portion of the second presentation means that executes the second presentation related to the dynamic display of identification information is formed in a shape related to the external shape of the display means that can perform the dynamic display; In the second presentation means having the external shape-related portion, the above-mentioned problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means can be increased by inputting light from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. effective.

In gaming machine H3,
The display means is
a reel (for example, a left reel LR) in which a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified is arranged on the circumferential surface;
a cylindrical rotating body (for example, left reel unit 81a1) that is rotatable about a rotation axis concentric with the reel;
A gaming machine H4 comprising: a driving means capable of rotationally driving the rotating body.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a display means, a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, is arranged on the circumferential surface of a reel, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis concentric with the reel by a cylindrical rotation body. The rotating body is configured to be rotatably driven by the driving means. That is, since the display means is formed in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis in order to rotate the reels, the outer shape related portion of the second presentation means also has a shape related to the cylindrical shape (for example, a bent shape). ) is formed. In this case, when trying to make light enter the light guiding means from the cylindrical external shape-related part, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the external shape-related part, and the predetermined information is not transmitted in the desired form. It may be impossible or difficult to express. Therefore, in the second presentation means having a cylindrical external shape-related portion, the above-mentioned problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means can be increased by allowing light to enter from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. This has the effect of allowing you to do so.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4,
Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit,
A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
The outer shape related portion is
The second effect includes first suggestion information (for example, a second decorative symbol group) as the predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute 411).

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, in the external shape related section, first suggestion information is executed as predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. configured as possible. As a result, while performing the first performance in the first performance means, a second performance indicating the degree of expectation that a gaming value will be given is performed in the outer shape related part of the second performance means related to the external shape of the first performance means. By configuring the first suggestion information to be executable, it is possible to enhance the performance effects of the first performance means and the second performance means, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine H5,
The flat plate shaped portion is
As the second effect, it is possible to execute second suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest that the expectation level for giving a predetermined gaming value to the player is higher than the first suggestion information. A gaming machine H6 characterized by the following configuration.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the flat plate-shaped portion, second suggestion information is configured to be executable as the second effect, which is capable of suggesting that the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player is higher than the first suggestion information. This has the effect that by making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of suggestion information in the second presentation means, the presentation effect of the second presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group I: R shape/inverted R shape, 1 preview display is displayed until the switching point (design display area determination part), no design is placed in the part where the R shape switches>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting part (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a rear side a light guide plate 420);
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a first bent-shaped portion (for example, an upper inverted-R shaped portion or a lower inverted-R-shaped portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped portion;
a second bent shape portion (for example, a regular R shape portion) bent from the first bent shape portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine I0 characterized in that the gaming machine I0 is provided at a position avoiding a switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part.

According to the gaming machine I0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined part, predetermined information regarding the game is displayed. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guiding means includes at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion, a first bent portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate portion, and a second bent portion bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the first bent portion. A bent shape portion is provided, and predetermined information is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion. As a result, by not disposing the predetermined information at the switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guiding means may change irregularly, it is possible to It is possible to prevent the predetermined information from appearing in an unintended manner. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the specified information, perform a performance that does not cause any discrepancy, and by accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, the effect is that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is.

Equipped with a production means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting part (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a rear side a light guide plate 420);
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a first bent-shaped portion (for example, an upper inverted-R shaped portion or a lower inverted-R-shaped portion) that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and bent in a predetermined direction (for example, toward the front side of the gaming machine);
a second bent shape part (for example, a regular R shape part) formed continuously from the first bent shape part and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, toward the rear side of the gaming machine);
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding a switching part (for example, a switching point P) between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part.

According to the gaming machine I1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined part, predetermined information regarding the game is displayed. is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guiding means includes at least a predetermined flat plate shaped portion, a first bent shaped portion formed continuously from the flat plate shaped portion and bent in a predetermined direction, and a first bent shaped portion continuously formed from the first bent shaped portion. and a second bent shape portion that is formed and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Here, the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding the switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part in the light guiding means. This is because the reflection angle of the light guided inside the light guiding means is not equal on any surface of the light guiding means at the switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part, and the colliding light The amount of information tends to be sparse (coarse), and even if predetermined information is placed at the switching part, the predetermined information is not expressed appropriately and cannot be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine at an appropriate timing. There is a risk. Furthermore, while the predetermined information is configured to be visible only by light from a predetermined direction, if the predetermined information is placed in the switching section, it will not be visible in directions that would otherwise be visible. There is a possibility that the predetermined information can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine due to the irradiation of the light, and there is a possibility that the predetermined information can be seen at an unintended timing, causing a discrepancy in the presentation content. Therefore, the predetermined information is not placed at the switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guiding means may change irregularly, and the predetermined information is not placed at a position avoiding the switching part. By arranging the predetermined information in the game machine, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being viewed in an unintended manner from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to express the specified information appropriately, perform a performance that does not cause any discrepancy, and by accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is.

In the gaming machine I1,
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine I2 characterized in that first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion in the light guiding means. The light guided within the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guiding means tends to have uniform reflection angles, and even in the first bent portion formed continuously from there, the light guided from the flat plate-shaped portion tends to have a uniform reflection angle. Light is guided evenly. As a result, by appropriately expressing the predetermined information and accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
The light guiding means is
disposing second predetermined information (for example, second decorative pattern group 411) different from the first predetermined information in the second bent shape portion;
The second predetermined information is
A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the gaming machine I3 is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the light guiding means, second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent shape portion, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion. The light guided within the second bent shape portion of the light guiding means tends to have a stable reflection angle, while the light guided through the switching portion from within the first bent shape portion which is continuously formed has a stable reflection angle. As shown above, the reflection angles are not uniform, and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse. Therefore, by appropriately expressing the second predetermined information disposed within the range of the second bent shape portion where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, and accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, This has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine I3,
a predetermined information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that randomly selects the execution of the suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result by the determination means;
The light guiding means is
Based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion based on the predetermined information can be executed,
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded is higher than the first predetermined information;
The light emitting means is
a first light emitting unit (for example, a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, the left-right direction);
a second light emitting section (for example, a lower front LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward) different from the first direction;
The light guiding means is
When the light emitted from the first light emitting part is incident from a predetermined first part (for example, the lower flat plate part and the left-right end surface of the lower inverted R-shaped part of the front light guide plate 410), the first predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is transmitted from a second portion (for example, the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410) that is different from the first portion. When the second predetermined information is incident, the second predetermined information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The production means includes at least the following:
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting part. Game machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information lottery means selects a lottery for execution of the suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the light guide means is configured to be able to make suggestions based on the predetermined information. Further, the second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first predetermined information. Here, the first light emitting section provided in the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting section also provided in the light emitting means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. irradiated. Further, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting section is incident from a predetermined first part, the first predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting section is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The second predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion. Then, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting section is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided on the light guiding means, at least the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second predetermined information. Even in the case where the light guiding means is used, the light emitted from the first light emitting part is accurately irradiated to the position where the first predetermined information is provided, and does not reach the position where the second predetermined information is provided, or By making it difficult to see the second predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting section. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines I2 to I4,
The first predetermined information is
In the light guiding means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape) A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is provided in a section).

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first predetermined information is provided in the light guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect. In other words, the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the expectation level of being given a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second predetermined information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. is formed on the optical path of Here, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible due to the light directed to the second predetermined information, the light directed to the second predetermined information is given a predetermined gaming value more than the first predetermined information. The second predetermined information, which has a high degree of expectation, is made visible, and even if the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, the discrepancy in presentation is small. . As a result, the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value is given to a portion where the optical path of light in the second direction corresponding to the second predetermined information intersects with the optical path of light in the first direction corresponding to the first predetermined information is increased to a second level. By providing the first predetermined information lower than the predetermined information, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, discrepancies in presentation can be minimized, This has the effect that it is possible to provide a game that does not make players feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine I4 or I5,
The production means is
A game machine I6 characterized in that it includes a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4 or I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided in the production means, the production means executes a second predetermined production that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation of being given a predetermined gaming value is higher than that of the first predetermined information. Even if the game machine This has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines I4 to I6,
The light guiding means is
A first output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the first direction to the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the second direction to the front side of the game machine. (for example, the vertical grooves forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413);
A second output that emits or makes it easy to emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the game machine, and does not or makes it difficult to emit the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the game machine. (for example, the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 or the horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411).

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I4 to I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the game machine by the first emitting part provided in the light guiding means, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. Further, the second emitting portion provided in the light guiding means allows the light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction to be emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it does not emit or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, depending on the light from the first direction, the first predetermined information is made visible while the second predetermined information is made invisible or difficult to see, and depending on the light from the second direction, the second predetermined information is made visible. By making the first predetermined information invisible or difficult to view, a plurality of predetermined information can be expressed even in one presentation means. As a result, even if a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of predetermined information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling each of the first light emitting section or the second light emitting section to emit light, By making it possible to express a plurality of pieces of predetermined information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means is enhanced, which has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Group J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong notice light guide plate (sunfish/foam light guide plate, slit part of display area forming member)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group J have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second performance means (for example, a confirmation lamp unit 310) that performs a second performance different from the first performance (for example, lighting or non-lighting of a confirmation lamp 311) as the game progresses;
The first presentation means is
a first light emitting unit (e.g., lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting part (e.g., rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, a light guiding means (for example, a rear side a light guide plate 420);
The second presentation means is
A second light emitting unit (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit that emits light (for example, an LED that lights the confirmation lamp 311);
A game characterized in that a cover part (for example, a lens cut 432) is provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means to reduce light from the second light emitting means to the light guiding means. Machine J0.

According to the gaming machine J0, the first performance means performs the first performance as the game progresses. Further, the second performance means performs a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses. The first light emitting means provided in the first effecting means has a first light emitting part that emits light, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined part. When the game machine is played, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front of the game machine. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second presentation means has a second light emitting section that emits light. Here, the cover section provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means reduces the light from the second light emitting means to the light guiding means. As a result, it is possible to suppress malfunctions of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means being irradiated on the predetermined information, and by suppressing the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, accurate information regarding the game can be provided to the players. This has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In a gaming machine equipped with a first effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) that can execute a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The first presentation means is
a first light emitting unit (e.g., lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting part (e.g., rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a first light guide means (a first light guide means) that makes predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part; For example, it includes a rear light guide plate 420),
A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the light guiding means includes a cover part (for example, a lens cut 432) that reduces the amount of light directed to a position where the predetermined information is disposed.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first performance means is configured to be able to execute the first performance as the game progresses. Further, the first light emitting means provided in the first effecting means is provided with a first light emitting part that emits light, and when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined part, the first light emitting means Predetermined information regarding the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the game machine by the first light guiding means provided in the presentation means. Here, the cover portion reduces the light directed to the position where the predetermined information is disposed in the first light guiding means. As a result, it is possible to suppress malfunctions of the predetermined information due to light from sources other than the first light emitting means being irradiated on the predetermined information, and information regarding the game can be provided to players by suppressing the occurrence of performance discrepancies due to abnormal expressions. This has the effect of providing accurate suggestions and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine J1,
A second performance means (for example, a confirmation lamp unit 310) capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance (for example, lighting or non-lighting of a confirmation lamp 311) as the game progresses; The means are
A second light emitting unit (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit that emits light (for example, an LED that lights the confirmation lamp 311);
The cover part is
A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it is disposed between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second presentation means is provided with a second light emitting section that emits light. A cover section is disposed between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means being irradiated on the predetermined information when the first light emitting means is not emitting light, and to prevent production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions. Suppression has the effect of accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine J2,
The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second light emitting means emits light stronger than the light emission brightness of the first light emitting means when executing the second effect.

According to gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second light emitting means emits light stronger than the light emission brightness of the first light emitting means when the second effect is executed. That is, when the second light emitting means emits light, there is a possibility that the predetermined information in the first presentation means is affected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means being irradiated on the predetermined information when the first light emitting means is not emitting light, and the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions can be suppressed. Suppression has the effect of accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J3,
The cover part is
A gaming machine J4, characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine from the first presentation means.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the cover portion is disposed closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the first presentation means. As a result, by reducing the light from the front side of the gaming machine that is emitted from the lighting of the gaming hall or the performance on other gaming machines by using the cover part, the light from sources other than the first light emitting means is irradiated onto the predetermined information. By suppressing the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the attention to the game. effective.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J4,
a third light emitting unit (for example, lower LED unit 414) having a third light emitting section (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
A second device that makes second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative pattern group 411) visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part. A light guide means (for example, front light guide plate 410),
A gaming machine J5, wherein the cover section is the second light guiding means.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the third light emitting means is provided with a third light emitting section that emits light, and the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part, the second light guiding means allows the game to be played. Second predetermined information regarding the gaming machine is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second light guiding means is used as a cover part. As a result, the second light guide means configured to be able to visually recognize the second predetermined information is configured to be able to reduce light directed to the position where the predetermined information is disposed in the first light guide means as a cover portion. As a result, the second light guiding means provided with the second predetermined information can suppress malfunctions of the predetermined information due to irradiation of the predetermined information with light from sources other than the first light emitting means, and can display a plurality of effects. By suppressing the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions during execution, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Group K: 1 light guide plate has strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for weak areas has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group K were made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be given; A suggestion information lottery means (for example, the MPU 221 )and,
and production means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
a first light emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestion information;
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestion information;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guiding means (for example, front light guiding plate 410) that makes it visible;
At least a condensing means (for example, front right condensing lens 415d or front left condensing lens 416d) that condenses the light from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. The gaming machine K0 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means selects first suggestion information that can suggest to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, or a predetermined amount from the first suggestion information. The execution of second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the game value will be given is selected by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the presentation means is configured to be able to emit light onto the first suggestion information, and the second light emission means also provided on the presentation means is configured to emit light onto the second suggestion information. It is configured to be able to irradiate light. The light guiding means makes the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emission means emits light, and the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emission means emits light. It becomes visible from Here, the light condensing means condenses at least the light emitted by the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. Thereby, when the first suggestion information provided on the first light guiding means is made visible by the light emission by the first light emitting means, the light by the first light emitting means is condensed by the condensing means, and the same light guiding means is condensed by the condensing means. It is possible to irradiate only the first suggestion information with light without irradiating the second suggestion information provided in the means with light. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunctions of the second suggestion information when the first suggestion information is made visible, and by suppressing the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player. This has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery to select the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player, based on the determination result by the determination means;
comprising a presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; second suggestion information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level for the game is high;
a first light emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestion information;
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestion information;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes it visible,
A gaming machine K1 characterized in that the gaming machine K1 is configured such that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and the suggestion information lottery means Based on the lottery result, the presentation means is configured to make suggestions based on suggestion information executable. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and an expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given based on the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the price is high is also provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the presentation means irradiates light on the first suggestion information, and the second light emission means also provided on the presentation means irradiates light on the second suggestion information. be done. The light guiding means provided in the presentation means makes the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The suggested information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is configured to be higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means. When attempting to make visible the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the second suggestion information, the first suggestion information is provided on the same light guiding means, and the first suggestion information gives a predetermined gaming value. If the second suggestion information indicating that the level of expectation for the game is high becomes visible, there will be a discrepancy in the content of the presentation, and there is a possibility that the gameplay cannot be realized in accordance with the game specifications. Therefore, at least, by increasing the directionality of the light toward the first suggestion information that has a low expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and by configuring the light to be directed toward the first suggestion information without being diffused, it is possible to This has the effect that only one piece of suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing, making it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the presentation contents.

In the gaming machine K1,
At least, a first directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens A gaming machine K2 characterized by comprising: a lens 416d).

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first directivity improving means increases the directivity of at least the light emitted from the first light emitting means, and the light is emitted onto the first suggestion information. If it is attempted to make visible the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the second suggestion information, the first suggestion information is provided on the same light guiding means, and the first suggestion information gives a predetermined gaming value. If the second suggestion information indicating that the level of expectation for the game is high becomes visible, there will be a discrepancy in the content of the presentation, and there is a risk that the game performance in accordance with the game specifications may not be realized. Therefore, at least the light for the first suggestion information that has a low expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given is increased by the first directivity improving means, and is configured to be irradiated toward the first suggestion information without being diffused. By doing so, it is possible to display only the first suggestion information at an appropriate timing, and there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the presentation contents.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
It is characterized by comprising a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. Game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second directivity improving means increases the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information. As a result, by configuring the light guide means provided with the second suggestion information so that the light corresponding to each suggestion information is not diffused by the respective condensing means, it is possible to display each suggestion information at an appropriate timing. This has the effect of making it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the content of the performance.

In gaming machines K1 to K3,
A second performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined performance related to the game,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a front side part (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped part, a regular R-shaped part, or a lower inverted R-shaped part) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second presentation means; Equipped with
The first light emitting means is
disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion;
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine K4, characterized in that it is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is different from the first portion.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance related to the game. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped part and a front side part that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second presentation means. The first light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first part of the flat plate-shaped part, and the second light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second part of the flat plate-shaped part that is different from the first part. will be established. In other words, the light is configured to enter the light guiding means from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, rather than from the front side portion. This is because when trying to enter light into the light guiding means from the front side of the gaming machine, which is located in front of the second presentation means, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the front side. There is a possibility that the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner or is difficult to express. Furthermore, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. For this reason, in a light guiding means having a front side part, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the light guiding means can be increased by inputting light from each part of the flat plate-shaped part. effective.

In the gaming machine K4,
The front side part is
A gaming machine K5 characterized in that the outer shape-related portion is related to the outer shape of the second presentation means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the front side portion is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means. This is because when trying to make light enter the light guiding means from the external shape-related part, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the external shape-related part, and the suggested information cannot be expressed in the desired manner. It may be difficult to do so. Furthermore, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape related portion is configured to have a shape that follows the outer shape of the second presentation means, and when a light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape related portion, the first presentation means (light guide There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing the means) may be restricted. As a result, in the first effect means having an outer shape related part related to the outer shape of the second effect means, the above problem is suitably solved by allowing light to enter from the part of the flat plate shape part which is not the outer shape related part. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first presentation means can be increased.

<Group L: 1 light guide plate with strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for strong areas is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, 3-way lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group L have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be given; A suggestion information lottery means (for example, the MPU 221 )and,
and production means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
a first light emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestion information;
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestion information;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guiding means (for example, front light guiding plate 410) that makes it visible;
At least a diffusion means (for example, rear upper diffusion lens 423 or rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information. Features gaming machine L0.

According to the gaming machine L0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means selects first suggestion information that can suggest to the player at least the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, or a predetermined amount from the first suggestion information. The execution of second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the game value will be given is selected by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the presentation means is configured to be able to irradiate light onto the first suggestion information, and the second light emission means also provided on the presentation means is configured to emit light on the second suggestion information. It is configured to be able to irradiate light. The light guiding means makes the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emission means emits light, and the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine when the second light emission means emits light. It becomes visible from Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light emitted by the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information. This makes it possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player by illuminating the second suggestion information, which is important for the game, and making it clearly visible, increasing the level of attention to the game. The effect is that you can.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws a lottery for execution of suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means;
comprising a presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; second suggestion information (for example, third decorative pattern 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level for the game is high;
a first light emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light to the first suggestion information;
a second light emitting means (for example, a lower front LED 414c) capable of emitting light to the second suggestion information;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guiding means (for example, front light guiding plate 410) that makes it visible;
A gaming machine L1 comprising at least a diffusion means (for example, a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information.

According to the gaming machine L1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and the suggestion information lottery means Based on the lottery result, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the presentation means. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given, and an expectation level that a predetermined gaming value will be given based on the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the price is high is also provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the presentation means irradiates light on the first suggestion information, and the second light emission means also provided on the presentation means irradiates light on the second suggestion information. be done. The light guiding means provided in the presentation means makes the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light emitted by the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information. Since the second suggestion information is a performance with a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given at least more than the first suggestion information, the second suggestion information is comprehensively irradiated with light by the diffusion means and the second suggestion information is 2. It is necessary to make the player clearly aware of the suggested information. In addition, when making the first suggestion information visible, if the second suggestion information, which has a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the first suggestion information, is made visible, a discrepancy in performance will occur. , when making the second suggestion information visible, even if the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of giving a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestion information, becomes visible, the player cannot We focused on the execution of the second suggestion information, which has a high expectation that a gaming value will be given, and we did not focus so much on the execution of the first suggestion information, which has a low expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given. Discrepancies are unlikely to occur. Therefore, by employing a diffusion means for the second suggestion information that is highly expected to give a predetermined gaming value, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light guiding means and increase the degree of attention to the game. effective.

In the gaming machine L1,
Directivity improving means (for example, a third right condensing lens 475b and a third left condensing lens 476b) that increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. ), a gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity improving means increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means, and the light is emitted onto the first suggestion information. When attempting to make visible the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the second suggestion information, the first suggestion information is provided on the same light guiding means, and the first suggestion information gives a predetermined gaming value. If the second suggestion information indicating that the level of expectation for the game is high becomes visible, there will be a discrepancy in the content of the presentation, and there is a possibility that the gameplay cannot be realized in accordance with the game specifications. Therefore, at least by configuring the directionality improving means to irradiate the light corresponding to the first suggestion information with a low expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the first suggestion information without being diffused by the directivity improving means, This has the effect that only one piece of suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing, making it difficult for discrepancies to occur in the presentation contents.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2,
A second performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined performance related to the game,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion);
a front side part (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped part, a regular R-shaped part, or a lower inverted R-shaped part) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second presentation means; Equipped with
The first light emitting means is
disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion;
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine L3 characterized in that it is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is different from the first portion.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance related to the game. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped part and a front side part that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped part and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second presentation means. The first light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is different from the first portion. will be established. In other words, the light is configured to enter the light guiding means from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, rather than from the front side portion. This is because when trying to enter light into the light guiding means from the front side of the gaming machine located on the front side of the second presentation means, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the front side. There is a possibility that the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner or is difficult to express. Furthermore, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side part, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, in a light guiding means having a front side part, by allowing light to enter from each part of the flat plate-shaped part, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the light guiding means can be increased. effective.

In gaming machine L3,
The front side part is
A game machine L4 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the front side portion is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means. This is because when trying to make light enter the light guiding means from the external shape related part, the traveling direction of the incident light changes due to the external shape related part, and the suggested information cannot be expressed in the desired manner. It may be difficult to do so. Furthermore, the light emitting section and the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape related portion is configured to have a shape that follows the outer shape of the second presentation means, and when a light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape related portion, the first presentation means (light guide There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing the means) may be restricted. As a result, the above-mentioned problem is suitably solved by injecting light from a part of the flat plate shape part that is not the outer shape related part in the first effect means having an outer shape related part related to the outer shape of the second effect means. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first presentation means can be increased.

<Group M: multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusion means>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The M group of inventions was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, the rear upper LED unit 422) that performs a first effect as the game progresses;
A second performance means (for example, a front right LED unit 415) that performs a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses;
The first presentation means is
A first light emitting means (for example, rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first part, first predetermined information regarding the game (for example, a first decorative pattern group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. A first light guide means (for example, rear light guide plate 420) that enables
The second presentation means is
A second light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part, second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, front light guide plate 410) that enables
It is characterized by comprising at least a diffusion means (for example, rear upper diffusion lens 423 or rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information. A gaming machine M0.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first performance means performs a first performance as the game progresses, and the second performance means performs a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first effecting means and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light guiding means from a predetermined first part, As a first effect, first predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effecting means, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part in the second light guiding means, As a second effect, second predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitted by at least the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means and irradiated onto the second predetermined information. This has the effect that the second performance related to the second predetermined information can be performed in a flashy manner by irradiating the light diffused by the diffusion means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

a first effect means (for example, front right LED unit 415) capable of executing a first effect as the game progresses;
A second performance means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses;
The first presentation means is
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first part, first predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative pattern group 411) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. A first light guide means (for example, front light guide plate 410) that enables
The second presentation means is
A second light emitting means (for example, rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part, second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, rear light guide plate 420) that enables
A gaming machine M1 characterized in that it includes at least a diffusion means (for example, a rear upper diffusion lens 423) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine M1, the first performance means is configured to be able to execute a first performance as the game progresses, and the second performance means executes a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses. Configured to be executable. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first effecting means and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light guiding means from a predetermined first part, As a first effect, first predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effecting means, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second part in the second light guiding means, As a second effect, second predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitted by at least the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means and irradiated onto the second predetermined information. As a result, the second performance regarding the second predetermined information can be performed in a flashy manner by irradiating the light diffused by the diffusion means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine M1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it is a performance with a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value is given than the first performance.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance is set as a performance with a higher expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given than the first performance. As a result, by employing the diffusion means for the second suggestion information that is highly expected to give a predetermined gaming value, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the light guiding means and increase the degree of attention to the game. There is an effect.

In gaming machine M1 or M2,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the second light guiding means;
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end portion of the second light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the second light guiding means, and the diffusing means is integrally formed at the predetermined end of the second light guiding means. This has the effect that in the second presentation means, the second light guide means and the diffusion means are integrally formed and the number of parts is reduced, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the second presentation means. There is.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M3,
As the first performance,
A predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
A first specific performance (for example, second decorative symbol group 411) that is more expected to give a predetermined gaming value than the first predetermined performance,
The first presentation means is
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. Game machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the first performance, there are provided a predetermined first predetermined performance and a first specific performance that is more expected to be given a predetermined gaming value than the first predetermined performance. Then, the directivity improving means provided in the first effecting means increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, when the first effect means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of first effects, the light emitted from the first light emitting means is accurately irradiated to the position where the desired first effect is provided, and other By preventing or making it difficult to reach the position where the first effect is provided, it is possible to prevent the undesired first effect from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, the occurrence of production discrepancies can be suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Group N: Pseudo stop symbol display control corresponding to symbol arrangement>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The N group of inventions was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
three rotating members (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) each having a plurality of types of identification information arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, a motor) for rotationally driving each of the rotation members;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating member is
a common rotating member (for example, a left reel LR and a right reel RR) configured only with the identification information common to the rotating members;
a non-common rotating member (for example, a middle reel CR) including non-common identification information that is not included in the common rotating member;
The drive control means includes:
Stage changing means (for example, changing the reach forming pattern to "5") for changing in stages the preceding stage identification information that forms the combination of the preceding stage identification information (for example, "reach display") of the predetermined display result. → "6" → "7" change),
The step change means is
A game characterized in that, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member is not included. Machine No.0.

According to the gaming machine N0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members each having a plurality of types of identification information arranged therein, each of the rotating members is rotationally driven by the rotational drive means, and the rotational drive means is controlled by the drive control means. controlled. As the rotation means, the common rotation member is configured with only identification information common to the rotation members, and the non-common rotation member is configured with non-common identification information that is not included in the common rotation member. be done. Here, the step change means provided in the drive control means changes stepwise the previous stage identification information forming a combination of previous stage identification information of a predetermined display result. Then, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages by the stage changing means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member is not included. This has the effect that it is possible to perform a performance that does not cause any discrepancy in the performance and does not give a sense of discomfort, and that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Na group: Excluding reach formation patterns with non-common identification information>
Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in presentation means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
at least two or more rotating means (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotation means is
a common rotation means (for example, a left reel LR and a right reel RR) in which common identification information that is the common identification information is arranged;
comprising a non-common rotation means (for example, a middle reel CR) in which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotation means are arranged;
The drive control means includes:
Stage changing means (for example, changing the reach forming pattern to "1") for changing in stages the preceding stage identification information that forms the combination of the preceding stage identification information (for example, "reach display") of the predetermined display result. → “2” → “3” change),
The step change means is
A game characterized in that when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means is not included. Machine Na1.

According to the gaming machine Na1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When the game is played, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are respectively rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means are controlled. Further, the rotation means includes a common rotation means in which common identification information, which is a common identification information, is arranged, and non-common identification information that is not included in the arrangement of the common identification information and the common rotation means. and non-common rotation means. Then, the previous stage revealing means provided in the drive control means reveals the previous stage identification information forming a combination of the previous stage identification information of the predetermined display result, and the step change information also provided in the drive control means The means changes the previous stage information in stages. Here, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by the stage changing means, the combination of the previous stage information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the previous stage identification information based on the non-common identification information that cannot exist except for the non-common rotation means is not displayed, causing a discrepancy in performance. This has the effect of suppressing the player's feeling of discomfort and losing interest in the game, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotation means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (for example, ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Na2 characterized in that the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Na2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Na1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the identification information is arranged in a predetermined sequence on the common rotation means. Then, the combination of previous stage identification information is changed by the stage changing means so as to correspond to a predetermined permutation. As a result, when changing the pre-stage identification information in stages to correspond to a predetermined permutation, the pre-stage identification information based on the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotation means is prevented from appearing. This has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of discrepancies in presentation, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2,
The dynamic execution means includes:
Dynamic display that continues the dynamic display when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, regardless of which of the identification information appears in the common rotation means. A gaming machine Na3 characterized by comprising a continuation means.

According to the gaming machine Na3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Na1 or Na2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, regardless of which identification information appears in the common rotation means, when non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the dynamic continuation provided in the dynamic execution means The dynamic display is continued by the means. This creates a gameplay experience in which the dynamic display continues depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, draws attention to the rotational behavior of the non-common rotation means, and improves the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine Na3,
The dynamic display means includes:
A predetermined first performance,
a second performance in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic continuation means is
A gaming machine Na4 characterized in that when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the second effect is executed.

According to gaming machine Na4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine Na3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect that more easily produces a predetermined display result than the first effect, and the non-common rotation means is configured to display non-common identification information. appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic continuation means. This creates a gameplay in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not non-common identification information appears, and non-common identification information is generated when the non-common rotation means rotates. This has the effect of making the game more interesting by drawing attention to whether or not information appears.

In any of gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, the plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed on one of the rotation means, and the second common rotation means can be stopped earlier than the non-common rotation means. death,
The common rotation means is
The order of arrangement of the common identification information in one of the common rotation means (for example, descending order) and the order of arrangement of the common identification information on the other common rotation means (for example, ascending order) are arranged in reverse order. The gaming machine Na5 is characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine Na5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Na1 to Na4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured to allow a plurality of pieces of identification information to appear on one rotation means in the dynamic display, and the two common rotation means are stopped earlier than the non-common rotation means. In the common rotation means, the common identification information in one common rotation means is arranged in a reverse order to the common identification information in the other common rotation means. There is. As a result, it is possible to generate a plurality of pre-stage identification information in the common rotating means that can be stopped first, and it is possible to increase the variation of the appearance position of one pre-stage identification information, thereby increasing the interest of the game. This has the effect of allowing improvements to be made.

In any of gaming machines Na1 to Na5,
The non-common rotation means is
A gaming machine Na6 characterized in that the identification information is arranged in the same arrangement order (for example, ascending order) as the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the identification information in at least one of the common rotation means.

According to gaming machine Na6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Na1 to Na5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the non-common rotation means, the identification information is arranged in at least the same arrangement order as the arrangement order of the identification information in one common rotation means. This makes it possible to standardize the order in which the identification information appears in the common rotation means and the non-common rotation means, making it easier for the player to recognize the order in which the identification information appears. effective.

In any of gaming machines Na2 to Na6,
The non-common identification information is
A gaming machine Na7 characterized in that it is arranged in the middle of the predetermined permutation in the non-common rotation means.

According to gaming machine Na7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Na2 to Na6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the non-common identification information is arranged in the middle of a predetermined permutation in the non-common rotation means. As a result, regarding the appearance of non-common identification information that is not included in the common rotation means, it creates surprises in the predetermined arrangement of the identification information in the non-common rotation means, enriches the variation of the game, and improves the interest of the game. This has the effect of making it possible to achieve

<Group Nb: Excluding reach-forming symbols based on identification information that have a large profit that can be given to the player>
Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in presentation means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
at least two or more rotating means (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means includes:
Pre-stage display means for displaying pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information (for example, "reach display") of the predetermined display result;
A stage changing means for changing the previous stage information in stages (for example, changing the reach forming pattern from "1" to "2" to "3"),
The identification information is
first identification information (for example, a “2” symbol) that can provide a predetermined first profit to the player when appearing as the predetermined display result;
second identification information (for example, a "7" symbol) that can provide a second profit larger than the first profit to the player when appearing as the predetermined display result;
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb1 characterized in that, while changing the previous stage identification information in stages, a combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When the game is played, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are respectively rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means are controlled. Further, the previous stage revealing means provided in the drive control means reveals previous stage identification information forming a combination of previous stage identification information of a predetermined display result, and the step change display means also provided in the drive control means The means changes the previous stage information in stages. Here, when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result, first identification information that can provide a predetermined first profit to the player, and when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result, a game and second identification information that can provide the person with a second benefit that is larger than the first benefit. Then, while the previous stage identification information is being changed in stages, the combination of the previous stage information is changed by the stage changing means so as not to include the previous stage information based on the second identification information. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information, and the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed in stages can be changed. By not allowing the players to appear, it is possible to suppress the players from losing interest in the game due to the feeling that the profits that can be awarded have decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotation means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (for example, ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb2 characterized in that the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Nb2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nb1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotation means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the combination of previous stage identification information is changed by the stage changing means so as to correspond to a predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages to correspond to a predetermined permutation, the second identification information that can provide a larger profit to the player than the first identification information is changed before the previous stage identification information can be changed in stages. By not allowing intermediate stages of the stage identification information to appear, it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest in the game due to the feeling that the profits that can be awarded have decreased, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2,
The rotation means is
Alternating arrangement means for alternately arranging the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the part of "1" → "2" → "3", or the part of "5" → "6" → "7") → "8" part).

According to the gaming machine Nb3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the alternating arrangement means of the rotation means, the first identification information and the second identification information are arranged alternately. As a result, when the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately displayed in the dynamic display to enrich the variation of the game and change the previous stage identification information in stages, the first identification information This is because the second identification information that can provide a larger profit to the player does not appear in the middle of the previous stage identification information that can change step by step, and the player feels that the profit that can be provided has decreased. This has the effect of suppressing the disinterest in playing the game and increasing the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3,
The step change means is
At least, after displaying predetermined first pre-stage identification information that is the pre-stage identification information, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to provide a second pre-stage that can constitute a part of the predetermined display result. It is configured to be able to display stage identification information,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb4 characterized in that the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information is not displayed as the first preceding stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the stage change means has revealed at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information that is the pre-stage information, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form part of the predetermined display result. The obtained second pre-stage identification information is configured to be visible. The stage change means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information does not appear as the first previous stage identification information. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information, and the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed in stages can be changed. By not allowing the players to appear, it is possible to suppress the players from losing interest in the game due to the feeling that the profits that can be awarded have decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine Nb4,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb5 characterized in that the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information can be displayed as the second preceding stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nb4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the stage changing means is configured to be able to bring out the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information as the second previous stage identification information. If the second identification information can appear as preliminary identification information that constitutes a part of the predetermined display result, by revealing the preliminary identification information based on the second identification information that provides a large profit that can be given to the player, This has the effect of increasing the variety of games, preventing players from thinking that the profits that can be awarded have decreased, suppressing the loss of interest in the games, and improving the interest in the games.

In any of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5,
The dynamic execution means includes:
When the determination means determines that the predetermined display result does not appear, the pre-stage identification information based on the second identification information is configured to be difficult to appear;
A gaming machine Nb6 characterized in that the gaming machine Nb6 is configured to easily display the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result appears.

According to gaming machine Nb6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured such that when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result does not appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is difficult to appear; The configuration is such that when it is determined that the display result will appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is likely to appear. As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a predetermined display result at the stage when the previous stage identification information appears, and when changing the previous stage identification information in stages while enriching the variation of the game, The second identification information, which can provide a larger profit to the player than the first identification information, is prevented from appearing in the middle of the previous stage identification information, which can change step by step, thereby reducing the profit that the player can receive. This has the effect of suppressing the disinterest in playing games due to feelings and improving the interest in playing games.

<Nc group: Excluding reach formation patterns based on identification information that is an opportunity for development production>
Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in presentation means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
at least two or more rotating means (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means includes:
Pre-stage display means for displaying pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information (for example, "reach display") of the predetermined display result;
A stage changing means for changing the previous stage information in stages (for example, changing the reach forming pattern from "1" to "2" to "3"),
The identification information is
comprising development identification information (for example, a "chance" symbol) that can become previous stage information by the previous stage revealing means when appearing in a plurality of the rotating means,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc1 characterized in that, while changing the previous stage identification information in stages, a combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information based on the developed identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When the game is played, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are respectively rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means are controlled. Further, the previous stage revealing means provided in the drive control means reveals previous stage identification information forming a combination of previous stage identification information of a predetermined display result, and the step change display means also provided in the drive control means The means changes the previous stage information in stages. Here, when the identification information is revealed by the plurality of rotating means, advanced identification information that can become the previous stage information is provided by the previous stage revealing means. Then, while the previous stage identification information is being changed step by step, the combination of previous stage information is changed by the stage changing means so as not to include the previous stage information based on the developed identification information. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the developed identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, is prevented from appearing in the middle of the previous stage identification information, which can change in stages. It is said that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the progress status of the performance becoming unclear due to the appearance of the advanced identification information even though the previous stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (for example, ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc2 characterized in that the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

According to the gaming machine Nc2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nc1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotation means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the combination of previous stage identification information is changed by the stage changing means so as to correspond to a predetermined permutation. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages to correspond to a predetermined permutation, the developed identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, can be changed to an intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed in stages. By not allowing the stage identification information to appear, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the progress of the performance becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest in the game. This has the effect of being able to achieve this goal.

In the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2,
The step change means is
At least, after displaying predetermined first pre-stage identification information that is the pre-stage identification information, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to provide a second pre-stage that can constitute a part of the predetermined display result. It is configured to be able to display stage identification information,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc3 characterized in that the previous stage identification information based on the developed identification information is not displayed as the first previous stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the stage change means has revealed at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information that is the pre-stage information, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form part of the predetermined display result. The obtained second pre-stage identification information is configured to be visible. The stage change means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the developed identification information does not appear as the first previous stage identification information. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the developed identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, is prevented from appearing in the middle of the previous stage identification information, which can change in stages. The effect is that it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the progress of the performance becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest in the game. There is.

In the gaming machine Nc3,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc4 characterized in that the stage identification information based on the developed identification information is not displayed as the second stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nc3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the developed identification information does not appear as the second previous stage identification information. As a result, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the developed identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, can be changed to the second previous stage identification information, which is the final stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages. By not allowing even information to appear, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the progress of the performance becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest of the game. This has the effect of making it possible to achieve

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc5 characterized in that when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by omitting the development identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages by the stage changing means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed in stages while omitting the developed identification information. With this, when changing the previous stage identification information in stages, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, is omitted from the previous stage identification information that can change in stages, and the previous stage identification information is changed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the progress status of the performance becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the previous stage identification information has appeared, and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any of gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5,
The dynamic display means includes:
A predetermined first performance,
a second performance in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic execution means includes:
The gaming machine Nc6 is characterized in that the second performance is executed when the development identification information appears in all the rotation means.

According to the gaming machine Nc6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect that more easily produces a predetermined display result than the first effect, and the development identification information is displayed in all rotation means. When it appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic execution means. This creates a gameplay in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotation means, and development occurs in all rotation means. This has the effect of making the game more interesting by drawing attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

In the gaming machine Nc6,
The dynamic execution means includes:
The gaming machine Nc7 is characterized in that the development to the second performance does not occur at the stage where the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Nc6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured so that the development to the second effect does not occur at the stage where the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information. In other words, it is configured such that the second performance does not develop unless the development identification information appears in all the rotating means. This creates a gameplay in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is likely to appear depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotation means, and development occurs in all rotation means. This has the effect of making the game more interesting by drawing attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

<Group O: Delay synchronization control of left symbol row during full rotation and time adjustment with sound>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a winning lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a chance.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display section that can change the symbols visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light emitting section that can change a single color or a luminous color. It is configured to enhance the performance effect during a game by changing the display mode of the performance means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group O have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
three rotating members (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) each having a plurality of types of identification information arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, a motor) for rotationally driving each of the rotation members;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means includes:
At least, a two-member synchronous driving means for driving the rotating members in synchronization with the identification information of the two rotating members aligned (for example, synchronizing the middle reel CR and right reel RR by aligning their symbols) fluctuation) and
synchronizing the rotating members in a state where the identification information of the rotating member rotationally driven in synchronization by the two-member synchronization drive means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member are aligned; a three-member synchronous drive means (for example, synchronously fluctuates by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, and RR),
It is characterized by comprising a music synchronization means for outputting a music in accordance with the rotational drive of the rotary member synchronously driven by the three-member synchronization drive means (for example, music output at a temporary stop during full rotation). Game machine O0.

According to the gaming machine O0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members each having a plurality of types of identification information arranged therein, each of the rotating members is rotationally driven by the rotational drive means, and the rotational drive means is controlled by the drive control means. controlled. In the drive control means, the two-member synchronization drive means drives the rotary members in a synchronized manner with at least the identification information of the two rotary members aligned, and the three-member synchronization drive means synchronizes the two members. The rotating members are driven in a synchronized manner in a state where the identification information of the rotating member that is rotationally driven in synchronization by the driving means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member are aligned. Here, the music synchronization means outputs music in accordance with the rotational drive of the rotating members synchronously driven by the three-member synchronization drive means. This has the effect of making it possible to perform a powerful performance with a rhythmic and good tempo, and increasing the attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, held ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in presentation means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
at least two or more rotating means (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (for example, stepping motor 600) for rotating the rotation means, respectively;
Drive control means (for example, MPU of display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means includes:
a first rotation means for rotating at least one of the rotation means (for example, rotating the middle reel CR and the right reel RR);
a second rotation means (for example, rotates the left reel LR) that rotates the other rotation means after one of the rotation means is rotated by the first rotation means;
Music output means that outputs music in response to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means (for example, outputs music when temporarily stopped at full rotation) A gaming machine O1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine O1, the acquisition means acquires special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the presentation means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When the game is played, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotation drive means rotates each rotation means, and the drive control means rotates the rotation means. Means are controlled. Further, the first rotation means provided in the drive control means rotates at least one rotation means, and the second rotation means also provided in the drive control means rotates the first rotation means. After the rotation means is rotated, the other rotation means are rotated. Here, the music output means outputs music so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, music is output in a manner that corresponds to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated, and by performing a performance that creates a sense of unity between the rotating means that are rotated and the music that is output, it is possible to output music at different timings. This has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort caused by the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated by the player, and increasing the level of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O1,
The first rotation means includes at least two means of synchronous rotation means (for example, a middle reel CR and a right reel RR) that rotate the two rotation means in synchronization with predetermined first identification information in the same state. Align the symbols and synchronize fluctuations),
The second rotation means is
a three-means synchronous rotation in which the first identification information rotated in synchronization by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information in the other rotation means are aligned and rotated in synchronization; A moving means (for example, synchronized fluctuation by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, RR),
The music output means includes:
A music synchronization means (for example, when the two means synchronous rotation means and the three means synchronous rotation means) output music in a manner that corresponds to the start of rotation of the rotation means synchronously rotated by the three means synchronous rotation means (for example, when the two means synchronous rotation means A game machine O2 characterized in that it is equipped with a music output (music output when temporarily stopped).

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the two means synchronous rotation means provided in the first rotation means, at least the two rotation means are rotated in synchronization with the predetermined first identification information aligned. Further, by the three means synchronous rotation means provided in the second rotation means, the first identification information rotated synchronously by the two means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information in the other rotation means. are rotated in synchronization with the two aligned. Then, the music synchronization means provided in the music output means outputs music in a manner that corresponds to the start of rotation of the rotation means that are rotated synchronously by the two-way synchronous rotation means and the three-way synchronous rotation means. be done. As a result, music is output in a manner that corresponds to the rotation of the rotating means that are rotated in synchronization, and a performance that creates a sense of unity between the rotating means that are rotated in synchronization and the output music is performed. This has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2,
The first rotation means is
A gaming machine O3 characterized in that at least one of the rotation means is rotated from a state in which all of the rotation means are not rotated.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first rotation means rotates at least one rotation means from a state in which all rotation means are not rotated. As a result, by outputting music in a manner that corresponds to the start of rotation of the first rotation means, music is output in a manner that corresponds to the rotation of the respective rotation means, and By performing a performance that creates a sense of unity between the moving means and the music being output, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that rotate at different timings, and increase the degree of attention to the game. , there is an effect.

In any of gaming machines O1 to O3,
The music output means includes:
A game characterized in that a predetermined predetermined piece of music is continuously outputted from the start of rotation of the rotation means by the first rotation means to the timing at which rotation of all the rotation means stops. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means continuously outputs the predetermined music piece from the time when the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means until the timing when all the rotation means stop rotating. As a result, the predetermined music is output in response to the start of rotation of the first rotation means, and the output of the predetermined music is continued until the rotation of all the rotation means stops. It is possible to create a sense of unity between the rotation of the music and the output of the music. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O4,
The music output means includes:
outputting a first sound constituting the predetermined music piece at a timing when the rotation means starts rotating by the first rotation means;
The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that a second sound that is different from the first sound and that is a sound constituting the predetermined music piece is output at a timing when the rotation means starts rotating by the second rotation means. .

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means, and the second rotation means starts rotation of the rotation means. A second sound that is different from the first sound and that is a sound that constitutes a predetermined music piece is output at a timing when the second sound is different from the first sound. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music piece is outputted in response to the start of rotation of one rotary means, and the first sound constituting the predetermined music piece is outputted in response to the start of rotation of the other rotary means. By outputting two sounds, it is possible to create a sense of unity as the music is completed in response to the rotation of the rotation means. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O5,
The music output means includes:
Outputting the first sound and the second sound in accordance with the time signature (for example, the first beat and the second beat in one measure) at a predetermined tempo (for example, 4/4 time of BPM 120); Characteristic game machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound and the second sound in accordance with the beat at a predetermined tempo. As a result, the first sound constituting a predetermined piece of music is output in accordance with the beat at a predetermined tempo so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the first rotation means, and also correspond to the start of rotation of the other rotation means. By outputting the second sound constituting the predetermined music according to the beat at the predetermined tempo, a sense of unity of the music is created by completing the music at the predetermined tempo in response to the rotation of the rotating means. be able to. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O5,
The music output means includes:
A gaming machine O7 characterized in that the first tone and the second tone form a special tone (for example, a chord) that creates a predetermined harmony.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means forms a special sound that creates a predetermined harmony between the first sound and the second sound. As a result, the first sound forming the special sound corresponding to the start of rotation of one rotating means is output, and the first sound forming the special sound corresponding to the start of rotation of the other rotating means is output. It is possible to create a sense of unity by outputting two sounds and completing a special sound having a predetermined harmony in response to the rotation of the rotation means. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, any of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine B0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine C0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine D0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine E0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine F0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine G0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine H0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machine I0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine J0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine K0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machine L0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine M0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine N0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, O0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machine O0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C11, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines L0 to L4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines M0 to M4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, A configuration limited to any one of F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines O0 to O7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied. .

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine A0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine B0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine C0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine D0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine E0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine F0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine G0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine H0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine I0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine J0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine K0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine L0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine M0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

Note that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine O0.

In these cases, additional effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (big prize opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win balls, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is awarded. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A game characterized in that in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
60a Board first decorative symbol group 60b Board second decorative symbol group 81 Drum display device (part of display means, part of presentation means, part of second presentation means)
110 Main control device 113 Audio lamp control device (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage presentation means, part of stage change means)
201 MPU (part of determination means)
203f Holding ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of suggestive information lottery means)
222e Light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f Confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 223d Light guide pattern lottery counter 223e Confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 310 Confirmed lamp unit (part of second presentation means)
311 Confirmation lamp (part of the second production means, part of the second light emitting means)
400 Light guiding unit (part of the production means, part of the first production means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of the first production means, part of the second light guide means)
411 Second decorative pattern group 412 Third decorative pattern (part of second suggestion information)
413 Fourth decorative pattern group (part of first suggestion information, part of second predetermined information)
414 Lower LED unit (part of light emitting means, part of first light emitting means)
414c Front lower LED (part of second light emitting means)
414d Front lower condensing lens 415 Front right LED unit (part of second production means)
415c Front right LED (part of the first light emitting means, part of the second light emitting means)
415d Front right condensing lens (part of condensing means)
416c Front left LED (part of the first light emitting means)
416d Front left condensing lens (part of condensing means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of the light guide means, part of the second direction means, part of the first light guide means)
421 First decorative pattern group (part of predetermined information, part of third suggestion information, part of first predetermined information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of the first production means)
422c LED for upper rear side (part of first light emitting means)
423 Rear upper diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
424 LED for lower rear side (part of the light emitting part, part of the first light emitting part, part of the second light emitting part, part of the third light emitting part)
425 Rear downward diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
425a Left direction diffusion section (part of the first direction irradiation section)
425b Front direction diffusion section (part of second direction irradiation section)
425c Right direction diffusion section (part of the third direction irradiation section)
430 Display area forming member 431 Central opening 432 Lens cut (part of cover part)
C1 Jackpot random number counter (part of special information)
CR middle reel (part of the rotating means, part of the common rotating means, part of the second rotating means, part of the three-way synchronous rotating means)
LR left reel (part of the rotation means, part of the non-common rotation means, part of the first rotation means, part of the two means synchronous rotation means)
RR right reel (part of the rotation means, part of the common rotation means, part of the first rotation means, part of the two means synchronous rotation means)
600 Stepping motor (part of rotation drive means)

Claims (1)

acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means for making a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determining means,
Suggestive information lottery means for drawing a lottery for execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value will be given to the player based on the determination result by the determining means,
The suggested information includes at least:
first suggestion information capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded; comprising second suggestion information that can suggest, and third suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be given is higher than the second suggestion information;
The gaming machine is
a first light emitting means that emits light;
A gaming machine comprising: second light emitting means capable of emitting light and different from the first light emitting means.

Images